NewEra Software, Inc.
SAE
User's Guide
Release :
Revision :
Date :
Classification :
16.0
1
1-October-2017
GA
Copyright, Trademark and Legal Notices
COPYRIGHTS
This User’s Guide and the related Software Product(s) are protected under a
Copyright dated 2017 by NewEra Software, Inc. All rights are reserved.
LICENSE
AGREEMENT
This User’s Guide describes the installation and operation of SAE, its standalone environment and applications. It is made available only under the terms
of a license agreement between the licensee and NewEra Software Inc. No
part of this User’s Guide or the related Software Products(s)may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without
the express written permission of NewEra Software, Inc.
THE
TRADEMARKS
AND
COPYRIGHTS
OF OTHERS
The following products and/or registered trademarks of International
Business Machines Corporation are referenced in this document: MVS, VM,
RACF, z/OS, SYSPLEX, JES, VTAM, TSO, ISPF, ICKDSF, DFSMSdss,
DR/DSS, and others.
The following products and/or registered trademarks of Innovation Data
Processing are referenced in this document: FDR. DSF, and others.
Note: SAE does not use FDR or DFSMSdss in processing tapes created by
those products. The file format of FDR and DFSMSdss tapes vary and may
change from release to release. SAE may not support all current FDR or
DFSMSddss formats nor the formats of future FDR or DFSMSdss releases.
GA
1-1
Technical Support Information
Around-TheClock Support
NewEra Software is dedicated to providing the highest level of technical
support to meet our customers growing needs. In order to meet these needs,
NewEra provides around-the-clock technical support, 7 days a week, 24 hours
a day.
Reaching Us By
Telephone
During Business
Hours
In case of an emergency, please use the following phone numbers to reach our
technical support staff during normal business hours (6 AM to 4 PM Pacific
Time):
In North America, dial 1-800-421-5035
Outside North America, dial 1-408-201-7000
Reaching Us By
Telephone
During NonBusiness Hours
During non business hours, phone the above numbers and you will receive
instructions on how to contact a Technical Support Representative or a
Technical Support Manager.
Sending Email
If you have access to the Internet, you can send our technical support staff an
email message (support@newera.com).
Your email message will be answered by the next business day. If you have
product technical questions or product recommendations, you can send them
as an email message.
Help Through
the NewEra
Website
If you have access to the Internet, you can access our technical support staff
from www.newera.com. Your request will be answered by the next business
day.
Service Levels
NewEra is committed to providing the highest level of quality to our
customers by adopting the following criteria for responding to customer
requests:
We Want Your
Suggestions!
All critical questions received by phone during working hours will be answered
within 15 minutes of receiving the request.
All email or NewEra Homepage technical questions will be answered by the next
business day.
NewEra understands the significance of providing our customers with the
highest quality support and welcomes all suggestions as to how we may
improve Technical Support.
1-2
Table of Contents
Copyright, Trademark and Legal Notices ..................................................................................... 1-1
Technical Support Information ..................................................................................................... 1-2
Part I:
SAE – What’s It All About?
The Environment ........................................................................................................................ 1-10
The Applications ......................................................................................................................... 1-11
System Requirements.................................................................................................................. 1-13
What’s New in Release 16 .......................................................................................................... 1-14
What’s New in Release 15 .......................................................................................................... 1-14
What’s New in Release 14 .......................................................................................................... 1-15
Part II:
SAE Installation
Chapter 1:
Introduction
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 1-19
Chapter 2:
Installing SAE
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 2-21
Downloading from the Web........................................................................................................ 2-23
Transferring Files ........................................................................................................................ 2-23
Creating the DLIB/CNTL/LOAD Datasets ................................................................................ 2-24
Completing the Installation ......................................................................................................... 2-25
Chapter 3:
Installing SAE Product Trial
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 3-27
Downloading from the Web........................................................................................................ 3-28
Transferring Files ........................................................................................................................ 3-28
Creating the SAE Distribution Tape ........................................................................................... 3-29
Chapter 4:
Licensing SAE
Licensing Release 16.0 ............................................................................................................... 4-31
Chapter 5:
Customizing SAE
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 5-33
OPTIONS Job ............................................................................................................................. 5-34
SAE OPTION Report ................................................................................................................. 5-35
OPTION JOB Input Parameter Keywords .................................................................................. 5-38
PASSWORDx= Keyword........................................................................................................... 5-39
Access Authority Matrix ............................................................................................................. 5-40
CONSOLEx= Keyword .............................................................................................................. 5-42
ERASE= Keyword ...................................................................................................................... 5-43
PROTECT= Keyword................................................................................................................. 5-44
RACFPASS= Keyword .............................................................................................................. 5-45
AUDIT_TYPE= Keyword .......................................................................................................... 5-46
AUDIT_DSN= Keyword ............................................................................................................ 5-47
PRINT_TYPE= Keyword ........................................................................................................... 5-48
PRINT_UNIT= Keyword ........................................................................................................... 5-50
1-3
GA
PRINT_VOL= Keyword............................................................................................................. 5-51
PRINT_DSN= Keyword ............................................................................................................. 5-52
INDEX_DSN= Keyword ............................................................................................................ 5-53
TAPEVOLx= Keyword .............................................................................................................. 5-54
Chapter 6:
Preparing SAE for IPL
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 6-55
Preparing for DASD IPL ............................................................................................................ 6-56
Preparing for TAPE IPL ............................................................................................................. 6-58
Preparing for CD-ROM/Network IPL ........................................................................................ 6-59
Chapter 7:
Using Audit Control
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 7-61
Using Audit ................................................................................................................................. 7-62
CATAUDIT Job ......................................................................................................................... 7-63
RPTAUDIT Job .......................................................................................................................... 7-64
Chapter 8:
Using Backup Control System
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 8-65
Backup Control System .............................................................................................................. 8-66
MSTRINIT .................................................................................................................................. 8-67
TAPEINIT .................................................................................................................................. 8-69
TAPETEST ................................................................................................................................. 8-70
Backup Dataset List .................................................................................................................... 8-72
Backup Master Control ............................................................................................................... 8-73
Backup Reporting ....................................................................................................................... 8-74
Part III:
How to IPL SAE
Chapter 9:
IPLing SAE
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 9-79
Performing DASD IPL ............................................................................................................... 9-81
Performing TAPE IPL ................................................................................................................ 9-84
Performing a CD-ROM/Network File IPL ................................................................................. 9-86
IPLing Under VM ....................................................................................................................... 9-89
Preparing for Use Under VM ...................................................................................................... 9-90
TAPE IPL Under VM ................................................................................................................. 9-91
DASD IPL Under VM ................................................................................................................ 9-93
Console ....................................................................................................................................... 9-95
Establishing a Console via LOADPARM ................................................................................... 9-96
Chapter 10:
Logging On to SAE
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 10-97
SAE Logon ............................................................................................................................... 10-98
Override .................................................................................................................................... 10-99
Password ................................................................................................................................. 10-100
SAE Logon Screen Information.............................................................................................. 10-101
Chapter 11:
Automatic Printer Output Assignment
Automatic Printer Output Assignment .................................................................................... 11-103
1-4
Chapter 12:
SAE Primary Screen
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 12-105
Functional Description ............................................................................................................ 12-106
Common PF Key Assignments ............................................................................................... 12-108
Chapter 13:
SAE Settings
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 13-109
SAE IPL Options .................................................................................................................... 13-110
Printer Control – Activate Print Output .................................................................................. 13-111
Printing to Disk Dataset .......................................................................................................... 13-113
Print to Disk Dataset via Option 0.1 ....................................................................................... 13-114
Printer to Disk Dataset via Other Than Option 0.1 ................................................................. 13-115
Print to Disk Dataset - Dataset Allocation .............................................................................. 13-116
Printing to a Tape Dataset ....................................................................................................... 13-117
Switching Print Output Direction ........................................................................................... 13-119
Setting the TOD Clock............................................................................................................ 13-120
Set Volume Selection Re-Use ................................................................................................. 13-121
Part IV:
Action Services
Chapter 14:
Action Services
What are Action Services........................................................................................................ 14-126
List of Action Services............................................................................................................ 14-127
Action Services Overview ...................................................................................................... 14-129
Chapter 15:
Volume Services
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 15-131
Creating a Volume List ........................................................................................................... 15-132
Volume Selection Re-Use Screen ........................................................................................... 15-135
Volume Selection .................................................................................................................... 15-137
Printing a Volume List ............................................................................................................ 15-139
Invoking Services ................................................................................................................... 15-140
Rename Volumes .................................................................................................................... 15-141
Dataset Allocation – “A” ........................................................................................................ 15-142
Volume Information – “I” ....................................................................................................... 15-143
Volume Initialization – “V” .................................................................................................... 15-144
Volume Map – “M” ................................................................................................................ 15-147
Sorting the Volume Map Extent List ...................................................................................... 15-149
Locating an Extent .................................................................................................................. 15-150
Printing the Volume Map List ................................................................................................ 15-151
Invoking DASD Extent Services ............................................................................................ 15-152
DASD Extent Services ............................................................................................................ 15-153
View/Alter Screen for DASD Extent Record ......................................................................... 15-154
Chapter 16:
Dataset Services
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 16-157
Dataset Selection..................................................................................................................... 16-158
Locating a Dataset................................................................................................................... 16-159
Dataset List Print .................................................................................................................... 16-160
Invoking Services ................................................................................................................... 16-161
Dataset RACF and Password Indicators ................................................................................. 16-163
1-5
GA
Dataset Rename - R ................................................................................................................ 16-164
Dataset Information - I ............................................................................................................ 16-165
Dataset Allocation - ALLOC .................................................................................................. 16-167
Valid Dataset Allocation Specifications ................................................................................. 16-169
Copying Between Datasets ..................................................................................................... 16-172
Copying Selected Members .................................................................................................... 16-177
Dataset Copy Restrictions ....................................................................................................... 16-179
Source and Target Datasets ..................................................................................................... 16-180
Chapter 17:
Member Services
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 17-181
Member Selection – Edit/Browse ........................................................................................... 17-182
Member Selection – Zap/Verify ............................................................................................. 17-183
Locating a Member ................................................................................................................. 17-184
Print Member List ................................................................................................................... 17-185
Invoking Services ................................................................................................................... 17-186
Empty Datasets and New Member (Edit Only) ...................................................................... 17-187
Member Create (Edit Only) .................................................................................................... 17-188
Member Rename (Edit or Zap Only) ...................................................................................... 17-189
Member Delete (Edit or Zap Only) ......................................................................................... 17-190
CSECT Selection – ZAP/Verify ............................................................................................. 17-191
Selecting a CSECT ................................................................................................................. 17-192
Chapter 18:
Edit Services
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 18-193
Edit/Browse ............................................................................................................................ 18-194
Positioning .............................................................................................................................. 18-195
Printing.................................................................................................................................... 18-196
Altering Contents .................................................................................................................... 18-197
Member Undelete (Edit Only) ................................................................................................ 18-199
Chapter 19:
Zap Services
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 19-201
ZAP/Verify ............................................................................................................................. 19-202
Positioning .............................................................................................................................. 19-203
Command Line Commands .................................................................................................... 19-204
Altering Contents .................................................................................................................... 19-205
ZAP Saving a Zapped Dataset ................................................................................................ 19-206
Chapter 20:
Catalog Services
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 20-207
Catalog Selection .................................................................................................................... 20-208
Altercat/Listcat........................................................................................................................ 20-209
Catalog Types ......................................................................................................................... 20-210
Locating a Catalog Entry ........................................................................................................ 20-211
Invoking Dataset Services from Catalog Services .................................................................. 20-212
Altering a Catalog Entry ......................................................................................................... 20-213
Capturing Tape Column Serial Numbers ................................................................................ 20-214
Circumventing Uncataloged Dataset Problems ...................................................................... 20-215
Part V:
Fast DASD Erase
1-6
Fast DASD Erase Overview ................................................................................................... 20-219
Unit Selection ......................................................................................................................... 20-220
EAV Erase Setting .................................................................................................................. 20-222
Erase Parameter Setting .......................................................................................................... 20-223
Erase Reports .......................................................................................................................... 20-226
Fast DASD Erase/QUICK INIT Selection.............................................................................. 20-227
Sorting Volume List................................................................................................................ 20-228
Locating a Volume.................................................................................................................. 20-229
Printing a Volume List ............................................................................................................ 20-230
Erase Commands .................................................................................................................... 20-231
Starting an Erase ..................................................................................................................... 20-233
Erase Status ............................................................................................................................. 20-235
Fast DASD Erase Monitoring ................................................................................................. 20-236
DRPCLIP Command .............................................................................................................. 20-237
Erase Summary Report ........................................................................................................... 20-238
Erase Failure ........................................................................................................................... 20-240
No Response Conditions ......................................................................................................... 20-243
Part VI:
Hardware Confirmation
Hardware Confirmation Process Diagram .............................................................................. 20-245
Device Services....................................................................................................................... 20-246
Device Selection ..................................................................................................................... 20-249
Sorting a Device List .............................................................................................................. 20-251
Locating a Device ................................................................................................................... 20-252
Printing a Device List ............................................................................................................. 20-253
Invoking Services ................................................................................................................... 20-254
Part VII:
Chapter 21:
Restore Services
Restore Services
Chapter 22:
IEB Restore
IEB Restore Overview ............................................................................................................ 22-260
Restoring Datasets with IEB Restore ...................................................................................... 22-264
IEB Restore Dataset Restrictions ............................................................................................ 22-265
IEB Restore Target Dataset Selection..................................................................................... 22-266
IEB Restore Using the Backup Master from Tape ................................................................. 22-267
IEB Restore Backup Master Selection .................................................................................... 22-269
IEB Restore Backup Master Selection Commands................................................................. 22-271
IEB Restore Backup Tape Mount ........................................................................................... 22-272
IEB Restore Advanced Processing ......................................................................................... 22-276
Chapter 23:
Tape Scan
Tape Scan Overview ............................................................................................................... 23-278
Tape Scan ................................................................................................................................ 23-279
Chapter 24:
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Restore
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Dataset Restore Overview .................................................................. 24-282
DSS Dataset Restore Restrictions ........................................................................................... 24-283
1-7
GA
Chapter 25:
FDR/DSF Restore
FDR/DSF Dataset Restore Overview ..................................................................................... 25-286
FDR Dataset Restore Restrictions .......................................................................................... 25-287
Chapter 26:
DSS or FDR Restore
Preparing for a DSS or FDR Restore ...................................................................................... 26-290
Full Volume Restore Requirements ........................................................................................ 26-291
Obtaining Backup Tape Volsers ............................................................................................. 26-292
Obtaining Tape Drive Unit Addresses .................................................................................... 26-294
Obtaining Dataset Information ............................................................................................... 26-295
INSPECT ................................................................................................................................ 26-296
Performing a DSS or FDR Restore ......................................................................................... 26-300
Full Volume Restore Target Identification ............................................................................. 26-301
Identifying the Tape Volumes ................................................................................................ 26-302
Tape Mount Options ............................................................................................................... 26-304
First Volume Mount................................................................................................................ 26-306
Backup Information ................................................................................................................ 26-307
Dataset Restore Source Dataset Selection .............................................................................. 26-308
Restore Confirmation .............................................................................................................. 26-309
Restore Time ........................................................................................................................... 26-311
Performing a DSS or FDR Compare ...................................................................................... 26-313
Full Volume DSS/FDR Compare ........................................................................................... 26-314
DSS/FDR Dataset Compare .................................................................................................... 26-316
Chapter 27:
Performing a Volume Copy
Volume Copy Overview ......................................................................................................... 27-320
Volume Copy Source and Target Identification ..................................................................... 27-321
Copy Confirmation ................................................................................................................. 27-322
Chapter 28:
Performing a Volume Compare
Volume Compare Overview ................................................................................................... 28-324
Volume Compare Source and Target Identification ............................................................... 28-325
Compare Confirmation ........................................................................................................... 28-326
Part VIII:
Troubleshooting
Wait State Codes ..................................................................................................................... 28-330
Stand Alone Dump.................................................................................................................. 28-332
I/O Errors ................................................................................................................................ 28-333
1-8
Part I:
SAE – What’s It All About?
Overview
Introduction
SAE (Stand Alone Environment) is the standard for large system repair and
recovery. Worldwide, thousands of technical professionals depend on SAE
(and its companion product, IMAGE Focus) as indispensable tools for
managing of all levels of z/OS systems and Sysplex configurations.
In This Part
This part contains the following topics:
Chapter
GA
See Page
The Environment
1-10
The Applications
1-11
System Requirements
1-13
1-9
The Environment
Standalone
Operation
Perhaps the most unique part of SAE is its fundamental method of operation.
Unlike other System Management Tools, SAE runs in a completely
standalone mode. This method of operation is so complete that SAE provides
its own operating system environment - the SAE environment is completely
detached from z/OS and its subsystems.
Key Features
SAE has the following key features:
Feature
Description
Self-loading
SAE requires minimal installation. When IPLed, SAE is active and
accessible in seconds. The SAE environment does not depend on
any other software or catalogs, and it provides full dataset access.
Complete
Security
SAE is functional when normal security systems are not available.
As an added safeguard against unwarranted usage, SAE provides
integrated multi-level security. Each SAE application and its
related functions are password protected. You can log each
interaction, from initialization to shutdown, to a completely secure
dataset.
Input/Output
SAE controls all I/O requests. This allows SAE applications (like
ACTION SERVICES and DASD ERASE) to perform fast I/O
while reading and updating files or catalogs. SAE provides console
displays and screens for user input/output.
Data Integrity To ensure another system cannot access a DASD unit during
editing, zapping, and catalog alter functions, SAE provides multisystem data integrity by issuing a HARDWARE RESERVE.
The DASD unit is always in a RESERVED state when any edit,
zap or catalog alter screen displays. The unit is also reserved during
several alteration processes (for example, dataset rename). If SAE
attempts I/O to a volume that is reserved by another system (Start
Pending), an I/O error is reported by SAE. Because SAE does not
reserve the volume, you can see the error during a
Browse/Verify/Listcat operation.
Full-Screen
Interface
SAE controls all interaction using any attached local, non-SNA,
3270 terminal. This full-screen support (modeled after ISPF)
results in fast operator start-up with little, if any, need for training.
All SAE screens support full-screen operation, so you can modify
fields in any order. In addition, SAE supports INSERT, DELETE
and ERASE EOF keys, as well as 24 PFkeys.
1-10
The Applications
Reasons for
Using
Applications
Applications that run in the SAE environment are designed:
to enhance your ability to quickly diagnose, repair and recover from a system
failure
as an alternative to the floor system that is provided at their Disaster Recovery
Site
All applications are completely integrated, and exploit the SAE
environment’s features.
List of
Applications
You can access the following applications from the SAE Primary
Applications Menu:
Application
Description
ACTION
SERVICES
The ACTION SERVICES application provides complete access
to all DASD Devices and Datasets. The ACTION SERVICES
interface automatically generates a Unit, Volume, or Dataset
selection list modeled after ISPF. You can use these lists to
locate critical datasets or members, and use specific ACTION
SERVICES to make system repairs. The ACTION SERVICES
set includes: Edit, Copy, Delete, Save, Undelete, Altercat, ZAP,
Rename, and Allocate.
FAST DASD
ERASE
Often used in conjunction with disaster recovery testing, Fast
DASD Erase offers a cost effective alternative to standard dataerasing utilities. Fast DASD Erase totally erases all user
information and produces complete audit reports in the time it
would take to reinitialize the VTOC's on all volumes.
RESTORE
RESTORE is the fastest way to restore a single dataset. Unlike
other backup and recovery systems that require you to restore a
complete volume, RESTORE lets you restore any single dataset
or member originally created using IEBCOPY, IEBGENER,
DFSMSdss or FDR. RESTORE performs full volume restores
from DFSMSdss or FDR if required.
Note:
SAE does not use FDR or DFSMSdss in processing
tapes created by those products. The file format of FDR
and DFSMSdss tapes vary and may change from
release to release. SAE may not support all current
FDR or DFSMSdss formats or the formats of future
FDR or DFSMSdss releases.
Continued on next page
1-11
GA
The Applications, Continued
List of Applications (continued)
Application
Description
HARDWARE
CONFIRMATION
HARDWARE CONFIRMATION inspects your hardware
configuration and the accessibility to all I/O devices.
HARDWARE CONFIRMATION checks on the status,
availability and address of each I/O device.
Image Services
Image Services helps you rapidly repair your z/OS Systems
using both INSPECT and BLUEPRINT COMPARISON
INSPECT automatically isolates the components that
comprise a specific z/OS image. Results are almost
instantaneous. They include a log of the steps and results in
the validation process, which are then available for review
on-line or in hard copy. INSPECT identifies and then
accesses only the volumes and datasets for that specific z/OS
image under investigation. This powerful application
simplifies repairs and ensures that the datasets being
analyzed and edited are the ones being used by the failed
Image. Installations that maintain multiple z/OS Images will
save time during critical system outages because FOCUS
will automatically guide users to the specific SYSRES,
IODF, CATALOG and/or DATASET(s) that need repair.
Concurrently, SAE provides the ACTION SERVICES that
are required to complete the job.
BLUEPRINT COMPARISON works with the z/OS-based
product IMAGE Focus to identify changes that have
occurred in system parameter libraries. This allows you to
quickly identify the root of any system problem.
1-12
System Requirements
Supported
z/OS ICKDSF
Systems
SAE supports datasets that reside on z/OS ICKDSF formatted 3390, 3380,
3375, 3350, 3330 or 9345 direct access storage devices. VTOCs in both OS
and INDEXED format are supported.
For the newer Extended Address Volumes (EAVs) there are some
restrictions. SAE R16 does not support I/O operations into the Cylinder
Managed Space but does support I/O operations to the Track Managed Space.
This means that for datasets that reside in the Track Managed Space on
EAVs, all normal operations are supported. Operations that are at the volume
level (copy, restore, etc.) are not supported for EAVs.
Releases of SAE prior to R15 are not “EAV aware” and should not be used
with EAV volumes.
Supported CPUs
SAE R16 will only run on z/Architecture CPUs. For use on S/370/XA,
S/370/ESA and S/390 CPUs, SAE R15 must be used.
Supported
3278-2 Devices
SAE supports 3278-2 (24 rows/80 columns) like devices that are locally
attached via a 3x74 control.
1-13
GA
What’s New in Release 16
zArchitecture
SAE Release 16 has been reengineered to operate on z/Architecture
processors. z/Architecture introduced significant changes to the Prefixed
storage area (PSA), Program Status Words (PSW), etc. and SAE R16 has
been changed to operate in that environment.
SAE R16 will not operate on processors using S/370/XA, S/370/ESA or
S/390 architectures. However, if SAE is IPLed on a processor that is in
S/370/XA, S/370/ESA or S/390 architecture mode and if the processor
supports z/Architecture, SAE will switch the processor to z/Architecture
mode and continue. All processors since the z900 (released in the year 2000)
support zArchitecture.
Various Updates
Various improvements throughout the product.
What’s New in Release 15
EAV Support
SAE Release 15 is “Extended Address Volume (EAV) aware” and support
some operations on EAV volumes and prevents other operations that could be
destructive if used with EAVs.
SAE R15 does not support I/O operations into the Cylinder Managed Space
but does support I/O operations to the Track Managed Space. This means that
for datasets that reside in the Track Managed Space on EAVs, all normal
operations are supported. Operations that are at the volume level (copy,
restore, etc.) are not supported for EAVs.
Releases of SAE prior to R15 are not “EAV aware” and should not be used
with EAV volumes.
Parallel Access
Volume (PAV)
Alias Erase
Exclusion
PAV Alias volumes may be excluded from erase
Various Updates
Various improvements throughout the product.
1-14
What’s New in Release 14
Duplicate Volser
Identifier
SAE Release 14 adds the ability to sort the Volume Selection list such that
volumes with duplicate volsers are bubbled to the top. This allows duplicate
volsers to be easily identified and volumes renamed to eliminate duplicates.
The SORTDUP command is used on the Action Services Volume Selection
List.
New Installation
Process
With SAE Release 14, the installation process has been streamlined to
improve the process. SAE may be optionally licensed prior to web download
to avoid installation steps.
Restore from
DASD
Support for DSS or FDR Restores from DUMP datasets that reside on DASD
Multiple
Restores without
Tape dismount
Support for multiple DSS or FDR restores from the same tape without
dismounting the tape.
Various Updates
Various improvements to Fast DASD Erase and Support for Map command
from Device List when volume is unlabeled
1-15
GA
Part II:
SAE Installation
Overview
Introduction
This part of the guide describes how to download and install NewEra
Software’s SAE.
In This Part
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Introduction
1-19
Installing SAE
2-21
Installing SAE Product Trial
3-27
Licensing SAE
4-31
Customizing SAE
5-33
Preparing SAE for IPL
6-55
Using Audit Control
7-61
Using Backup Control System
8-65
1-17
Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview
Introduction
NewEra has revised the SAE installation procedure to provide better SAE
management
SAE Distribution
A single JCL stream now contains all the SAE components required.
SAE can be pre-licensed prior to web download so that post download licensing
steps can be avoided
SAE IPL-able versions are all created from one central location.
SAE is distributed in two forms; A complete product distribution file
(SAE@FULL_FUNCTION.NEZ or SAE@ERASE_ONLY.NEZ) or a trial
product file (SAE@TRIAL.NEZ).
Both types of Distribution Files are downloaded over the internet from
NewEra.
The Product Distribution File contains a complete install of the SAE product
which can be configured and placed on DASD or Tape for IPL.
The Trial Distribution File is only used to create a tape from which SAE can
be IPLed. SAE obtained via this method is a complete product offering but
the period of time in which it can be used is limited.
Web Download
Files
Both types of Distribution Files require the use of a Windows operating
system, which is connected over the network to the z/OS System on which
you are going to install SAE.
Continued on next page
GA
1-19
Overview, Continued
Initial
Installation Steps
Product Distribution File
The initial SAE Installation steps for this form of distribution involve running
a single JCL stream that will create the following three datasets on your z/OS
System:
SAE DLIB - SAE Distribution Library
UTIL.CNTL - PDS containing Utility JCL members
UTIL.LOAD - PDS containing Utility Load members
The SAE Distribution Library or SAE DLIB is a dataset that contains your
master copy of SAE. You can then use the supplied SAE utilities to change
the SAE DLIB licensing and option settings.
From the one DLIB, you can then create IPL-able copies of SAE on various
devices. This method of product management provides more control, and
avoids the need for a copy of SAE on tape during the licensing and option
setting procedures. The UTIL.CNTL and UTIL.LOAD datasets provide
utilities to let you license, customize and produce IPL-able copies of SAE.
Trial Distribution File
The initial SAE Installation steps for this form of distribution involve running
a single JCL stream that will create a IPLable tape containing SAE.
1-20
Chapter 2: Installing SAE
Overview
Introduction
This chapter contains information about installing SAE (DLIB and Utilities)
from the Product Distribution File (SAE@FULL_FUNCTION.NEZ or
SAE@ERASE_ONLY.NEZ)
In This Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Downloading from the Web
See Page
2-23
2-23
Transferring Files
GA
Creating the DLIB/CNTL/LOAD Datasets
2-24
Completing the Installation
2-25
2-21
Downloading from the Web
Procedure
To download SAE from the NewEra website:
Step
Action
1.
Open www.newera.com.
2.
Follow the Download links to obtain the SAE download file.
3.
Save the download file to a new directory (for example,
C:/DOWNLOAD/SAE) on your Windows system.
Transferring Files
Pre-Allocating
the Target
Datasets
You must pre-allocate the target dataset for the transfer as described below.
Using ISPF 3.2 is the easiest way to pre-allocate this dataset.
Source File Name
SAE@FULL_FUNCTION.NEZ
or
SAE@ERASE_ONLY
Transfer Files to
z/OS as Follows
Target Dataset
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
RECFM=FB
LRECL=80
BLKSIZE=3120
SPACE=(TRK,(25,5))
Transfer the file in the following table to your z/OS System.
How you transfer the files depends on the tools available in your installation.
Using IND$FILE is perhaps the most common method.
Note: The transfer must take place without any ASCII to EBCDIC
conversion (do not specify ASCII parameter). The transfer is of a
binary file.
Transfer the files as follows:
From Windows
SAE@FULL_FUNCTION.NEZ
To z/OS
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
or
SAE@ERASE_ONLY
GA
2-23
Creating the DLIB/CNTL/LOAD Datasets
Job Streams and
Datasets
After the file transfers are complete, the dataset
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
contains a Job stream. This Job processes the data embedded in the JCL
stream and produces the following datasets as output:
Procedure
prefix.SAE.R16.DLIB
prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL
prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.LOAD.
Use the following procedure to create the DLIB/CNTL/LOAD datasets.
Step
1.
Action
Open the
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
dataset with ISPF Edit.
Utility Functions
2.
Delete the first three records.
3.
Edit the Job Card
4.
Supply the values for the SET statements as described by the comments
in the JCL.
5.
Submit the job.
6.
When the job ends, confirm that the return codes for all steps are zero.
7.
View the contents of prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL to confirm that the
collection of utility jobs exists.
You can use the utility jobs to:
Further customize SAE
Move IPL-able copies to various devices.
Using The Utilities is described on page 5-33.
2-24
Completing the Installation
Common Steps
After creating the SAE DLIB dataset (along with the UTIL.CNTL and
UTIL.LOAD datasets), you can license, customize and create copies of SAE
that you can IPL.
The steps required for SAE licensing, customization and the creation of IPLable copies are the same, regardless of how SAE was delivered (either by
Web Download, CD-ROM, or Distribution Tape).
Completing the
Installation
To complete the installation, see SAE Licensing (page 4-31), SAE
Customization (page 5-33) and SAE IPL Preparation on pages 4-31, 5-33, and
6-55.
2-25
GA
Chapter 3: Installing SAE Product Trial
Overview
Introduction
This chapter contains information on generating an SAE IPL-able
Distribution Tape. (SAE@TRIAL.NEZ)
In This Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
Downloading from the Web
3-28
Transferring Files
3-28
Creating the SAE Distribution Tape
3-29
3-27
Downloading from the Web
Procedure
To download SAE from the NewEra website:
Step
Action
1.
Open www.newera.com.
2.
Follow the Download links to obtain the SAE download file.
3.
Save the download file to a new directory (for example,
C:/DOWNLOAD/SAE) on your Windows system.
Transferring Files
Pre-Allocating
the Target
Datasets
You must pre-allocate the target dataset for the transfer as described below.
Using ISPF 3.2 is the easiest way to pre-allocate this dataset.
Source File Name
SAE@TRIAL.NEZ
Transfer Files to
z/OS as Follows
Target Dataset
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
RECFM=FB
LRECL=80
BLKSIZE=3120
SPACE=(TRK,(25,5))
Transfer the file in the following table to your z/OS System.
How you transfer the files depends on the tools available in your installation.
Using IND$FILE is perhaps the most common method.
Note: The transfer must take place without any ASCII to EBCDIC
conversion (do not specify ASCII parameter). The transfer is of a
binary file.
Transfer the files as follows:
From Windows
SAE@TRIAL.NEZ
To z/OS
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
3-28
Creating the SAE Distribution Tape
Job Streams and
Datasets
After the file transfers are complete, the dataset
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
contains a Job stream. This Job processes the data embedded in the JCL
stream and produces an IPL-able SAE Tape.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to create the tape.
Step
1.
Action
Open the
prefix.SAE.R16.SAE.INSTALL
dataset with ISPF Edit.
2.
Delete the first three records.
3.
Edit the Job Card
4.
Supply the values for the SET statements as described by the comments
in the JCL.
5.
Submit the job.
6.
Mount a Non-labeled (NL) tape for use by the Job. The tape must be NL,
or the IPL process from the tape will not function correctly.
7.
When the job ends, confirm that the return codes for all steps are zero.
Utility Functions
The Licensing and Utilities described in Chapters 4 & 5 do not apply to SAE
Trial.
Limited Use
With the SAE Trail, the tape that is created can be used to directly IPL SAE.
The product will function on any processor for a fixed number of days. The
number of days is customized by NewEra during the preparation of your
SAE@TRIAL.NEZ File.
The tape will also have a permanent expiration date. To take advantage of the
full number of days permitted, you must use the Tape immediately.
For more information on how to IPL SAE from tape, see page 9-84.
3-29
GA
Chapter 4: Licensing SAE
Licensing Release 16.0
Already-Licensed
Customers
Licensed SAE customers must follow the instructions in this chapter to authorize
SAE for their environment if the product has not been pre-licensed or changes in
licensing are required after the product has already been installed.
For the first install of the product, the NEZ File may have been pre-licensed. In these
cases, the licensing steps described here do not have to be performed. If you are
unsure if your NEZ File has been pre-licensed, contact your NewEra representative.
SAE Distribution
Library
The SAE DLIB dataset contains your SAE master copy.
CPU Licensing
Licensing SAE involves defining the serial numbers for the processors on which you
are licensed to run the product and the defining the features of the product for which
you are licensed. Your NewEra representative will provide you with Authorization
Parameters that represent your licensed SAE processors. These Authorization
Parameters are coded in the LICENSE job and must be coded exactly as provided.
LICENSE Job
The prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset contains member LICENSE. This member
contains the JCL to run the DLIB@LIC utility. The DLIB@LIC utility reads the
control statements that you specify, and updates the DLIB dataset with the
authorization settings.
Procedure
To license SAE:
You use utilities to change the licensing and option settings in the SAE DLIB. Then,
from the SAE DLIB, you can create IPL-able copies of SAE on various devices. This
method of product management provides more control, and avoids the need for a
copy of SAE on tape during the licensing and option setting procedures.
Step
Action
1.
Open dataset prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL in ISPF Edit, and select
member LICENSE.
2.
Follow the instructions contained in the comments at the start of the Job.
3.
Ensure you code the following statements exactly as your NewEra
Software Representative provides them:
COMPANY=
LICCNTL=
AUTHxx=
SITEAUTH=
Note: You will receive either one or more AUTHxx= parameters, or just
one SITEAUTH= parameter, depending on the license you purchase.
4.
GA
Submit the Job.
4-31
5.
After Running
the LICENSE
Job
When the Job ends, confirm that the return code is zero.
After running the LICENSE job, the SAE DLIB dataset contains a licensed
version of SAE.
IPL-able copies of SAE created from the newly authorized SAE DLIB reflect
this new authorization.
New
Authorization
Settings
If you have previously created IPL-able copies of SAE, you must replace
them before new authorization settings come into effect. See ‘SAE IPL
Preparation’ on page 6-55 for instructions on creating IPL-able copies of
SAE.
For new installs you can customize your SAE options prior to creating IPLable copies of SAE. See ‘SAE Customization’ on page 5-33 for instructions
on how to customize SAE.
Confirming
Licensing
To confirm which processors SAE is licensed to operate on, IPL a copy of
SAE that was created from the (now-licensed) SAE DLIB.
After IPLing a licensed copy of SAE, a list of licensed processors displays at
the bottom of SAE Primary Screen (see page 12-105) when it first appears.
For example:
LICENSED= ACF1/2064-1C9 1F8A/9672-R36 1F8A/2064-106 0001/7490-000
1FC1/9672-Y96 0100/2064-1C6 01CA/9672-RC6 01FA/2064-1C4
The screen displays up to eight processors on which SAE is licensed to
operate. For each processor, the last four digits of the serial number (for
example, ACF1) display, followed by the processor model (in the above
example, 2064-1C9).
Confirming
Licensing for
Other Processors
You do not have to IPL SAE on each processor to confirm your licensing To
confirm that your licensing is correct for your other processors; review the list
of licensed processors that display.
IPLing on an
Unauthorized
Processor
If you IPL SAE on a unlicensed processor, SAE displays the following
prompt:
ENTER OVERRIDE
===>
SAE IS NOT AUTHORIZED (0). IF THIS IS AN EMERGENCY, YOU CAN OBTAIN AN OVERRIDE
CODE THAT WILL ALLOW SAE TO FUNCTION. TO OBTAIN THE CODE, CONTACT NEWERA
SUPPORT STAFF (1-800-421-5035) AND QUOTE THE FOLLOWING NUMBER – xxxxxxxx
If this occurs, contact NewEra Software to obtain an Override code that will
allow SAE to function. See ‘NewEra Technical Support’ on page 1-2.
4-32
Chapter 5: Customizing SAE
Overview
Introduction
SAE has several user-definable parameters to control the way it functions in
your environment. You can use the procedures in this chapter to customize
SAE for your environment.
In This Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
OPTIONS Job
5-34
SAE OPTION Report
5-35
OPTION JOB Input Parameter Keywords
5-38
PASSWORDx= Keyword
5-39
Access Authority Matrix
5-40
CONSOLEx= Keyword
5-42
ERASE= Keyword
5-43
PROTECT= Keyword
5-44
RACFPASS= Keyword
5-45
AUDIT_TYPE= Keyword
5-46
AUDIT_DSN= Keyword
5-47
PRINT_TYPE= Keyword
5-48
PRINT_UNIT= Keyword
5-50
PRINT_VOL= Keyword
5-51
PRINT_DSN= Keyword
5-52
INDEX_DSN= Keyword
5-53
TAPEVOLx= Keyword
5-54
5-33
OPTIONS Job
Overview
The OPTIONS Job defines parameter settings that influence how SAE
operates.
Setting Options
The prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset contains member OPTIONS. The
OPTIONS member contains the JCL to run the DLIB@OPT utility. The
DLIB@OPT utility reads control statements (that you specify) and updates
the DLIB dataset with the options settings.
Options
Parameters
The OPTIONS Job parameters are defined later in this chapter.
Procedure
To define SAE Options:
Step
New Copies of
SAE Reflect New
Settings
Action
1.
Open dataset prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL using ISPF Edit
2.
Select member OPTIONS
3.
Follow the instructions contained in the comments at the start of the Job
4.
Code the options parameters as required
5.
Submit the job
6.
When the job ends, confirm that the return code is zero
After running the OPTIONS job, the SAE DLIB dataset contains an updated
version of SAE.
All IPL-able copies of SAE that are created from the newly updated SAE
DLIB reflect the new options settings that you defined.
Existing Installs
vs. New Installs
If you have previously created IPL-able copies of SAE, you must now replace
them in order to pick up the new options settings. See ‘SAE IPL Preparation’
on pages 4-31, 5-33, and 6-55. for instructions of creating IPL-able copies of
SAE.
If this is a new install, you may wish to authorize your copy of SAE if you
have not already done so. See ‘SAE Licensing’ on page 4-31 for instructions
on licensing SAE
5-34
SAE OPTION Report
OPTIONS Job
Report Overview
The OPTIONS Job produces a report that shows the before and after
OPTIONS settings. This report is useful in confirming your option settings
have been configured correctly.
Also, if you are uncertain of the current SAE settings in your SAE DLIB
dataset, you can run the OPTIONS job without supplying any parameters and
then use the report to view the settings.
Continued on next page
5-35
GA
SAE OPTION Report, Continued
Sample
OPTIONS Job
Report
1
*** SAE OPTION UTILITY FOR SAE R16 ***
SAE RELEASE 16.0 AT PATCH LEVEL 0001 - ASM(01/01/17 13.00)
******* SAE OPTION SETTINGS FOR INPUT *************************************
*
*
*
FAST DASD ERASE = ENABLED
-- RESTRICTED CONSOLES -- *
*
RACF/PASSWORD
= DISABLED
CONSOLE 1 = NONE
*
*
CONSOLE 2 = NONE
*
*
AUDIT CONTROL
= DISABLED
(DASD IPL ONLY)
CONSOLE 3 = NONE
*
*
AUDIT DATASET
= SYS1.SAE.AUDIT.DYYMMDD.THHMM0
CONSOLE 4 = NONE
*
*
PRINT DATASET
= SYS1.SAE.PRINT.DYYMMDD.THHMM0
CONSOLE 5 = NONE
*
*
AUTO PRINT TYPE = OFF
UNIT=
VOL=
CONSOLE 6 = NONE
*
*
INDEX DATASET
=
*
*
INDEX VOLSER
=
*
*****************************************************************************
*
----- DEFINED PASSWORDS ----*
*
PASSWORD USERID
ACCESS STARTUP PASSWORD:
*
* 1 - AMAZING
SAELVL2
015
-NOT REQUIRED- BACKUP MASTER TAPES -*
* 2 VOL 1 = SAEMT1 VOL2 = SAEMT2 *
* 3 - ERASE PROTECTED DASD VOLUMES -- *
* 4 *
* 5 *
*
*
*****************************************************************************
1
*** SAE OPTION UTILITY FOR SAE R16 ***
SYSIN CONTROL CARDS
PASSWORD1=SECRET,USERID=SUPER,ACCESS=015
PASSWORD SECRET
SET (USERID SUPER
ACCESS 015)
ERASE=ENABLE
PROCESSING SUCCESSFULLY
AUDIT_TYPE=ENABLE
PROCESSING SUCCESSFULLY
AUDIT_DSN=SYS1
PROCESSING SUCCESSFULLY
PRINT_DSN=SYS1
PROCESSING SUCCESSFULLY
PRINT_TYPE=IPL
PROCESSING SUCCESSFULLY
1
*** SAE OPTION UTILITY FOR SAE R16 ***
SAE RELEASE 16.0 AT PATCH LEVEL 0001 - ASM(01/01/17 13.00)
******* SAE OPTION SETTINGS FOR OUTPUT ************************************
*
*
*
FAST DASD ERASE = ENABLED
-- RESTRICTED CONSOLES -- *
*
RACF/PASSWORD
= DISABLED
CONSOLE 1 = NONE
*
*
CONSOLE 2 = NONE
*
*
AUDIT CONTROL
= ENABLED
(DASD IPL ONLY)
CONSOLE 3 = NONE
*
*
AUDIT DATASET
= SYS1.SAE.AUDIT.DYYMMDD.THHMM0
CONSOLE 4 = NONE
*
*
PRINT DATASET
= SYS1.SAE.PRINT.DYYMMDD.THHMM0
CONSOLE 5 = NONE
*
*
AUTO PRINT TYPE = IPL
UNIT=
VOL=
CONSOLE 6 = NONE
*
*
INDEX DATASET
=
*
*
INDEX VOLSER
=
*
*****************************************************************************
* ----- DEFINED PASSWORDS ----*
*
PASSWORD USERID
ACCESS
STARTUP PASSWORD:
*
* 1 - SECRET
SUPER
015
-REQUIRED-- BACKUP MASTER TAPES - *
* 2 VOL 1 = SAEMT1 VOL2 = SAEMT2 *
* 3 - ERASE PROTECTED DASD VOLUMES - *
* 4 *
* 5 *
*
*
**************************************************************
5-36
SAE OPTION Report, Continued
Sample
OPTIONS Job
Report
(Continued)
******* SAE OPTION SETTINGS FOR OUTPUT *******************
*
*
*
FAST DASD ERASE = ENABLED
-- RESTRICTED CONSOLES -- *
*
RACF/PASSWORD
= DISABLED
CONSOLE 1 = NONE
*
*
CONSOLE 2 = NONE
*
*
AUDIT CONTROL
= ENABLED
(DASD IPL ONLY)
CONSOLE 3 = NONE
*
*
AUDIT DATASET
= SYS1.SAE.AUDIT.DYYMMDD.THHMM0
CONSOLE 4 = NONE
*
*
PRINT DATASET
= SYS1.SAE.PRINT.DYYMMDD.THHMM0
CONSOLE 5 = NONE
*
*
AUTO PRINT TYPE = IPL
UNIT=
VOL=
CONSOLE 6 = NONE
*
*
INDEX DATASET
=
*
*
INDEX VOLSER
=
*
**************************************************************
*
----- DEFINED PASSWORDS ----*
*
PASSWORD USERID
ACCESS
STARTUP PASSWORD: *
*
1 - SECRET
SUPER
015
---REQUIRED------- BACKUP MASTER TAPES ----*
*
2 VOL 1 = SAEMT1 VOL2 = SAEMT2
*
*
3 ---- ERASE PROTECTED DASD VOLUMES ---*
*
4 *
*
5 *
*
*
************************************************************
5-37
GA
OPTION JOB Input Parameter Keywords
Keywords
Overview
The DLIB@OPT utility in the OPTIONS Job requires you to provide
keywords.
These keywords define the options you will change and the new values for
those options. The keywords, their purpose, and their valid settings are
described in the following topics.
Specifying
Keywords
You specify keywords in the DLIB@OPT utility via OPTIONS Job’s SYSIN
DD statement.
Keywords must begin in column one.
If a keyword is repeated, options are configured based on the last occurrence.
You can specify comment cards by placing an asterisk in column one
5-38
PASSWORDx= Keyword
Passwords
Overview
You can (optionally) control access to SAE and its specific features using
passwords. You can configure up to five SAE passwords.
You can define passwords so a prompt occurs on the SAE Logon screen when
SAE is first IPLed. This is called the STARTUP password prompt, and is
used to control general access to SAE.
You can also define passwords that provide limited access to various SAE
features. You can define each password to provide access to any combination
of four pre-determined features. Then, when users try to access a feature for
which they are not authorized, a password prompt occurs, which allows a user
to enter a password with sufficient authority.
Password
Criteria
Each password must be unique and must be accompanied by an access
authority number and userid. The access authority number defines the
functions that a user may access.
SAE uses the userid to:
SAE General
Access
update the userid field for member ISPF statistics
assist the Audit Control feature (if enabled, see AUDIT_TYPE= on page 5-46).
For general access to SAE, you must define at least one password with an
access authority number of zero (0), unless the Audit Control feature is
enabled.
If the Audit Control feature is enabled, a Startup password prompt occurs,
regardless of the presence of a password with an access authority number of
0.
SAE Features
and Associated
Authority
Numbers
Each of the following SAE features has been assigned a unique access
authority number. You can add the numbers together to provide combined
access to more than one feature. The access authority number may range from
1 to 15.
Access Authority
Number
One Password
Defined
Provides Access to the Following
SAE Feature
1
Non 'SYS' Datasets
2
Fast DASD Erase feature
4
DASD Extent Zap feature
8
RACF/Password commands
When shipped, SAE has one password defined, with an access authority of
15.
5-39
GA
Access Authority Matrix
Combined Access
Authority Matrix
Use the following chart to determine the combined access authority number
based on a combined access authority number.
Access Authority
Number
RACF
Password
DASD
Extent Zap
Fast DASD
Non “SYS’
Erase
Dataset Access
1
Password
Criteria
Keywords
X
2
X
3
X
4
X
5
X
6
X
X
7
X
X
X
X
8
X
9
X
10
X
X
11
X
X
12
X
X
13
X
X
14
X
X
X
15
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Each password may be one to eight characters long
Each userid may be one to seven characters long
Each access authority number may be one to three digits long
To delete an existing password, specify a password value of NULL
If no passwords are defined (all deleted), the default userid (SAEDIT) has access
authority 15
The PASSWORDx= keyword is specified where 'x' is a number from one to five
PASSWORDx=pppppppp, USERID=uuuuuuu, ACCESS=aaa
PASSWORDx=NULL
Continued on next page
5-40
Access Authority Matrix, Continued
Example
* DEFINE GENERAL ACCESS PASSWORD
PASSWORD1= MAGIC,USERID=SYSTEMS,ACCESS=0
* DEFINE NON-SYS, RACF, AND EXTENT ZAP FOR SUPERVISOR PASSWORD2=
LASER,USERID=SUPRV,ACCESS=13
* DEFINE ERASE ACCESS FOR DRP USE ONLY
PASSWORD3= EXPRESS,USERID=DRP,ACCESS=2
* DELETE PREVIOUS PASSWORD # 4
PASSWORD4= NULL
No Access to
Disabled
Features
Access authority to Fast DASD Erase and RACF/Password does not provide
access to these features when they are disabled.
Keep a Copy of
SAE That Has
No Restrictions
Defining passwords restricts who can use SAE.
Although this is probably your intent, NewEra suggests that you keep a copy
of SAE available that does not have password restrictions (perhaps on tape,
under lock and key). It would be unfortunate, if during an outage, a forgotten
password prevents you from using SAE.
5-41
GA
CONSOLEx= Keyword
Explicitly
Defining
Terminal
Addresses
After IPLing, SAE uses the first locally attached (non-SNA) display device
(terminal) that presents an attention interrupt (Enter Key) as a console.
Unsolicited
Attention
Interrupts
Under some circumstances, certain device types (for example, 7171 and
3088) create unsolicited attention interrupts and accept 3270 data streams. If
you do not define console addresses, the console, in these cases, may be
assigned to such a device.
Six Console
Addresses
You can define up to six (optional) console addresses. After you define
console addresses, SAE ignores attention interrupts for all other display
devices.
Four Digit
Hexadecimal
Numbers for
Consoles
Each console must have a four digit hexadecimal number. To remove a
console definition, code NONE or FFFF for the address. The CONSOLEx=
keyword is specified where 'x' is a number from one to six.
Keywords
CONSOLEx=aaaa
This is good if the only locally attached terminals are in your operations area.
However, you may need to explicitly define the terminal addresses from
which SAE can accept an attention interrupt. You may also want to consider
defining terminal addresses as a means of physical security of restricting
where SAE can be used.
CONSOLEx=NONE
Note
Defining console addresses restricts where you can use SAE. Although this is
probably your intent, you should still keep a copy of SAE available without
such restrictions (perhaps on tape under lock and key). It would be
unfortunate if during a system outage, changed terminal addresses prevented
the use of SAE.
5-42
ERASE= Keyword
Overview
You can enable or disable the Fast DASD Erase feature.
When disabled, SAE does not recognize the ERASE option on the Primary
Screen. SAE ships with this option enabled.
For more information, see ‘Fast DASD Erase’ on page 20-217.
Keywords
ERASE=ENABLE
ERASE=DISABLE
5-43
GA
PROTECT= Keyword
10 Protected
Volumes
You can explicitly define up to ten volume masks (Volsers) that are protected
from the Fast DASD Erase feature. For more information, see ‘Fast DASD
Erase’ on page 20-217.
Not Erasable
Once a volume is protected, no one can select it for erase. The purpose of the
protected list is to protect floor system packs at disaster recovery centers.
After defining the protected Volsers, you can use the ERASEALL command
without concern of erasing the defined packs.
Defining
Protected
Volumes
You can define protected volumes using the PROTECT= keyword. As each
PROTECT= keyword is processed, SAE adds the specified Volser to the end
of the list. If there are already ten volumes defined, the first volume is
removed when the new volume is added.
Clearing the List
To clear the entire list, code PROTECT=CLEAR.
Wild Carding
To use a wild card, place a * in any position. This implies an “always match”
condition. An ending * implies a match in all remaining positions:
Example
SYS*with match SYSxxx (where xxx is any character)
S*RES* with match SxRESx (where x is any character)
PROTECT=SYSRES
PROTECT=SYS*
5-44
RACFPASS= Keyword
Overview
You can enable or disable the RACF/Password Bypass commands.
When disabled, SAE does not recognize the following commands on the Dataset
Selection Screen:
SHOWRACF
NORACF
RACF
NOPASSWORD
PASSWORDW
PASSWORDRW
For more information, see Dataset RACF and Password Indicators on page 16-163.
Keywords
RACFPASS=ENABLE
RACFPASS=DISABLE
5-45
GA
AUDIT_TYPE= Keyword
Overview
The Audit feature provides a record of the SAE user’s activities
You can enable or disable auditing. Auditing is only available when SAE is
IPLed from a DASD device. Audit datasets that contain a record of SAE
activity are created on the DASD device from which SAE is IPLed.
Two Settings
There are two possible settings that enable this feature: ENABLE and
ATTEMPT.
ENABLE
When you use ENABLE, SAE terminates immediately (wait state A7) when
an error occurs that prevents recording of audit records.
A typical error that could cause this situation involves a lack of free space on
the IPL volume. When this occurs, the copy of SAE on that volume becomes
unusable until you resolve the space situation. For this reason, when you are
using AUDIT_TYPE=ENABLE you should take special care to ensure that
other copies of SAE are maintained (on DASD or tape).
ATTEMPT
When you use ATTEMPT, SAE records audit records just as if
AUDIT=ENABLE was coded.
However, if an error occurs which prevents recording of audit records, SAE
does not terminate and remains useable (but without audit recording).
Password Must
Be Defined
To enable the Audit Control feature (ENABLE or ATTEMPT), you must
define at least one password (see PASSWORDx= keyword on page 5-39).
SAE ships with this option disabled.
Keywords
AUDIT_TYPE=ENABLE
AUDIT_TYPE=ATTEMPT
AUDIT_TYPE=DISABLE
5-46
AUDIT_DSN= Keyword
Overview
You can define a prefix for the audit dataset that SAE allocates.
You can define up to 19 prefix characters. The prefix is concatenated to
'SAE.AUDIT.Dyymmdd.Thhmms' to form the audit dataset name.
SAE ships with the prefix 'SYS1' defined.
Keyword
AUDIT_DSN=
Example
AUDIT_DSN=SYS2.CNTL
5-47
GA
PRINT_TYPE= Keyword
Three Choices
for Print Output
Destination
SAE provides three different choices for the print output destination. Print
output may write to a:
real channel attached printer
print dataset on DASD
print dataset on magnetic tape
You can activate PRINT and select a destination after SAE is IPLed by using
SAE Option 0 (SAE Settings), sub-option 1 (PRT OPN).
For more information see Printer Control on page 13-111.
Printing to a
Real Channel or
DASD Print
Dataset
If you want to use a real channel attached printer or DASD print datasets, you
can pre-define these settings.
Four Settings For
Automatic Print
Destination
You can select one of four settings for the automatic print destination
keyword of PRINT_TYPE= keyword:
At SAE IPL time, SAE defines the print output destination automatically,
based on the value set for the PRINT_TYPE= keyword.
Setting
Description
OFF
OFF disables the automatic print destination processing at SAE IPL
time. PRINT_UNIT= and PRINT_VOL= are ignored and set to blanks.
REAL
REAL requests automatic print setup to a real channel attached printer.
You must define the printer’s unit address using the PRINT_UNIT=
keyword. At SAE IPL time, SAE directs all print output to the channel
attached printer at the specified unit address.
DASD
DASD requests automatic print setup to a print dataset that will be
created on a DASD device. For this setting you must code
PRINT_UNIT=, or PRINT_VOL= ,or both.
If you code PRINT_UNIT=, SAE allocates the print dataset on the
DASD device at the specified unit address.
If you code PRINT_VOL=, SAE searches all unit addresses, looking for
the specified DASD Volume. If found, SAE allocates the print dataset
on that volume. Depending of the number of devices defined to the
system, the search for the specified DASD volume may take several
minutes.
If you code both PRINT_UNIT= and PRINT_VOL=, SAE inspects the
DASD unit at the specified unit address, and allocates the print dataset
there, only if the unit’s volser matches the value coded for
PRINT_VOL=.
Continued on next page
5-48
PRINT_TYPE= Keyword, Continued
Four Settings For Automatic Print Destination (continued)
Setting
IPL
Description
IPL requests automatic print setup to a print dataset that will be created
on the DASD volume from which SAE is IPLed. If SAE is not IPLed
from DASD, this setting is ignored.
Keyword
PRINT_TYPE=
Example
PRINT_TYPE=OFF
PRINT_TYPE=REAL
PRINT_TYPE=DASD
PRINT_TYPE=IPL
5-49
GA
PRINT_UNIT= Keyword
Defines the Print
Output
Destination
PRINT_UNIT defines the print output destination that is to be automatically
set up at SAE IPL time.
This keyword value is used when PRINT_TYPE=REAL or
PRINT_TYPE=DASD is defined.
The keyword defines a four digit hexadecimal unit address. For more
information, see PRINT_TYPE= Keyword on page 5-50.
Keyword
PRINT_UNIT=
Example
PRINT_UNIT=0345
PRINT_UNIT=A84F
5-50
PRINT_VOL= Keyword
Defines the Print
Output
Destination
PRINT_VOL defines the print output destination that is to be automatically
set up at SAE IPL time.
This keyword value is used when PRINT_TYPE=DASD is defined.
The keyword defines a one to six digit DASD Volser. For more information,
see PRINT_TYPE= Keyword on page 5-50.
Keyword
PRINT_VOL=
Example
PRINT_VOL=SAERES
PRINT_VOL=WORK01
5-51
GA
PRINT_DSN= Keyword
Defining a DASD
Prefix
You can define a prefix for the DASD print dataset that is allocated by SAE.
The prefix can be up to 19 characters long.
The prefix is concatenated to 'SAE.PRINT.Dyymmdd.Thhmms' to form the
print dataset name. SAE ships with a prefix of 'SYS1' defined.
Keyword
PRINT_DSN=
Example
PRINT_DSN=SYS2.PRNT
5-52
INDEX_DSN= Keyword
If IMAGE Focus
is Installed
If NewEra Software’s IMAGE Focus product is installed then you should predefine the IMAGE Focus Blueprint Index dataset to SAE.
This allows you to use SAE’s Blueprint Comparison feature much more
easily. For more information, see ‘Inspect Services’ on page Error!
Bookmark not defined..
Defining the
IMAGE Focus
Index Dataset
Use INDEX_DSN= keyword to define the name of the IMAGE Focus
Blueprint Index dataset.
DLIB@OPT determines the volume on which the specified dataset resides
and automatically defines the Volser as well.
Keyword
INDEX_DSN=
Example
INDEX_DSN=IMAGEFOC.BLUEPRINT.INDEX
5-53
GA
TAPEVOLx= Keyword
Backup
Component
SAE Utilities include a backup component that creates dataset backups and
maintains a restore index (Backup Master File) on magnetic tape.
SAE uses the Backup Master File to locate the tape volumes required to
restore datasets and perform the restore. For more information, see Backup
Control System on page 8-66.
Defining the
Backup Master
File
Use the TAPEVOL1= keyword to define the Backup Master File tape Volser.
You can also create a second (backup) copy of the Backup Master, using the
TAPEVOL2= keyword to define the tape Volser for it.
Keyword
As shipped, the tape volumes are defined as:
SAEMT1 and SAEMT2
Example
TAPEVOL1=SAEMT1
5-54
Chapter 6: Preparing SAE for IPL
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the steps required to prepare an IPL-able copy of SAE.
You can IPL SAE from a:
In This Chapter
DASD volume
TAPE volume
CD-ROM or Network File
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
Preparing for DASD IPL
6-56
Preparing for TAPE IPL
6-58
Preparing for CD-ROM/Network IPL
6-59
6-55
Preparing for DASD IPL
Overview
The prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset contains member TODISK. This
member contains the JCL used to run the job that places an IPL-able copy of
SAE on a DASD volume.
IPLing SAE from
a DASD Unit
You can IPL SAE from a 3390 or 3380 DASD unit. The SAE product
occupies the IPL track on the DASD unit, as well as a SAE NUCLEUS
dataset. The IPL-able copy of SAE is built from the SAE DLIB dataset.
Prerequisites
Before creating an IPL-able copy of SAE, ensure that you have set any
required options and authorization in the SAE DLIB (see ‘SAE
Customization’ on page 5-33 and ‘SAE Licensing’ on page 4-31).
What TODISK
Does
The TODISK job uses the SAE Utility DLIB@DSK to convert parts of SAE
to a format acceptable to the IBM utility ICKDSF. This is so parts of SAE
may be written to the IPL track of the DASD volume by ICKDSF.
DLIB@DSK also moves part of SAE to the SAE NUCLEUS dataset that the
job creates. Note that the TODISK job deletes the previous SAE NUCLEUS
dataset if one exists. The DLIB@DSK utility sets the SAE NUCLEUS
dataset’s name in the portion of SAE that resides on the DASD volume IPL
Track.
Naming the SAE
Nucleus Dataset
When naming the SAE NUCLEUS dataset, remember that you must not
rename or move the dataset to another unit, because SAE must locate it
during the IPL. You do not have to catalog the SAE NUCLEUS dataset.
Ensure the SAE NUCLEUS dataset name you select is not eligible for
movement by any of your installed DASD management products. If SAE
cannot locate and read the NUCLEUS dataset during the SAE DASD IPL,
SAE enters a disabled wait state with the error code AA.
Warning
SAE IPL text occupies the same DASD area as z/OS IPL text. When creating
an IPL-able copy of SAE on DASD, ensure that the target unit does not
already contain required IPL text. Do not move SAE IPL text to your z/OS
SYSRES volume.
Continued on next page
6-56
Preparing for DASD IPL, Continued
Procedure
To create an IPL-able copy of SAE on DASD:
Step
For More
Information
Action
1.
Using ISPF Edit, open dataset prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL.
2.
Select member TODISK.
3.
Follow the instructions contained in the comments at the start of the Job
on what values to update in the JCL.
4.
Submit the job.
5.
If IPL text already exists on the volume, reply ‘U’ to the ICKDSF
operator message to permit the IPL text to be written.
6.
When the job ends, confirm that the return code is zero.
See ‘IPLing SAE’ on page 9-79 for information on IPLing SAE.
6-57
GA
Preparing for TAPE IPL
What TOTAPE
Does
The prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset contains member TOTAPE. This
member contains the JCL that runs the job that places an IPL-able copy of
SAE on a magnetic tape volume.
IPLing SAE from
a Tape Device
SAE may be IPLed from any tape device supported by z/OS. The IPL-able
copy of SAE is built from the SAE DLIB dataset.
Prerequisites
Before creating an IPL-able copy of SAE, ensure that you have set any
required options and authorization in the SAE DLIB (see ‘SAE
Customization’ on page 5-33 and ‘SAE Licensing’ on page 4-31).
Non-Labeled
Tapes
The TOTAPE job creates a Non-Labeled (NL) tape.
Procedure
To create an IPL-able copy of SAE on Tape:
At IPL time, the processor must find an IPL bootstrap record as the first
record on the tape. For this reason the tape must be non-labeled. If the tape is
labeled, the first record is a VOL1 record label and is not IPL-able.
Step
For More
Information
Action
1.
Using ISPF Edit, open dataset prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL.
2.
Select member TOTAPE.
3.
Follow the instructions contained in the comments at the start of the Job
on what values to update in the JCL.
4.
Submit the job.
5.
When the job ends, confirm that the return code is zero.
See ‘IPLing SAE’ on page 9-79 for information on IPLing SAE.
6-58
Preparing for CD-ROM/Network IPL
IPLing from a
Newer Processor
Most new processors support the ability to IPL from a CD-ROM or a
Network accessible file. Consult your processor’s documentation to
determine if your processor supports this type of IPL. SAE has utilities that
you can use to convert SAE to a format that can be IPLed from a CD-ROM or
a Network accessible file.
Member
TOCDROM
The prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset contains member TOCDROM. This
member contains the JCL that runs the job that creates two CD-ROM IPL
files. You must move these two files to a Windows PC so that they can be
placed on a CD-ROM or moved to a processor-accessible network location.
Prerequisites
Before creating an IPL-able copy of SAE, ensure that you have set any
required options and authorization in the SAE DLIB (see ‘SAE
Customization’ on page 5-33 and ‘SAE Licensing’ on page 4-31).
Converting SAE
to an Acceptable
Format
The TOCDROM job uses the SAE Utility DLIB@CD. DLIB@CD converts
SAE to a format acceptable for processor CD-ROM/Network file IPL. The
job creates two datasets, CDFILE1 and CDFILE2. Note that the TOCDROM
job deletes the previous SAE CDFILE1 and CDFILE2 datasets if they exist.
Procedure
To create a set of SAE CD-ROM IPL files:
Step
Action
1.
Using ISPF Edit, open dataset prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL.
2.
Select member TOCDROM.
3.
Follow the instructions contained in the comments at the start of the Job
on what values to update in the JCL.
4.
Submit the job.
5.
When the job ends, confirm that the return code is zero.
6.
File Transfer the two datasets (CDFILE1 and CDFILE2) to your
Windows PC. The files must be binary transfers (do not specify ASCII).
CDFILE1 must be transferred to a file you name: SAE_CD.IPL
CDFILE2 must be transferred to a file you name: SAE_CD.INS
7.
For More
Information
Burn the two files (SAE_CD.IPL and SAE_CD.INS) onto a CD-ROM or
move them to a network location that is accessible to the processor on
which SAE is to be IPLed.
See ‘IPLing SAE’ on page 9-79 for information on IPLing SAE.
6-59
GA
Chapter 7: Using Audit Control
Overview
Introduction
SAE’s Audit Control feature provides you with a detailed audit trail of all
SAE usage. You can only use the Audit Control feature for SAE’s DASD
IPLs.
Enabling Audit
Control
To enable Audit Control, use the DLIB@OPTutility. When SAE is IPLed
from DASD (and the Audit Control feature is enabled), SAE allocates an
audit control dataset on the IPL volume. The dataset name is created using the
prefix defined by the DLIB@OPT AUDIT_DSN keyword and the current
date and time.
In This Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
Using Audit
7-62
CATAUDIT Job
7-63
RPTAUDIT Job
7-64
7-61
Using Audit
How it Works
While SAE is in use, the Audit Control feature places a copy of each
displayed screen image in the audit control dataset. For screens on which the
user entered data, Audit Control also places an after-image of the screen in
the audit control dataset. The result is an exact trace of all SAE activity.
Automatically
Allocates New
Datasets
When the audit dataset fills, Audit Control obtains additional extents as
required. If an audit dataset becomes full, Audit Control allocates another
one.
When
Encountering
Problems
If any problems arise while writing to the Audit Control dataset (for example,
an I/O error, or the volume becomes full):
SAE terminates if you configure the Audit Control feature with DLIB@OPT
parameter AUDIT_TYPE=ENABLE.
SAE continues operation (with audit processing suspended), if you configure
DLIB@OPT parameter AUDIT_TYPE=ATTEMPT.
Security
Precautions
You cannot use SAE to browse, edit, or otherwise alter the contents of an Audit
Control dataset. Ensure you implement similar z/OS security measures to limit
access to the Audit Control datasets.
Screen I/O
Performance
Degradation
Activating the Audit Control feature may result in a slight performance
degradation to screen I/O. Audit Control does not affect the performance of
internal functions.
7-62
CATAUDIT Job
Audit Control
Datasets are Not
Cataloged
The Audit Control datasets (which are allocated by SAE on the IPL volume)
are not cataloged.
SAE creates the prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset during the installation.
This dataset contains JCL for job CATAUDIT (Catalog Audit) that you can
use to search for and catalog SAE-created audit control datasets.
The CATAUDIT job is provided with a DD for the SAE IPL volume. The
utility locates and catalogs any SAE-created audit control datasets that were
not cataloged.
Multiple SAE
IPL Volumes
If more than one SAE IPL volume exists, you must create multiple steps (one
step for each volume). The best way to run this job is to have it run
automatically after each z/OS IPL. Then, if SAE was used prior to that z/OS
IPL, all audit control datasets are immediately cataloged.
7-63
GA
RPTAUDIT Job
How the Report
Audit Utility
Works
The RPTAUDIT utility formats an SAE audit control dataset’s contents and
produces a report that contains each screen image exactly as the image was
displayed to the SAE user. If the user enters data on that screen, another
screen image appears, showing the data input.
Before and After
Images
This provides a ‘before’ and ‘after’ screen image report that details all
activity. The prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset, created during installation,
contains JCL for job RPTAUDIT.
7-64
Chapter 8: Using Backup Control System
Overview
Introduction
SAE includes a z/OS-based backup utility. This chapter describes that utility.
In This Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See Page
Backup Control System
8-66
MSTRINIT
8-68
TAPEINIT
8-69
TAPETEST
8-70
Backup Dataset List
8-72
Backup Master Control
8-73
Backup Reporting
8-74
8-65
GA
Backup Control System
Introduction
SAE’s z/OS Backup Control System may be used to backup datasets that can
be later restored using SAE. The SAE Dataset Restore function will restore
datasets from tapes containing IEBCOPY and IEBGENER unloaded datasets
(for more information, see ‘Restore Services’ on page 21-257).
The Backup Control System provides for easy backup, optimal tape usage,
and maintenance of control information. This control information includes the
tape Volser and file sequence number for each backup generation of given
datasets. Usage of the Backup Control Utility is not required.
IEBCOPY,
IEBGENER, and
SORT
Use of the Backup Control System requires IEBCOPY, IEBGENER and
SORT.
JCL and load modules required for the Backup Control System ship with the
SAE base product and can be found in the prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL and
prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.LOAD datasets created during the installation.
Running the
Backup Control
System
To run the Backup Control System, the load modules SAEBKUP and
SAEBKMST must be APF authorized. You may add the
prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.LOAD dataset to the z/OS PROGxx or IEAAPFxx
system parameter members, or copy the load modules to an existing APF
authorized library, in order to have this module APF authorized.
Three JCL
Members
The prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset contains three JCL members for
setting up the Backup Control System:
MSTRINIT
TAPEINIT
TAPETEST
These members are discussed in the following topics.
Continued on next page
8-66
Backup Control System, Continued
Backup Process
The following diagram displays the backup process.
Backup Source Files
IEBCOPY
IEBGENER
SAE Backup Control System
SAE
Backups
SAE
Backup Control System
Master Files
Description, VOLSER
Sequence #
Backup TAPE datasets are on a single tape volume with a standard label reels, type 3420 or
cartridges type 3480, 3490.
Backup Master
Selection Screen
Volser and File
Sequence
Number must be
known to begin
RESTORE
Backup Tape
Mount Screen
Use of SAE
Backup is
Optional USE?
YES
NO
Note: You access the
Backup Control System
through the RESTORE
Application by selecting
Option 5 from the SAE
primary menu.
Sequential Datasets
Copy (IEBGENER) to the Target
Dataset on Disk.
File Formats
Fixed and Variable
Dataset Restore
Screen
The RESTORE
Process is
designed to
appear as if there
the copy is
occurring
between DISK
Partitioned Datasets
IEBCOPY Unload to the Target
Dataset on Disk.
File Formats
Fixed, Variable & Undefined
All Target
Datasets reside
on Disk
8-67
GA
MSTRINIT
Master Init
The MSTRINIT member of the prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset contains
a single step job that allocates and initializes the Backup Master File.
The Backup Master file maintains information on each dataset backup. This
includes the time and date of the backup and the tape volume and file
sequence number of where the backup resides.
Alter the JCL for
the Backup
Master
The JCL should be altered to specify a suitable name for the Backup Master
file. The DASD unit type and, if required, a specific Volser should also be
coded.
When a dataset must be restored, the fastest way to determine the Volser of
the required backup tape is to browse the Backup Master file. In creating the
Backup Master file, you should give special consideration to its location and
name. You should ensure the Backup Master file is not eligible for archiving
by your DASD management package.
8-68
TAPEINIT
Volser must be
Static
The Dataset Restore function can use a tape copy of the Backup Master file.
As the tape copy must be located in a stand-alone environment, the Volser
must be static.
Default Tape
Volser Names
By default, SAE expects the two tape Volsers to be SAEMT1 and SAEMT2.
If you use different Volsers, you must change the default by using the
DLIB@OPT utility
Protecting
Volsers
Depending on the Volsers you chose, your tape management system might
prevent you from writing over the previous copy on each tape. Keep this in
mind when choosing the Volsers like SAEMT1 and SAEMT2, which will
probably be considered “foreign” by your tape management system and hence
not be protected. If using Volsers SAEMT1 and SAEMT2, you will have to
label (IEHINITT) the tapes.
TAPEINIT
Functionality
Job TAPEINIT is used to create and catalogue the two tape datasets that will
be maintained as copies of the Backup Master file. Change the dataset name,
unit type and Volser as required.
8-69
GA
TAPETEST
Purpose of the
Test
The TAPETEST job tests if your tape management system can prevent the
writing of a new copy of the Backup Master file. Change the JCL as required
in order to allow the tapes to be re-written and test the job. If any JCL
changes were required, make the same changes to steps COPY1 and COPY2
in member SAEBKUP
Example
Member SAEBKUP in the prefix.SAE.R16.UTIL.CNTL dataset is used to
run the Backup Control System.
The PROC SAEBKUP is used, and contains four steps.
The first step, SAEBKUP, performs the actual backup operation.
The second step, SAEBKMST, updates the Backup Master file.
Steps three and four (COPY1 and COPY2) create the two tape copies of the
Backup Master file.
//SAEBKUP EXEC SAEBKUP,
//
STEPLIB='SYS1.LINKLIB',
//
TAPETYP=3480,
//
TAPENAM='SAEBKUP',
//
MASTER='SAE.BACKUP.MASTER',
//
WRKUNIT=SYSDA,
//
SYSOUT1='*',SYSOUT2='*',
//
TP1DSN=SAE.BACKUP.MASTER.TAPE1,
//
TP2DSN=SAE.BACKUP.MASTER.TAPE2
Step Name
Description
STEPLIB
STEPLIB is the dataset name of the APF authorized library that
contains the two Backup Control System load modules.
TAPETYP
The Backup Control System should use backup tapes from your
normal scratch pool. TAPETYP specifies the unit type of the
tapes to be used.
TAPENAM
TAPENAM specifies the starting qualifiers of the dataset name
that are given to each backup dataset. You can specify up to 23
characters. SAE adds the date, time and file number appendage
to the specified dataset name. The first file on each backup tape
is cataloged. This file does not contain backup data; instead it is
used to control the tape volume. When a tape volume is no
longer required, this dataset is UN-cataloged and the tape can be
returned to the scratch pool. Tapes are created with an
expiration date of 99000.
MASTER
MASTER is the dataset name of the Backup Master file
Continued on next page
8-70
TAPETEST, Continued
Example (continued)
Step Name
Record the
Following
Information
Description
WRKUNIT
WRKUNIT is the DASD unit name SAE uses for allocating
temporary datasets.
SYSOUT1 and
SYSOUT2
SYSOUT1 and SYSOUT2 specify the SYSOUT= value for
print datasets. SAE uses SYSOUT1 for Backup Control System
reports. SAE uses SYSOUT2 for output from utility programs
that are invoked.
TP1DSN and
TP2DSN
TP1DSN and TP2DSN are the dataset names of the two tape
copies of the Backup Master file.
Once the Backup Control System has been set up, record the following
information for future reference:
BACKUP MASTER FILE NAME
TAPE COPY 1 VOLSER
TAPE COPY 2 VOLSER
8-71
GA
Backup Dataset List
List of Datasets
to be Backed Up
A list of dataset names that are to be backed up is provided to the Backup
Control System. Only partitioned and sequential datasets are supported. You
may specify a full dataset name with or without a Volser. The Volser is
required only if the dataset is not cataloged on the system that the Backup
Control System will run.
Rules
If a Volser is specified, the dataset name must be followed by at least one
blank and then the Volser. Multiple dataset names (or names and Volsers)
may be specified on the same line, but each must be separated immediately by
a comma. The list ends when a dataset name is not followed by a comma. In
general, the syntax rules are the same as the z/OS rules for SYS1.PARMLIB
members.
PARMLIB
Statements
In addition to dataset names, the list may also include one or more
PARMLIB= statements. PARMLIB=xxxxxxxx may be specified anywhere in
the list of dataset names and it specifies the name of a member of
SYS1.PARMLIB that is to be used as a list of dataset names to be backed up.
This parameter allows members like LNKLSTxx, LPALSTxx and IEFAPFxx
to be used as dataset name lists. By using the PARMLIB= parameter, you
don't have to maintain an additional list of important datasets. As additional
datasets are added to these z/OS parmlib members, they are automatically
backed up. Any specified member must exist in the cataloged
SYS1.PARMLIB dataset.
Backed Up Only
Once
Each unique dataset is only backed up once, even if specified multiple times.
The list is specified on the SAEBKUP step SYSIN DD.
Example
//SAEBKUP.SYSIN DD *
SYS1.PARMLIB,SYS1.PARMLIB OLDCAT,
SYS1.PROCLIB,
SYS1.LINKLIB,PARMLIB=LNKLST00,
SYS1.LPALIB,PARMLIB=LPALST00,
SYS1.NUCLEUS,
SYS1.SVCLIB,
SYS1.CMDLIB,
SYS1.VTAMLIB,
SYS1.VTAMLST
8-72
Backup Master Control
Two Control
Parameters
Two control parameters are provided to the Backup Master Update step:
GENERATIONS
GENERATIONS= specifies the number of generations of backups to
maintain for each unique dataset. When the number of backups for a dataset
exceeds the number of generations specified, the new backup is added and the
oldest backup dropped. Once all backups on a given tape have been dropped,
the tape is no longer needed and the tape dataset is UN-cataloged so the tape
may be reused.
MAXVOLS
MAXVOLS= controls the search for tapes that are no longer needed. It
specifies the maximum number of volumes being used. If set too low, a
message is issued and no tapes are released. In this case increase the
MAXVOLS number. The control statements are provided via the
SAEBKMST SYSIN DD.
Example
//SAEBKMST.SYSIN DD *
MAXVOLS=100
GENERATIONS=7
GENERATIONS=
MAXVOLS=
8-73
GA
Backup Reporting
The Dataset
Backup Utility
Report
The SAEBKUP utility produces the Dataset Backup Utility Report. It
indicates the status of each backup request and shows the volume on which
the dataset resides, the dataset organization, the utility that was invoked, the
start and end times of the utility run, the success of the utility call and the
tape/file sequence number location of the backup.
8-74
Example
MVS SP2.2.0
PAGE - 1
SAE - DATASET BACKUP UTILITY
DATE - 92045
TIME - 07:27
BACKUP OF SYS1.PARMLIB
DATASET ALLOCATED ON VOLUME MCATB1, DDNAME(SYS00001), DS1DSORG=X'0200',
ORGANIZATION PARTITIONED
UTILITY INVOKED AT 07:27 PGM=IEBCOPY
ENDED AT 07:27 RC=0
BACKUP SUCCESSFUL, TAPE VOLUME=M00750, FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER=2
DSN=BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92045.T0727.FILE2
BACKUP OF SYS1.PROCLIB
DATASET ALLOCATED ON VOLUME SYS004, DDNAME(SYS00002), DS1DSORG=X'0200',
ORGANIZATION PARTITIONED
UTILITY INVOKED AT 07:27 PGM=IEBCOPY
ENDED AT 07:28 RC=0
BACKUP SUCCESSFUL, TAPE VOLUME=M00750, FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER=3
DSN=BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92045.T0727.FILE3
BACKUP OF SYS1.LINKLIB
DATASET ALLOCATED ON VOLUME XARESB, DDNAME(SYS00003), DS1DSORG=X'0200',
ORGANIZATION PARTITIONED
UTILITY INVOKED AT 07:28 PGM=IEBCOPY
ENDED AT 07:32 RC=0
BACKUP SUCCESSFUL, TAPE VOLUME=M00750, FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER=4
DSN=BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92045.T0727.FILE4
DATASET LIST FROM SYS1.PARMLIB(LNKLST00)
BACKUP OF GIM.SGIMLMD0
DATASET ALLOCATED ON VOLUME XARESB, DDNAME(SYS00004), DS1DSORG=X'0200',
ORGANIZATION PARTITIONED
UTILITY INVOKED AT 07:32 PGM=IEBCOPY
ENDED AT 07:33 RC=0
BACKUP SUCCESSFUL, TAPE VOLUME=M00750, FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER=5
DSN=BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92045.T0727.FILE5
BACKUP OF ISP.V2R3M0.ISPLOAD
DATASET ALLOCATED ON VOLUME XARESB, DDNAME(SYS00005), DS1DSORG=X'0200',
ORGANIZATION PARTITIONED
UTILITY INVOKED AT 07:33 PGM=IEBCOPY
ENDED AT 07:34 RC=0
BACKUP SUCCESSFUL, TAPE VOLUME=M00750, FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER=6
DSN=BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92045.T0727.FILE6
BACKUP OF ISR.V2R3M0.ISRLOAD
DATASET ALLOCATED ON VOLUME XARESB, DDNAME(SYS00006), DS1DSORG=X'0200',
ORGANIZATION PARTITIONED
UTILITY INVOKED AT 07:34 PGM=IEBCOPY
ENDED AT 07:34 RC=0
BACKUP SUCCESSFUL, TAPE VOLUME=M00750, FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER=7
DSN=BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92045.T0727.FILE7
BACKUP OF PLI.PLICOMP
DATASET ALLOCATED ON VOLUME SYS004, DDNAME(SYS00007), DS1DSORG=X'0200',
ORGANIZATION PARTITIONED
UTILITY INVOKED AT 07:34 PGM=IEBCOPY
ENDED AT 07:35 RC=0
BACKUP SUCCESSFUL, TAPE VOLUME=M00750, FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER=8
DSN=BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92045.T0727.FILE8
Continued on next page
8-75
GA
Backup Reporting, Continued
Backup Master
Update Report
Example
The SAEBKMST utility produces the Backup Master Update Report. It
shows which backups are being maintained, the date/time, Volser and file
sequence number for each, and which tape volumes are no longer required
and, therefore, may be returned to scratch.
SAE - BACKUP MASTER UPDATE UTILITY
DATE - 92045 TIME - 08:10
PAGE - 1
SYSIN DATASET PARAMETERS
MAXVOLS=100
GENERATIONS=5
SAE - BACKUP MASTER UPDATE UTILITY
DATE - 92045 TIME - 08:10
PAGE - 2
DATASET NAME
VOLSER BACKUP DATE TAPE FILE
ACTION
--------------------- ------ ----- ----- ------ --------COBOL.PROD.COBLIB
MCATB1 92045 07:42 M00750 16
ADDED
92044 15:53 M01642 16
92044 15:09 M03349 16
COBOL.PROD.LINKLIB
MCATB1 92045 07:43 M00750 17
ADDED
92044 15:54 M01642 17
92044 15:10 M03349 17
GIM.SGIMLMD0
XARESB 92045 07:33 M00750 5
ADDED
92044 15:44 M01642 5
92044 14:59 M03349 5
ISP.V2R3M0.ISPLOAD
XARESB 92045 07:34 M00750 6
ADDED
92044 15:45 M01642 6
92044 15:00 M03349 6
ISR.V2R3M0.ISRLOAD
XARESB 92045 07:34 M00750 7
ADDED
92044 15:46 M01642 7
92044 15:00 M03349 7
PLI.PLICOMP
SYS004 92045 07:35 M00750 8
ADDED
92044 15:46 M01642 8
92044 15:01 M03349 8
PLI.PLILINK
SYS004 92045 07:36 M00750 9
ADDED
92044 15:47 M01642 9
92044 15:02 M03349 9
SYS1.CMDLIB
XARESB 92045 07:37 M00750 10
ADDED
92044 15:48 M01642 10
92044 15:03 M03349 10
SYS1.DGTLLIB
XARESB 92045 07:38 M00750 11
ADDED
92044 15:49 M01642 11
92044 15:04 M03349 11
SYS1.DTSLINK
MCATB1 92045 07:39 M00750 12
ADDED
92044 15:50 M01642 12
92044 15:05 M03349 12
SYS1.INFO.LINKLIB
MCATB1 92045 07:40 M00750 14
ADDED
92044 15:52 M01642 14
92044 15:07 M03349 14
SYS1.ISPLLIB
XARESB 92045 07:41 M00750 15
ADDED
92044 15:52 M01642 15
92044 15:08 M03349 15
SYS1.LINKLIB
XARESA 92045 07:58 M00750 26
ADDED
92044 16:09 M01642 26
92044 15:26 M03349 26
SYS1.LINKLIB
XARESB 92045 07:32 M00750 4
ADDED
92044 15:44 M01642 4
92044 14:58 M03349 4
92023 12:50 M01260 4
SAE - BACKUP MASTER UPDATE UTILITY
DATE - 92045 TIME - 08:10
PAGE - 3
DATASET NAME
VOLSER BACKUP DATE TAPE FILE
ACTION
------------------------------------ ------ ----- ----- ------ --------SAE - BACKUP MASTER UPDATE UTILITY
DATE - 92045 TIME - 08:10
PAGE - 4
FOLLOWING VOLUMES NO LONGER NEEDED, RETURN TO SCRATCH
M01259
DATASET - BACKUPS.SAEBKUP.D92023.T1236.FILE1
UNCATALOGED
8-76
Part III:
How to IPL SAE
Overview
Introduction
This part of the guide describes how to IPL SAE.
In This Part
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
GA
See Page
IPLing SAE
9-79
Logging On to SAE
10-97
Automatic Printer Output Assignment
11-103
SAE Primary Screen
12-105
SAE
13-109
8-77
Chapter 9: IPLing SAE
Overview
Introduction
You can IPL SAE from one of the following sources:
In This Chapter
a DASD volume
a magnetic tape volume
a CD-ROM/Network file
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
Performing DASD IPL
9-81
Performing TAPE IPL
9-84
Performing a CD-ROM/Network File IPL
9-86
IPLing Under VM
9-89
Preparing for Use Under VM
9-90
TAPE IPL Under VM
9-91
DASD IPL Under VM
9-93
Console
9-95
Establishing a Console via LOADPARM
9-96
9-79
Performing DASD IPL
Procedure
Use the following procedure to IPL from a DASD.
Step
Action
1.
Identify the IPL DASD device.
2.
Initiate Program Load (with a RESET SYSTEM CLEAR option) using
the processor service console.
Result: After completing Program Load, SAE enters an I/O-enabled
wait state.
3.
Press the RESET key and then press the Enter key on the locally
attached non-SNA terminal you wish to use.
Results: SAE immediately displays the SAE Logon screen. If the screen
does not display, press RESET/ENTER again. If the screen
again fails to display, follow the instructions under the heading
‘Defining a Console via LOADPARM’ on page 9-96.
Continued on next page
GA
9-81
Performing DASD IPL, Continued
Procedure (continued)
Step
4.
Action
SAE writes messages to the Hardware Service Console during the IPL.
You can view the messages to help diagnose problems or determine the
SAE IPL status. Message and descriptions are as follows:
SAE IPL IN PROGRESS, RELEASE xx.x pppp ssss
SAE IPL is in progress. The release (xx.x), maintenance patch level
(pppp), and the IPL device’s sub-channel number (ssss) all display.
IPL COMPLETE, DEV: xxxx LOADPARM: xxxxxxxx
SAE IPL has completed. The IPL device number (xxxx) and the
specified LOADPARM value display.
WAITING FOR CONSOLE
SAE is waiting for the console device identification.
CONSOLE INTERRUPT DEV: xxxx SUBC: ssss
SAE detects an attention interrupt from the device (xxxx) at sub-channel
number (ssss).
CONSOLE INV xxxx
SAE detects the SAExxxx console setting LOADPARM at an invalid
specified device address (xxxx). SAE waits for another console to
identify itself.
CONSOLE RESTRICT
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device but the device is not one
of the restricted console addresses defined by the DLIB@OPT utility
CONSOLEx= keyword.
CONSOLE ERR xxxx
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device (xxxx) but has
determined the device is not a console. SAE resumes waiting for another
console to identify itself.
CONSOLE AT xxxx
SAE has established a console at the shown device (xxxx). SAE is now
accessible through that console.
5.
If SAE is not authorized for the processor, the SAE Logon screen
displays an OVERRIDE CODE prompt. Enter the override code and
press Enter. If you do not know the override code, contact NewEra
Support to obtain it.
6.
If you have defined a startup password, the SAE Logon screen displays a
PASSWORD prompt. Enter the correct password and press Enter.
9-82
Unrecoverable
Errors
After loading SAE, a disabled wait state PSW displays if there are any
unrecoverable errors. See 'Troubleshooting’ page 28-329 for more
information.
9-83
GA
Performing TAPE IPL
Procedure
Use the following procedure to IPL from a TAPE.
Step
Action
1.
Mount the SAE tape and ready the tape drive.
2.
Identify the IPL device and initiate Program Load (with a RESET
SYSTEM CLEAR option) using the processor service console.
Results: After Program Load is complete; SAE enters an I/O-enabled
wait state.
3.
Press the RESET key and then the Enter key on the locally attached nonSNA terminal you wish to use.
Results: SAE immediately displays the SAE Logon screen. If the screen
does not display, press RESET/ENTER again. If the screen
still fails to display, follow the instructions under the heading
‘Defining a Console via LOADPARM’ in this chapter.
Continued on next page
9-84
Performing TAPE IPL, Continued
Procedure (continued)
4.
SAE writes messages to the Hardware Service Console during the IPL.
You can view the messages to help diagnose problems or determine the
SAE IPL status. Message and descriptions are as follows:
SAE IPL IN PROGRESS, RELEASE xx.x pppp ssss
SAE IPL is in progress. The release (xx.x), maintenance patch level
(pppp), and the IPL device’s sub-channel number (ssss) all display.
IPL COMPLETE, DEV: xxxx LOADPARM: xxxxxxxx
SAE IPL has completed. The IPL device number (xxxx) and the
specified LOADPARM value display.
WAITING FOR CONSOLE
SAE is waiting for the console device identification.
CONSOLE INTERRUPT DEV: xxxx SUBC: ssss
SAE detects an attention interrupt from the device (xxxx) at sub-channel
number (ssss).
CONSOLE INV xxxx
SAE detects the SAExxxx console setting LOADPARM at an invalid
specified device address (xxxx). SAE waits for another console to
identify itself.
CONSOLE RESTRICT
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device but the device is not one
of the restricted console addresses defined by the DLIB@OPT utility
CONSOLEx= keyword.
CONSOLE ERR xxxx
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device (xxxx) but has
determined the device is not a console. SAE resumes waiting for another
console to identify itself.
CONSOLE AT xxxx
SAE has established a console at the shown device (xxxx). SAE is now
accessible through that console.
Unrecoverable
Errors
5.
If SAE is not authorized for the processor, the SAE Logon screen
displays an OVERRIDE CODE prompt. Enter the override code and
press Enter. Contact NewEra Support if you do not know the override
code.
6.
If you have defined a startup password, the SAE Logon screen displays a
PASSWORD prompt. Enter the correct password and press Enter.
After loading SAE, a disabled wait state PSW indicates if there are any
unrecoverable errors. See 'Troubleshooting’ page 28-329 for more
information.
9-85
GA
Performing a CD-ROM/Network File IPL
Consult
Manufacturer’s
Documentation
The actual method of initiating the IPL from CD-ROM or Network File
differs depending on your processor model. Consult the manufacture’s
documentation on how to perform the Load from CD-ROM/Network File for
your specific processor model.
Procedure
To perform the IPL on a IBM MP3000 processor:
Step
1.
Action
Double click the ‘Load from CD-ROM or Server’ icon.
In this example the LPAR being IPLed is already selected and is named
‘PLAY’.
2.
After completing Program Load, SAE enters an I/O-enabled wait state.
3.
Press the RESET key and then the Enter key on the locally attached nonSNA terminal you wish to use.
Results: SAE immediately displays the SAE Logon screen. If the screen
does not display, press RESET/ENTER again. If the screen
still fails to display, follow the instructions under the heading
‘Defining a Console via LOADPARM’ in this chapter.
Continued on next page
9-86
Performing a CD-ROM/Network File IPL, Continued
Procedure (continued)
Step
4.
Action
SAE writes messages to the Hardware Service Console during the IPL.
You can view the messages to help diagnose problems or determine the
SAE IPL status. Message and descriptions are as follows:
SAE IPL IN PROGRESS, RELEASE xx.x pppp ssss
SAE IPL is in progress. The release (xx.x), maintenance patch level
(pppp), and the IPL device’s sub-channel number (ssss) all display.
IPL COMPLETE, DEV: xxxx LOADPARM: xxxxxxxx
SAE IPL has completed. The IPL device number (xxxx) and the
specified LOADPARM value display.
WAITING FOR CONSOLE
SAE is waiting for the console device identification.
CONSOLE INTERRUPT DEV: xxxx SUBC: ssss
SAE detects an attention interrupt from the device (xxxx) at sub-channel
number (ssss).
CONSOLE INV xxxx
SAE detects the SAExxxx console setting LOADPARM at an invalid
specified device address (xxxx). SAE waits for another console to
identify itself.
CONSOLE RESTRICT
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device but the device is not one
of the restricted console addresses defined by the DLIB@OPT utility
CONSOLEx= keyword.
CONSOLE ERR xxxx
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device (xxxx) but has
determined the device is not a console. SAE resumes waiting for another
console to identify itself.
CONSOLE AT xxxx
SAE has established a console at the shown device (xxxx). SAE is now
accessible through that console.
5.
If SAE is not authorized for the processor, the SAE Logon screen
displays an OVERRIDE CODE prompt. Enter the override code and
press Enter. Contact NewEra Support if you do not know the override
code.
6.
If you have defined a startup password, the SAE Logon screen displays a
PASSWORD prompt. Enter the correct password and press Enter.
Continued on next page
9-87
GA
Performing a CD-ROM/Network File IPL, Continued
Unrecoverable
Errors
After loading SAE, a disabled wait state PSW indicates if there are any
unrecoverable errors. See 'Troubleshooting’ page 28-329 for more
information.
9-88
IPLing Under VM
Supported MiniDisks
SAE is designed to examine and alter z/OS volumes and files. SAE cannot
access CMS mini-disks, but volumes formatted for virtual machine (VM)
may be erased. SAE supports z/OS mini-disks.
9-89
GA
Preparing for Use Under VM
Logging Onto the
Virtual Machine
The virtual machine (VM) to which you logon must have OPTION ECMODE
in its directory entry, or you must issue the #CP SET ECMODE ON
command. The command #CP Q SET displays the current ECMODE setting.
CPU Information
SAE only requires one CPU. To use the Fast DASD Erase feature, you must
detach all but one CPU from the virtual machine. This ensures that SAE uses
I/O ASSIST. The command #CP Q CPUS displays the CPUs and you can
use #CP DETACH CPU x to detach any unneeded CPUs.
3270-Type
Consoles
SAE expects to use a 3270-type device as a console. To check if your VM has
a 3215 or 3270 console, issue the command #CP Q V CON.
Check if your
VM is Defined as
3270
If your VM console is not defined as a 3270, you must:
Have a 3270 terminal dedicated to your virtual machine, or
Attach a 3270 terminal.
Check your directory entry to see if DEDICATE is present for a 3270
terminal. If not, attach a 3270 terminal.
Example
For example, if VM has a real 3270 at address 420, you could issue the
following commands from the VM operator's console (or from your virtual
machine if you are class A):
#CP DISABLE cccc
CP ATTACH cccc logonid cccc
Virtual Address
Not Important
The dedicated or attached terminal’s virtual address is not important (unless
you have defined specific console addresses during installation). SAE uses
the first 3270 that presents an attention interrupt.
9-90
TAPE IPL Under VM
Procedure
To IPL from TAPE using VM, perform the following procedure:
Step
1.
Action
If a tape drive is not dedicated to your VM, the VM operator must attach
a tape drive to your VM using the following command:
#CP ATTACH yyyy logonid xxxx
2.
After attaching the tape, mount the SAE tape on the tape drive.
3.
Clear the VM
4.
Initiate Program Load from the IPL device using the following
commands:
#CP SYS CLEAR
# CP IPL xxxx
5.
Press Enter on any terminal that your VM defines as a 3270 terminal.
Results: The SAE screen appears on the terminal. If you are using a
dedicated or attached 3270, you can optionally disconnect your
VM.
6.
When you complete your SAE session, logoff your VM to detach any
attached devices.
If you issued a #CP DISABLE command for a 3270 terminal, be sure to
re-enable it.
Continued on next page
9-91
GA
TAPE IPL Under VM, Continued
Procedure (continued)
Step
7.
Action
SAE writes messages to the Hardware Service Console during the IPL.
Under VM these messages will be trapped and displayed on the VM
Guest Console. You can view the messages to help diagnose problems or
determine the SAE IPL status. Message and descriptions are as follows:
SAE IPL IN PROGRESS, RELEASE xx.x pppp ssss
SAE IPL is in progress. The release (xx.x), maintenance patch level
(pppp), and the IPL device’s sub-channel number (ssss) all display.
IPL COMPLETE, DEV: xxxx LOADPARM: xxxxxxxx
SAE IPL has completed. The IPL device number (xxxx) and the
specified LOADPARM value display.
WAITING FOR CONSOLE
SAE is waiting for the console device identification.
CONSOLE INTERRUPT DEV: xxxx SUBC: ssss
SAE detects an attention interrupt from the device (xxxx) at sub-channel
number (ssss).
CONSOLE INV xxxx
SAE detects the SAExxxx console setting LOADPARM at an invalid
specified device address (xxxx). SAE waits for another console to
identify itself.
CONSOLE RESTRICT
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device but the device is not one
of the restricted console addresses defined by the DLIB@OPT utility
CONSOLEx= keyword.
CONSOLE ERR xxxx
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device (xxxx) but has
determined the device is not a console. SAE resumes waiting for another
console to identify itself.
CONSOLE AT xxxx
SAE has established a console at the shown device (xxxx). SAE is now
accessible through that console.
8.
If SAE is not authorized for the processor, the SAE Logon screen
displays an OVERRIDE CODE prompt. Enter the override code and
press Enter. If you do not know the override code, contact NewEra
Support to obtain it.
9.
If you have defined a startup password, the SAE Logon screen displays a
PASSWORD prompt. Enter the correct password and press Enter.
9-92
DASD IPL Under VM
Procedure
To IPL from DASD using VM, perform the following procedure:
Step
Action
1.
Clear the VM.
2.
Initiate Program Load from the IPL device using the following
commands:
#CP SYS CLEAR
# CP IPL xxxx
3.
Press Enter on any terminal that your VM defines as a 3270 terminal.
Results: The SAE screen appears on the terminal. If you are using a
dedicated or attached 3270, you can optionally disconnect your
VM.
4.
When you complete your SAE session, logoff your VM to detach any
attached devices.
If you issued a #CP DISABLE command for a 3270 terminal, be sure to
re-enable it.
Continued on next page
9-93
GA
DASD IPL Under VM, Continued
Procedure (continued)
Step
5.
Action
SAE writes messages to the Hardware Service Console during the IPL.
Under VM these messages will be trapped and displayed on the VM
Guest Console. You can view the messages to help diagnose problems or
determine the SAE IPL status. Message and descriptions are as follows:
SAE IPL IN PROGRESS, RELEASE xx.x pppp ssss
SAE IPL is in progress. The release (xx.x), maintenance patch level
(pppp), and the IPL device’s sub-channel number (ssss) all display.
IPL COMPLETE, DEV: xxxx LOADPARM: xxxxxxxx
SAE IPL has completed. The IPL device number (xxxx) and the
specified LOADPARM value display.
WAITING FOR CONSOLE
SAE is waiting for the console device identification.
CONSOLE INTERRUPT DEV: xxxx SUBC: ssss
SAE detects an attention interrupt from the device (xxxx) at sub-channel
number (ssss).
CONSOLE INV xxxx
SAE detects the SAExxxx console setting LOADPARM at an invalid
specified device address (xxxx). SAE waits for another console to
identify itself.
CONSOLE RESTRICT
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device but the device is not one
of the restricted console addresses defined by the DLIB@OPT utility
CONSOLEx= keyword.
CONSOLE ERR xxxx
SAE detects an attention interrupt from a device (xxxx) but has
determined the device is not a console. SAE resumes waiting for another
console to identify itself.
CONSOLE AT xxxx
SAE has established a console at the shown device (xxxx). SAE is now
accessible through that console.
6.
If SAE is not authorized for the processor, the SAE Logon screen
displays an OVERRIDE CODE prompt. Enter the override code and
press Enter. If you do not know the override code, contact NewEra
Support to obtain it.
7.
If you have defined a startup password, the SAE Logon screen displays a
PASSWORD prompt. Enter the correct password and press Enter.
9-94
Console
Console Devices
Are Required
To communicate with the user, SAE requires a console device. The
identification and use of the console does not differ based on the type of IPL
you are performing (DASD, Tape, or CD-ROM/Network). You can only
establish a console on a local non-SNA display device.
First Attention
Becomes Console
Normally, the first display device that presents an attention interrupt (pressing
Enter) after completing the IPL is the device SAE uses as a console.
Selecting a
Console
After initiating an SAE IPL, press Enter on the console you want to use.
Step
Action
1.
Initiate an SAE IPL.
2.
Press Enter on the console you want to use.
Note:
If SAE does not respond immediately, that indicates that the
IPL process is not yet complete.
3.
If SAE does not respond, press Reset on the console device and then
press Enter again
Restrictive
Consoles
If you have defined Restrictive Consoles (see ‘SAE Customization’ on page
5-33) then SAE only responds to the selected console devices.
Specifying a
Console
You can use a special LOADPARM value to compel the use of a specific
console.
9-95
GA
Establishing a Console via LOADPARM
When to use
LOADPARM
If you cannot establish a console, or the console is being established at an
undesirable address, you can specify the use of a console at a specific address
using a special LOADPARM.
This forces the SAE console to a given address (by bypassing console address
definitions) and does not require an attention interrupt (pressing Enter).
Specified on the
Processor Service
Console
The LOADPARM parameter is specified on the processor service console
(usually next to the IPL device address). SAE obtains the LOADPARM from
the service processor at IPL.
To define an SAE console using the LOADPARM, the processor must allow
an eight-character parameter. VM users can use the LOADPARM parameter
of the IPL statement to specify the LOADPARM.
Defining a
Console
To define a console, specify a LOADPARM of ‘SAExxxx,’ where xxxx is the
four-digit device number of the console you want to use, and then IPL SAE
per normal procedures.
For example, to have SAE use the console at address 500, specify
‘SAE0500”. SAE extracts the LOADPARM and attempts to establish a
console at the given address. SAE initiates I/O to the specified console
immediately and does not require that the user press Enter. If SAE cannot
establish the console at the specified address, or if the address is invalid, SAE
waits for another console to identify itself as per normal SAE operation.
9-96
Chapter 10: Logging On to SAE
Overview
Introduction
This chapter provides information about logging-on to SAE
In This Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See Page
SAE Logon
10-98
Override
10-99
Password
10-100
SAE Logon Screen Information
10-101
10-97
GA
SAE Logon
Establishing a
Console
Immediately after IPLing SAE, SAE attempts to establish a console so it can
communicate with the user.
Establishing a console and the various methods of controlling which console
is used are outlined in ‘IPLing SAE’ on page 8-77 and in ‘SAE
Customization’ on page 5-33.
SAE Logion
Screen
After establishing a console, the SAE Logon Screen appears:
TYPE : 2827.757.IBM.02
SEQ : 0000000000070927
SSSSSS
AAAA
EEEEEEE
LPAR : PROD
SS
AA
AA
EE
VM
: zVM/
6.3.0
SS
AA
AA
EE
GUEST: SAE
SSSS
AAAAAAA
EEEEE
TAPE EXPIRES: 17.365
SS AA
AA
EE
SS AA
AA
EE
SSSSSSS AA
AA
EEEEEEE
IPL ADDR: 0A98
LOADPARM: 0A8200
CONSOLE : 0700
STAND - ALONE - ENVIRONMENT
(C) COPYRIGHT NEWERA SOFTWARE INC. 2017
RELEASE 16.0 PATCH 0000
TOD DATE = 11/01/01
TOD TIME = 12:01
ENTER PASSWORD
SERIAL
MODEL
= 070927
= 2827-757
===>
USE PF1 TO SEE WHAT IS NEW IN THIS RELEASE
SAE Logon
Screen Prompts
The SAE Logon Screen controls the initial use of SAE. It may prompt for:
an OVERRIDE code
a PASSWORD
for both
for neither
If SAE is authorized for the IPL processor, and no start up passwords are
defined, the prompt does not appear. If so, then press Enter to continue.
Once all required fields are complete, SAE displays the SAE Primary Screen.
10-98
Override
Obtaining an
Override Code
If you IPL SAE on a processor for which it is not licensed, SAE presents the
following prompt:
ENTER OVERRIDE
===>
SAE IS NOT AUTHORIZED (0). IF THIS IS AN EMERGENCY, YOU CAN OBTAIN AN OVERRIDE
CODE THAT WILL ALLOW SAE TO FUNCTION. TO OBTAIN THE CODE, CONTACT NEWERA
SUPPORT STAFF (1-800-421-5035) AND QUOTE THE FOLLOWING NUMBER – xxxxxxxx
If this occurs, contact NewEra Software to obtain the necessary Override code
that allows SAE to function. See ‘NewEra Technical Support’ on page 1-2.
10-99
GA
Password
Password
Prompt
If you IPL SAE and you have pre-defined a startup password or you have
enabled the audit feature, the following prompt appears:
ENTER PASSWORD
===>
You must enter a valid password before being granted access to SAE.
10-100
SAE Logon Screen Information
Field
Information
The SAE Logon Screen provides information about the product and the
processor on which it is running. Not all information fields always display.
What displays depends on the environment in which SAE is IPLed, and if a
Trial version was used.
Logon Screen
Field
Descriptions
The following is a list of the various Logon Screen fields and their
descriptions:
Field Name
This field provides…
TYPE: 7060.P30.IBM.02
The processor type information as extracted using
the STSI instruction (if installed on the processor).
SEQ: 0000000000070927
The processor sequence information as extracted
using the STSI instruction (if installed on the
processor).
LPAR: PROD
The LPAR name as extracted using the STSI
instruction (if installed on the processor).
VM: zVM
6.3.0
(If SAE is running under VM) the level of VM, as
extracted using the STSI instruction (if installed on
the processor).
GUEST: SAE
(If SAE is running under VM) the name of the VM
guest, as extracted using the STSI instruction (if
installed on the processor).
TAPE EXPIRES: 17.365
(If SAE was IPLed from a Distribution Tape) the
date on which that tape permanently expires. Do
not confuse value with the 30 days provided for a
trial.
IPL ADDR: 0A98
The device number of the device from which SAE
was IPLed.
LOADPARM: 0A8200
The value of the LOADPARM at the time of IPL.
CONSOLE: 0700
The device number of the console currently in use.
SERIAL = 070927
The processor serial number as extracted using the
STIDP instruction.
MODEL = 7060
The processor model number as extracted using the
STIDP instruction.
10-101
GA
Chapter 11: Automatic Printer Output
Assignment
Automatic Printer Output Assignment
Automatic
Printer
Assignment
SAE can automatically assign the printer output at IPL time. You can assign
automatic printer output to:
a real channel attached printer or
a Print to Disk dataset.
For more information, see ‘SAE Customization’ on page 5-33.
When Active
If you IPL SAE and Automatic Printer Output Assignment is active, a status
screen displays immediately before the SAE Primary Screen first displays.
This Printer Output Status screen provides details on the success or failure of
the Automatic Printer Output Assignment.
Printer Output
Status Screen
AUTOMATIC IPL-TIME PRINTER OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT
PRINTER_TYPE= DASD
PRINTER_UNIT=
PRINTER_VOL= VOL200
ASSIGNMENT SUCCESSFUL
DATA SET SAVED
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
GA
11-103
Chapter 12: SAE Primary Screen
Overview
In This Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
Functional Description
12-106
Common PF Key Assignments
12-108
12-105
Functional Description
SAE’s Launching
Point
SAE Primary
Screen
After you gain entry to SAE from the SAE Logon Screen, the SAE Primary
Screen appears. The SAE Primary Screen is the launching point for all SAE
services.
SERIAL
MODEL
ARCH
CONSOLE
-
000001
SAE
STORAGE
2827-757
RELEASE 16.0
TOD DATE
ZAR/VM
PATCH LEVEL 0001
TOD TIME
0700
LOAPARM
(C) COPYRIGHT NEWERA SOFTWARE INC. 2017
USERID
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED, USE BY PERMISSION ONLY
SELECT OPTION
0
1
2
3
5
X
SETTING
ACTION
ERASE
CONFIRM
RESTORE
EXIT
-
-
301.8M
17/01/01
12:00
0A7400M1
SAELVL2
===>
SAE SETTINGS
ACTION SERVICES
FAST DASD ERASE
HARDWARE CONFIRMATION
RESTORE SERVICES
TERMINATE SAE
Continued on next page
12-106
Functional Description, Continued
Available
Options
Use the Primary Screen to select the required SAE services. Enter the option
number and press Enter.
Select Option #
Use to Invoke the Following Services
0 – SETTINGS
(see page 13-109)
Set SAE IPL Options
Set Printer Output Assignment
Set TOD Clock
1 – ACTION
(see page 13-123)
Work with DASD Volumes
Work with Datasets
Work with Members
Work with CSECTs
Work with Catalogs
2 – ERASE
(see page 20-217)
Erase DASD Volumes
3 – CONFIRM
(see page 20-244)
Work with DASD and non-DASD devices
5 – RESTORE
(see page 20-255)
Restore DASD Volumes
Restore Datasets
Restore Members
Copy Volumes
Compare Volumes
12-107
GA
Common PF Key Assignments
Overview
The following table contains PF Key assignments.
If the command assigned to a particular PF Key is not applicable to a given
screen, its use is processed as if the Enter key was used.
PF Key
Function
PF 1
PF 13
Display Online Help
PF 2
PF 14
CANCEL
PF 3
PF 15
SAVE and END
PF 4
PF 16
SAVE and RETURN
PF 5
PF 17
Repeat FIND
PF 6
PF 18
Repeat CHANGE
PF 7
PF 19
SCROLL UP
PF 8
PF 20
SCROLL DOWN
PF 9
PF 21
Repeat UNDELETE (Member Edit)
Next Record (DASD Extend View/Alter)
PF 10
PF 22
SCROLL LEFT
PF 11
PF 23
SCROLL RIGHT
PF 12
PF 24
PRINT Screen Image
12-108
Chapter 13: SAE Settings
Overview
Introduction
This chapter provides information about configuring SAE.
Navigation
To access the SAE Settings Options, select Option 0 from the SAE Primary
Screen.
Selecting an
Option
The SAE Settings Screen is shown below. From this screen you can select
options that:
Set SAE IPL Options (subset of DLIB@OPT utility setting)
Activate Print Output (Real Printer/Print to Disk/Print to Tape)
Deactivate Print Output
Set the Time-of-Day Clock
Set Volume Selection List Re-Use options
Select an option and press Enter, or use PF3/PF15 to exit.
SAE Settings
Screen
SAE SETTINGS ----------------------------------------------------OPTION ===>
0
1
2
3
4
In This Chapter
SAE
PRT OPN
PRT CLS
CLOCK
RE-USE
-
SET SAE IPL OPTIONS (DASD IPL ONLY)
SET PRINTER OR PRINT-TO-DISK/TAPE
CLOSE PRINT-TO-DISK/TAPE
SET TOD CLOCK
SET VOLUME SELECTION RE-USE
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
SAE IPL Options
13-110
Printer Control – Activate Print Output
13-111
Printing to Disk Dataset
13-113
Print to Disk Dataset via Option 0.1
13-114
Printer to Disk Dataset via Other Than Option 0.1
13-115
Print to Disk Dataset - Dataset Allocation
13-116
Printing to a Tape Dataset
13-117
Switching Print Output Direction
13-119
Setting the TOD Clock
13-120
Set Volume Selection Re-Use
13-121
13-109
SAE IPL Options
Navigation
To configure SAE IPL Options, select option 0 from the SAE Settings Screen.
Only Available
for DASD IPL
Use the SAE IPL Options Settings Screen to set SAE IPL options. You can
only use the IPL Options Screen after IPLing SAE from a DASD volume.
These options are a sub-set of the options you can configure with the
DLIB@OPT utility. For detailed information on the keywords and their use
see ‘SAE Customization’ on page 5-33.
Editing Options
To change an IPL option:
Step
When Edits Take
Effect
SAE IPL Options
Settings Screen
Action
1.
Type over the field to the right of the displayed keyword
2.
To accept the options, press PF3
3.
To cancel the setting of new options, press PF4
Once changed, SAE writes the specified options into the IPL track of the
volume from which SAE was IPLed. These options activate the next time
SAE is IPLed from the same DASD volume.
SAE IPL OPTIONS SETTING ---------------------------------------------------Changed options effective next IPL
PRINT_DSN= SYS1.PRT
PRINT_TYPE= IPL
PRINT_UNIT=
PRINT_VOL=
Print-to Dataset name prefix
Auto print option OFF, REAL, IPL, DASD
Printer or DASD unit address
Print-to-Disk Volser
INDEX_VOL=
INDEX_DSN=
VOL001
Image Comparison Dataset & Volser
IMAGEFOC.BLUEPRINT.INDEX
CONSOLE1=
CONSOLE2=
CONSOLE3=
CONSOLE4=
CONSOLE5=
CONSOLE6=
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
TAPEVOL1=
TAPEVOL2=
SAEMT1
SAEMT2
Restricted Consoles
- Code Unit Address or NONE
Backup Master Tape Volser
Use PF3 to save changes or PF4 to cancel
13-110
Printer Control – Activate Print Output
Printer Control
Screen Functions
You can use the Printer Control Screen to:
Navigation
To access the Printer settings:
Select Option 1 from the SAE Settings screen.
Enter the ‘Print’ command on supported screens.
Automatic ‘Print’ command on entry to Fast DASD Erase.
Printer Control
Screen
Specify the printer address that SAE will use
Configure the re-direction of print output to a Disk dataset or Tape Dataset.
PRINTER CONTROL ------------------------------------------------------------PRINT BANNER PAGE (Y OR N)
==> N
BANNER PAGE INFORMATION
COMPANY NAME
USER NAME
LOCATION
COMMENTS
==>
==>
==>
==>
PRINT OPTIONS. TO DIRECT PRINT OUTPUT TO:
- A CHANNEL ATTACHED PRINTER, ENTER A 4 DIGIT PRINTER ADDRESS
- A DISK DATASET, ENTER DISK
- A TAPE DATASET, ENTER TAPE
SPECIFY PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION ==> DISK
USE PF3 TO CANCEL
Printing a
Banner Page
You can configure the Printer Control Screen to print a banner page in front
of each SAE report. Type ‘Y’ next to the prompt if you want a banner page.
You can also specify the user information that displays in the banner page.
Directing Printed
Output
You can direct printed output to one of the following:
Channel-attached printer
Disk dataset
Tape Dataset
Use the ‘SPECIFY PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION’ prompt to direct the
printer’s output.
13-111
GA
Printing to Channel-Attached Printer
Print to Channel
Attached Printer
To print SAE output to a channel-attached printer, supply the printer’s fourdigit address. When you press Enter, SAE tests the supplied address by
attempting to print a single print line. If successful, the screen exits and SAE
uses that printer address for future print operations.
13-112
Printing to Disk Dataset
Print to Disk
Dataset
To print SAE output directly to a Disk dataset, supply a value of ‘DISK’. An
SAE screen appears with instructions on how to identify the DASD device on
which the Disk Print dataset is to be allocated.
Flushing
Buffered Data
Data written to the Print to Disk dataset is buffered and written only when a
buffer is full. After you finish producing printer output, you must close the
Print to Disk dataset to flush any buffered data.
To do this, select Option 2 on the SAE Settings Screen, or select Option X on
the SAE Primary Screen. If the Print to Disk dataset is not closed, you may
lose data.
Disk Location
Selection
The method of volume selection for Print to Disk changes, depending on the
navigation to Printer Control.
13-113
GA
Print to Disk Dataset via Option 0.1
Navigation
Printer Selection
Screen
If you enter “Printer Control” via Option 0.1, the Printer Selection Screen
displays.
PRINT TO DISK----------------------------------------- PRINT DATASET LOCATION
USING THE SELECTION LIST THAT FOLLOWS
SELECT THE VOLUME ON WHICH TO ALLOCATE THE PRINT DATASET
(PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE)
NOTE: PRINT DATASETS WILL NOT BE CATALOGED BY SAE. IT IS SUGGESTED
THAT A NON-SMS MANAGED WORK VOLUME BE SELECTED FOR PRINT OUTPUT.
ALSO, YOU MAY NOT ERASE A VOLUME THAT CONTAINS AN ACTIVE PRINT DATASET.
Printer Screen
Information
The Printer Selection Screen informs you that SAE is going to use the normal
Unit Selection and Volume Selection Screens to select the volume on which it
is going to allocate the print dataset.
Selecting a
Volume
Press Enter and use the Unit Selection and Volume Selection Screens to select
a specific volume.
13-114
Printer to Disk Dataset via Other Than Option 0.1
Using Another
Printer
Controller
Optional Printer
Control Screen
If you did not enter “Printer Control” using Option 0.1 (for example, from a
PRINT command or Erase entry), then the following screen displays.
PRINT TO DISK----------------------------------------- PRINT DATASET LOCATION
SELECT THE VOLUME ON WHICH TO ALLOCATE THE PRINT DATASET
FOR A VOLUME SELECTION LIST, USE 0.1 FROM PRIMARY SCREEN
ENTER THE DASD VOLSER ==>
NOTE: PRINT DATASETS WILL NOT BE CATALOGED BY SAE. IT IS SUGGESTED
THAT A NON-SMS MANAGED WORK VOLUME BE SELECTED FOR PRINT OUTPUT.
ALSO, YOU MAY NOT ERASE A VOLUME THAT CONTAINS AN ACTIVE PRINT DATASET
Optional Printer
Control
Information
The Optional Printer Control screen informs you that the normal Unit
Selection and Volume Selection Screen are not available, and that you must
identify (by volume serial number) the volume on which to allocate the print
dataset.
Selecting a
Volume
Enter the specific volume’s Volser and press Enter.
13-115
GA
Print to Disk Dataset - Dataset Allocation
Creating a
Dataset Name
After identifying the volume, SAE allocates the print output dataset on that
volume.
SAE creates the dataset name using a defined prefix (see DLIB@OPT utility,
PRINT_DSN= keyword on page 5-52) and the fixed-print dataset suffix. SAE
then writes all print-directed output to the Print to Disk dataset.
The Print to Disk dataset is allocated with RECFM=FBM and LRECL=133.
The BLKSIZE is dependent on the device type and is for half-track blocking.
SAE Allocated
Print Datasets
Not Cataloged
SAE-allocated print datasets are not cataloged.
Erasing An
Active Print
Dataset
You may not erase a volume that contains the active print dataset.
NewEra suggests that you select a non-SMS managed work or temporary
volume for print output. After you finish with SAE you may copy or catalog
the print dataset using a z/OS system.
13-116
Printing to a Tape Dataset
Procedure
To direct SAE print output to a tape dataset:
Step
1.
Action
In the Printer Control Screen, supply a value of ‘TAPE’.
Results: SAE displays the “Initial Print to Tape” screen, which provides
instructions on how to identify the Tape device on which to
create the Tape Print dataset. The Print to Tape screen appears:
Note:
The data SAE writes to the Print to Tape dataset is buffered
and only writes when the buffer is full. After you finish
producing printer output you must close the Print to Tape
dataset so that SAE can flush any buffered data and write the
tape trailer labels.
To close the Print to Tape dataset, select Option 2 on the SAE
Settings Screen, or select Option X on the SAE Primary
Screen. If you do not close the Print to Tape dataset, you may
lose your data.
PRINT TO TAPE------------------------------ TAPE DEVICE SELECTION
USING THE TAPE MOUNT SCREEN THAT FOLLOWS
ENTER THE TAPE DEVICE ADDRESS ON WHICH TO CREATE THE PRINT DATASET
(PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE)
IF YOU DO NOT KNOW THE ADDRESSES OF ATTACHED TAPE DRIVES
YOU MAY RETURN TO THE PRIMARY SCREEN AND USE OPTION 3.
NOTE: THE PRINT TO TAPE DATASET MUST BE CLOSED WHEN YOU HAVE
FINISHED USING SAE SO THAT TAPE LABELS CAN BE WRITTEN. SELECT
OPTION X FROM THE PRIMARY SCREEN TO CLOSE THE PRINT TO TAPE
DATASET.
Continued on next page
13-117
GA
Printing to a Tape Dataset, Continued
Procedure (continued)
Step
2.
Action
After writing to Tape, press Enter to continue
Results: The following screen controls the tape mounting:
TAPE MOUNT REQUEST ----------------------- PRINT DATASET LOCATION
COMMAND ==>
FOR TAPE MOUNT, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
- MOUNT THE DESIRED TAPE AND READY THE DRIVE
- SUPPLIED REQUIRED VALUES
- PRESS ENTER
TAPE DRIVE UNIT ADDRESS
==>
TAPE VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER ==> PRIVATE
3.
Mount the tape on the tape drive you are going to use, and prepare the
drive.
4.
Enter the tape drive address in the Tape Mount Request Screen.
5.
Press Enter.
Results: After reading the tape, SAE displays a confirmation screen
before creating the tape dataset on the tape.
SAE creates a standard labeled tape dataset as the tape’s first
file. Any previous data on the tape is lost.
6.
Closing the
Session
To proceed, confirm the use of the tape:
If the tape contains Standard Labels (SL), then the new SAE-created
tape will have the same Volser as when the tape was mounted
If the tape contains no labels (NL), SAE creates a Standard Labeled
tape with a Volser of SAEPRT
The tape dataset’s name is formatted as follows:
SAE.Dyymmdd.Thhmm. The dataset is created with RECFM=FBM
and LRECL=133
SAE writes to the tape as printed output is produced. Before closing SAE, it is
important that you use SAE to close the tape dataset.
When SAE closes the tape dataset, it writes an EOF Tape Mark along with
the Trailer labels. If the tape dataset is not closed, the printed output is
contained on the tape but the tape may not be accessible using z/OS utilities.
To close the tape dataset, exit SAE using Option X from the primary screen
or by switching the printed output direction to another device.
13-118
Switching Print Output Direction
Procedure
To switch print output direction to another device:
Step
Action
1.
Select Option 0.1 on the SAE Settings Screen.
2.
Specify a new Print Output Direction.
3.
Press Enter.
Results: If Print Output Direction is currently active to Disk or Tape,
the following Close Confirmation screen displays:
PRINTER OUTPUT IS CURRENTLY BEING DIRECTED TO DISK:
DATASET: SYS1.SAE.PRINT.D981007.T14580
VOLUME : TEST01
UNIT
: 0131
DO YOU WISH TO CLOSE THIS PRINT OUTPUT DATASET ==>
(Y/N)
4.
To close the current print output dataset select ‘Y’.
Results: The print dataset closes and if you are using a tape, SAE writes
the trailer labels.
5.
You can now define a new print device, or stop the print direction.
To stop the print direction, press PF3 to step back through the panels.
13-119
GA
Setting the TOD Clock
Overview
You can set the date and time using the TOD (Time of Day) Clock Setting
screen.
Procedure
To set the TOD:
Step
1.
Action
Select Option 3 from the SAE Settings Screen
Result: The TOD Clock Setting screen appears:
TOD CLOCK MAY BE SET (PF3 TO EXIT)
SUPPLY DATE AND TIME VALUES, PRESS ENTER AND THEN
DEPRESS TOD CLOCK SECURITY SWITCH
DATE= 2011.013 CLOCK= 18.18.00
TOD=C72CEA0E3C9A7900
2.
Enter the required date and time values in the format shown on the
screen.
3.
Press Enter.
Note:
Your keyboard remains locked until the clock is configured.
4.
Press the processor's TOD Clock Security Switch when the specified
time occurs.
5.
The TOD Clock Setting Screen closes immediately after you set the
TOD.
13-120
Set Volume Selection Re-Use
Overview
The Volume Selection Re-Use Screen allows you to configure Volume
Selection options independent of the non-display option setting.
For more information, see ‘Volume Selection Re-use’ on page 15-135.
Navigation
To access the Volume Selection Re-Use screen, select Option 4 from the SAE
Settings Screen.
13-121
GA
Part IV: Action Services
Overview
Introduction
This part contains information about SAE’s Action Services.
In This Part
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Action Services
14-125
Volume Services
15-131
Dataset Services
16-157
Member Services
17-181
Edit Services
18-193
Zap Services
19-201
Catalog Services
20-207
13-123
Chapter 14: Action Services
Overview
Introduction
The following topics provide an overview of SAE’s Action Services.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
GA
See Page
What are Action Services
14-126
List of Action Services
14-127
Action Services Overview
14-129
14-125
What are Action Services
Provide
Complete Access
To
The ACTION SERVICES application provides you with complete access to
all:
Assisting SAE
Repairs and
Restarting
Due to the nature of problems that result in system outages, NewEra has
designed SAE’s Action Services to specifically assist the people responsible
for repairing and restarting failed systems.
DASD Devices
Datasets
Members
Load Modules
ICF Catalogs
The Action Service’s interface and related screens are specifically designed to
fit the needs of an experienced ISPF user. The interface and panels are
intuitive and usable with a minimum of instruction and/or training for those
that have mastered ISPF.
Action Services
Makeup
Action Services is a collection of services that are tied together to provide a
hieratical view of DASD Volumes and their contents. The user moves
through an intuitive interface, starting with DASD Volumes and moving on to
Datasets, then Dataset Members, etc.
Inspect
When using SAE to repair a system problem, you should also consider using
Inspect (see page Error! Bookmark not defined.).
Action Services provide access to all of your system’s volumes and datasets
and leaves the navigation to you. Alternatively, Inspect isolates the datasets
being used by a specific z/OS image. The choice is yours.
14-126
List of Action Services
Overview
Use Action Services to perform these functions:
Volume Services
The Volume Services List has the following functions:
Volume Services
Dataset Services
Page
Display Volumes
15-132
Initialize Volumes
15-139
Rename Volumes
15-141
Display Volume Information
15-143
Display Volume Map
15-147
Edit Volume Extent
15-152
Print Volume List
15-151
Allocate New Dataset
15-142
Copy Between Datasets
15-140
Select Volume for Dataset Services
15-140
The Dataset Services List has the following functions:
Dataset Services
Page
Display Dataset
16-158
Rename Dataset
16-164
Display Dataset Information
16-165
Print Dataset List
16-160
Change RACF and Password Indicators
16-163
Allocate New Dataset
16-167
Select Catalog for Altercat Services
16-167
Copying Between Datasets
16-172
Select Dataset for Edit Services
15-140
Select Dataset for Zap Services
15-140
Select Catalog for Altercat Services
15-140
Continued on next page
14-127
GA
List of Action Services, Continued
Member Services
The Member Services List has the following functions:
Member Services
Edit Services
Display Members
17-181
Rename Members
17-186
Delete Members
17-186
Print Member List
17-185
Select Member for Edit/Zap Services
17-186
Select CSECT for Zap Services
17-191
The Edit Services List has the following functions:
Edit Services
Zap Services
Page
Display Contents
18-193
Alter Contents
18-197
Print Contents
18-196
Copy Members
18-197
Undelete Member
18-197
The Zap Services List has the following functions:
Zap Services
Altercat Services
Page
Page
Display Contents
19-201
Alter Contents
19-205
The Altercat Services List has the following functions:
Altercat Services
Page
Display Catalog Entries
20-207
Alter Catalog Entries
20-213
Capture Dataset Volser List
20-214
Locate Dataset and Invoked Dataset Services
20-212
14-128
Action Services Overview
Action Services
Diagram
The following diagram explains how to navigate through the Action Services
process.
Support Screens
Note: To enter the
ACTION SERVICES
application at the UNIT
SELECTION Screen,
select Option 1 from the
SAE primary menu.
Unit
Selection
Volume Information
Screen
Volume
Selection
Volume MAP
Screen
DASD EXTENT
ZAP
Dataset Information
Screen
Dataset Allocation
Screen
Dataset
Selection
Dataset Copy
Screen
1
Organization
ICF
PDSE
Catalog
Partitioned
Datasets
Sequential
Datasets
VSAM
Datasets
Undefined
Datasets
File Types
Fixed
Block
Variable
Block
Undefined
Format
Fixed
Block
Variable
Block
Undefined
Format
EDIT
EDIT
ZAP
Selection Options
Member Selection
Load
LISTCAT
Module
Module
Csect
Selection
Processing Screens
ALTERCAT
EDIT
EDIT
ZAP
1
14-129
GA
Chapter 15: Volume Services
Overview
Introduction
Volume Services is an integral component of Action Services. Volume
Services provide functions that are directed against DASD Volumes. Volume
Services is also the launching point for all other Action Services functions.
In this Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Volume Services
GA
Page
Creating a Volume List
15-132
Volume Selection Re-Use Screen
15-135
Volume Selection
15-137
Printing a Volume List
15-139
Invoking Services
15-140
Rename Volumes
15-141
Dataset Allocation – “A”
15-142
Volume Information – “I”
15-143
Volume Initialization – “V”
15-144
Volume Map – “M”
15-147
Sorting the Volume Map Extent List
15-149
Locating an Extent
15-150
Printing the Volume Map List
15-151
Invoking DASD Extent Services
15-152
DASD Extent Services
15-153
View/Alter Screen for DASD Extent Record
15-154
15-131
Creating a Volume List
Prerequisites
Before you can perform work using Volume Services, you must create a list
of volumes.
Selecting DASD
Devices
The Unit Selection Screen controls which DASD devices are selectable for
further processing in Volume Services. The Unit Selection Screen provides
three criteria for selection:
Unit Address (UNITS)
Volser (VOLSER)
the existence of a specific Dataset (DSN)
A DASD device must meet all of these criteria to be selected.
Navigation
Unit Selection
Screen
Select Option 1 (Action Services) from the SAE Primary Screen
UNIT SELECTION ------------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
ADDRESS RANGES (BLANK FOR ALL UNITS)
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
(EXAMPLES: 600, 6**, 600-700, E1*-F1*, ¬A**, ¬A00-B34)
VOLSERS (BLANK FOR ALL VOLUMES)
VOLSER =>
VOLSER =>
VOLSER =>
VOLSER =>
VOLSER =>
VOLSER =>
(EXAMPLES: SYSRES, WK**P*, ¬SYS1**)
VOLSER =>
VOLSER =>
VOLSER =>
INCLUDE PAV ALIAS VOLUMES ==> N
DATASET SEARCH (FULLY QUALIFIED NAME)
DSN ==>
Continued on next page
15-132
Creating a Volume List, Continued
Field
Descriptions
The following table contains Selection screen field descriptions:
Field Name
Unit Address
Description
Leave all selection criteria blank (on the Unit Selection Screen)
to select all DASD Volumes.
You can specify up to nine unit addresses. If you do not specify
an address, all unit addresses meet the UNITS criteria. Unit
address specifications can be a specific:
address
address range for inclusion or
address or address range for exclusion
Exclusion is indicated by prefixing the UNITS specification
with a ‘¬’ character. If an address is specified for both
inclusion and exclusion, SAE excludes the unit. If you only
specify exclusion criteria, all other addresses are included.
Specify UNITS as follows:
A complete and explicit 3 or 4 digit unit address, for
example, 62C or 102C.
A masked partial 3- or 4-digit unit address. The mask
character is an asterisk (*). An asterisk is specified for each
wildcard digit, for example, 8** results in a search of units
800-8FF.
A unit address range. The range is specified with two
complete 3- or 4-digit unit addresses separated by a dash,
for example, 245-560 results in the search of units 245
through 560. Unit address range and masking are mutually
exclusive.
Continued on next page
15-133
GA
Creating a Volume List, Continued
Field Descriptions (continued)
Field Name
Volser
Specifications
Description
You can make up to nine Volser specifications. If you do not
make any Volser specifications, then all volumes meet the
VOLSER criteria. Volser specifications can be a specific
volume or a volume mask. Exclusion is indicated by prefixing
the VOLSER specification with a ‘¬’ character. If a volume is
specified for both inclusion and exclusion, SAE excludes the
volume. If you only specify exclusion criteria, all other
volumes are included.
Specify a VOLSER as follows:
A complete 6-character Volser. For example, SYSRES.
A partial masked 6-character Volser. The mask character is
an asterisk (*). An asterisk is specified for each wildcard
character, For example, SYS*** matches all volumes with
Volsers starting with SYS. SYS** matches all volumes
with Volsers starting with SYS and ending with a blank.
Unit Search
Parallel Access
Volume (PAV)
Alias Volumes
You may select whether or not to include PAV Alias volumes
in the volume list. If ‘Y’ is specified, then no PAV volumes are
excluded from the volume list. If ‘N’ is specified, then PAV
volumes which are aliases are excluded and will not meet the
criteria for inclusion.
Dataset Name
If you specify a fully qualified dataset name (without quotes),
volumes meet this criteria only if the dataset exists on the
volume.
After defining the criteria for Unit Selection, press Enter to begin the Unit
Search. SAE initiates I/O to each possible device on the system (within the
unit address criteria if specified) to determine if the device is a DASD
Volume. If the device is a DASD Volume, SAE performs further I/O to
determine additional information about the volume. Depending on the number
of devices defined (IOCP) to the system, and the number of devices that
actually exist (DASD or otherwise) the Unit Search process may take several
minutes.
As the unit search progresses, a status message displays at the top of the Unit
Selection screen. The message updates periodically as the search continues
and indicates the number of matches found.
15-134
Volume Selection Re-Use Screen
When to Use It
After using the Unit Selection Screen to create a Volume Selection List, SAE
maintains that list even after exiting from Action Services. The next time you
use the Unit Selection Screen, if you specify the same unit selection criteria as
were used to create the previous Volume Selection List, SAE displays the
Volume Selection Re-Use Screen.
Navigation
Displays after Unit Selection Screen
Volume Selection
Re-Use Screen
VOLUME SELECTION RE-USE ----------------------------------------------THE UNIT SELECTION CRITERIA ENTERED IS THE SAME AS WAS USED TO CREATE THE
PREVIOUS VOLUME SELECTION LIST. YOU MAY AVOID THE UNIT SEARCH TIME BY
RE-USING THE PREVIOUS SELECTION LIST.
IF YOU ELECT NOT TO DISPLAY THIS SCEEN AGAIN, THE SETTINGS BELOW WILL BE
USED FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS SAE SESSION OR YOU MAY CHANGE THEM USING 0.3
RE-USE PREVIOUS VOLUME SELECTION LIST ==> Y
DISPLAY THIS SCREEN AGAIN
==> Y
NOTE: VOLUME COPY OR RESTORE OPERATIONS MAY ALTER VOLSERS. THESE CHANGES
WILL NOT BE REFLECTED IF THE VOLUME SELECTION LIST IS RE-USED.
What It Does
The Volume Selection Re-Use Screen specifies whether to re-use the
previously created Volume Selection List, or if Unit Selection should create a
new list for performing I/O to the specified range of addresses.
Advantages
Re-using a previously created Volume Selection List has the advantage of
avoiding the end user wait time while SAE performs I/O to each possible
address in the specified range (to build a new Volume Selection List). For
large installations, the wait time while accessing all devices can be quite long.
Continued on next page
15-135
GA
Volume Selection Re-Use Screen, Continued
Disadvantages
The only disadvantage to re-using the Volume Selection List is that you
cannot see any changes to volumes that may have occurred since the previous
Volume Selection List was created. The previous Volume Selection List
might:
Contain incorrect Volsers if volumes have been renamed by other systems since
the previous list was built.
Not include volumes that were reserved by other systems while the previous list
was being created.
Not include the correct Volser for volumes copied or restored using SAE Restore
Services.
Re-using the
Previous Volume
Selection Screen
In most cases, re-using the previous Volume Selection List provides quick
access without much concern.
To Not Show the
Volume Re-Use
Screen
If you do not want to show the Volume Selection Re-Use Screen again,
specify ‘N’ at the ‘DISPLAY THIS SCREEN AGAIN’ prompt.
To re-use the previously created Volume Selection List, specify ‘Y’ at the
‘RE-USE PREVIOUS VOLUME SELECTION LIST’ prompt. To have SAE
inspect each unit address and create a new Volume Selection List, specify
‘N’.
When you specify ‘N’, each time you use Unit Selection, SAE does not
display the screen but continues processing based on the value last specified
for the RE-USE prompt. If at some time during the SAE session you want to
change your Re-use options (even if you have not requested a display), you
can use SAE Option 0.3.
15-136
Volume Selection
Overview
The Volume Selection Screen contains a list of DASD Volumes created by
Unit Selection.
Navigation
Displays following Unit Selection - Option 1 (Action Services) from the SAE
Primary Screen
Volume Selection
Screen
Column
Descriptions
VOLUME SELECTION --------------------------------------- ROW
1 OF 120
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VOLSER RENAME UNIT DEVT CYLS SUBC CHPID
AEAV01
01C0 3390 76K 0010 06 07 1C 1D
AMOD54
01D0 3390 66K 0020 06 07 1C 1D
AMOD27
01E0 3390 33K 0030 06 07 1C 1D
ANC004
0344 3380 2655 0011 03 04 1A 1C
ANC005
0346 3380 2655 0013 03 04 1A 1C
BCKRES
01C2 3390 2226 0035 05 06 1B 1D
IPL=OS/390
CATLOG
01C0 3390 2226 0033 05 06 1B 1D
CICS01
0343 3380 2655 0010 03 04 1A 1C
CICS02
0340 3380 2655 0007 03 04 1A 1C
CICS03
0342 3380 2655 0009 03 04 1A 1C
ONL001
0580 3350 555 0060 01 02
IPL=SAE
OLN002
0580 3350 555 0060 01 02
IPL=DF/DSS
OLN003
0583 3350 555 0063 01 02
SMP001
01C4 3390 2226 0037 05 06 1B 1D
SYSRES
01C1 3390 2226 0034 05 06 1B 1D
IPL=OS/390
SYS001
0742 3380 885 0016 09 0A/07 08
SYS002
0745 3380 885 0019 09 0A/07 08
SYS003
0740 3380 885 0014 09 0A/07 08
USER01
0743 3380 885 0017 09 0A/07 08
The information shown for each column is as follows:
Column Name
Description
VOLSER
Volume Serial Number
UNIT
Unit Address
DEVT
Device Type
CYLS
Number of cylinders. When the number of cylinders is 10,000 or
more, the number is presented as K (1000s of cylinders) or M
(1,000,000s).
SUBC
Sub-channel number
CHPID
Channel Path IDs - Installed, available and operational are shown
proceeding a ‘/’. Installed but not available and/or not operational
follow the ‘/’
IPL=
If the contents of Cylinder 0, Track 0, Record 4 are identifiable as
a known IPL-able product, then IPL= is followed by the product
name.
Continued on next page
15-137
GA
Volume Selection, Continued
Sorting Volume
List
To change the sort order of the list, use the following commands:
Command
Scrolling the
Device Selection
List
Description
SORTVOL
Sort list by Volser
SORTDUP
Sort list by Volser but list any duplicate
volsers first
SORTUNIT
Sort list by Unit address.
SORTCYL
Sort list by number of cylinders
SAE supports multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Device Selection
List. All scrolling activity is based on a fixed scroll size of one page
Keys
Action
Press PFkeys 7 and 19
Scroll up
Press PFkeys 8 and 20
Scroll down
Scrolling to the
Top or Bottom of
the Selection List
Type M on the command line to use a scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20) and scroll
to the top or bottom of the selection list.
Locating a Volser
If you sort the volume list by Volser, you can specify the locate command,
“L” on the command line with a full or partial volume name following. After
pressing Enter, SAE positions the selection list at the specified volume.
15-138
Printing a Volume List
How to Print
To print the Volume Selection List contents, enter PRINT on the Command
Line.
Printer Address
Not Defined
If you have not defined the printer’s address, a prompt appears that allows
you to define the printer.
15-139
GA
Invoking Services
Introduction
To invoke specific Services, you must issue a command or select a volume
using a Line Selection character.
Command Line
To invoke specific Services via the command line:
Command
Line Selection
Description
S xxxxxx
Select volume (xxxxxx) for Dataset Services (see page 16-157).
COPY
Invoke Dataset Services to copy between two datasets on different
DASD volumes (see page 16-172).
To invoke specific Services, you must select a volume using a specific line
selection character that represents the service.
The Service selection characters are:
Character
Procedure
Description
S
Volume Selection for Dataset Services (see page 16-157).
R
Volume Rename (see page 15-141).
A
New Dataset Allocation (see page 15-142).
I
Volume Information (see page 15-143).
M
Volume Map (see page 15-147).
V
Volume Initialization (see page 15-144).
To process a volume with a Service:
Step
Action
1.
Place your cursor in front of the volume you are going to select.
2.
Type the selection character.
15-140
Rename Volumes
Procedure
To rename a volume.
Step
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the volume.
2.
Type “R”
3.
Then TAB over and specify the new Volser.
Clipping
Once clipped (renamed), SAE highlights the volume on the Volume Selection
Screen.
Clipping
Multiple
Volumes
You can clip several volumes concurrently by specifying multiple ‘R’
selections and new Volsers before you press Enter.
15-141
GA
Dataset Allocation – “A”
Invoking Dataset
Allocation
You can invoke the Dataset Services function, Dataset Allocation, from the
Volume Selection Screen.
Allocating the
First Dataset
To allocate the first dataset on a volume, you can initiate Dataset Allocation
from the Volume Selection List. You cannot select volumes that do not
contain any Datasets for Dataset Services.
Procedure
To enter the allocation function:
Step
For More
Information
Action
1.
From the Volume Selection Screen, use the NEW LINE key to move the
cursor in front of the volume.
2.
Type “A”.
For more information on ‘Dataset Allocation’, see page 16-167.
15-142
Volume Information – “I”
Procedure
You can access detailed device and VTOC information, along with summary
allocation and free space information, from the Volume Selection Screen.
To do this:
Step
Volume Selection
Screen
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the volume.
2.
Type “I”.
VOLUME:
EAV001
CNTLR TYPE: 3990
DEVICE TYPE: 3390
EAV:
YES
UNIT:
0AC2 SUBCHANNEL: 0000
MODEL CODE: C2 MODEL/MFG:
C02 IBM
MODEL CODE: 0E MODEL/MFG:
A18 IBM
TOTAL CYLINDERS:
75684
--- TRACK MANAGED SPACE --CYLINDERS: 65534 TRACKS: 983010
ALLOCATED TRACKS: 982800
ALLOCATED EXTENTS:
FREE TRACKS:
0
FREE EXTENTS:
UNASSIGNED TRACKS
0
UNASSIGNED EXTENTS:
LARGEST FREE AREA IN TRACKS:
0
PERCENTAGE ALLOCATED:
99
VTOC ADDRESS:
0000000101
SIZE IN TRACKS:
5
DS0:
153
DS5:
1
DS1:
77
DS7:
1
DS3:
1
DS8:
8
DS4:
1
DS9:
8
INDEX VTOC: NONE
Unassigned
Space
SMS MANAGED:
83
0
0
DS4DSCYL:
DS4DCYL:
RDC_PRM2:
RDC_PRM4:
FFFE
000127A4
FFFE
000127A4
YES
DUPLEX PAIR:
DUPLEX STATUS:
PAIRED UNIT:
SAE performs a search for space that is neither assigned to a dataset extent
nor assigned as a free space extent. This space is reported as ‘unassigned’.
Unassigned space indicates a VTOC problem.
15-143
GA
Volume Initialization – “V”
Procedure
To process a volume for initialization:
Step
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the volume.
2.
Type “V”.
Results: The Volume Initialization Screen displays.
Initializing
Different
Volumes
You can initialize a 3380, 3390 or 9345 volume from the Volume
Initialization Screen. EAV volumes are not supported.
Unlabelled
Volumes do not
Appear
Unlabelled volumes do not appear on the Action Services Volume Selection
Screen.
To initialize a volume that does not already contain a valid volume label:
Select the volume using ‘V’ from the Hardware Confirmation Volume Selection
Screen.
See page 20-254 for more information.
Volume
Initialization
Screen
VOLUME INITIALIZATION -----------------------------------------------UNIT:
0120
DEVICE: 3380
CYLS:
2655
CURRENT VOLSER: MVSV5R
CURRENT VTOC ADDRESS: 0456 0000 01
NEW VOLSER: MVSV5R
NEW VTOC LOCATION, CYL: 0
TRK: 1
NEW VTOC SIZE (# OF TRACKS): 14
SEARCH FOR EXISTING VTOC: N (REPLY N FOR VTOC CREATE)
VTOC SEARCH RANGE, START CYL: 0
END CYL: 2654
SUPPLY NUMERIC VALUES IN DECIMAL. USE VTOC SEARCH TO RECOVER FROM VOL1
DAMAGE. VTOC SEARCH MAY TAKE SEVERAL MINUTES.
USE PF3 TO CANCEL
Initialization
Methods
The Volume Initialization Screen allows for two different methods of
initialization and VTOC setup.
Continued on next page
15-144
Volume Initialization – “V”, Continued
Performing
Volume
Initialization
If you add new VTOC information (location and size) and then specify ‘N’ to
a VTOC search, SAE constructs a new VTOC and writes new volume labels.
Procedure
To perform the volume initialization
Step
Volume
Initialization
Output
Action
1.
Supply the necessary VTOC position and size information (specify ‘N’
for VTOC search).
2.
Press Enter.
Result: A confirmation screen displays.
3.
From the confirmation screen, press Enter to proceed with the
initialization.
4.
To cancel the initialization, use PF3.
The volume initialization process creates a new VTOC and volume labels.
The device must have been previously initialized using the ICKDSF
INSTALL command to write the home address and record 0 on each track.
The SAE Volume Initialization is similar in function to running the following
ICKDSF command to perform a minimal initialization:
INIT
UNIT(uuuu) DEVTYPE(dddd) VTOC(cccc, hhhh, nnnn) VOLID(vvvvvv) NOINDEX NOVERIFY PURGE
Old VTOC
Search
Occasionally, a volume’s VOL1 label record becomes damaged or the volume is
accidentally minimally initialized. If either of these situations occurs, a valid
VTOCmay still exist on the volume that describes all of the volume’s datasets, but
that VTOC is not accessible.
If you specify ‘Y’ for VTOC search, then SAE performs a search of the specified
cylinder range looking for possible VTOCs. The VTOC Selection Screen displays
if SAE locates one or more possible VTOCs.
VTOC Selection
Screen
VTOC INSPECT SELECTION -------------------------- SELECT VTOC TO INSPECT
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
POSSIBLE VTOC LOCATIONS
CYL 0000 HEAD 0001
CYL 00C8 HEAD 0001
CYL 0456 HEAD 0000
Continued on next page
15-145
GA
Volume Initialization – “V”, Continued
Selecting a
Possible VTOC
From this selection list you may select a possible VTOC. After you select a
VTOC, if it is valid, a Dataset List and/or a Volume Map displays showing the
datasets and/or volume layout based on the selected VTOC. Use these displays to
determine if the selected VTOC is the VTOC you wish to reinstate.
Accidental
Initializations
If the volume has been accidentally initialized, use the volume map display to
determine what (if any) data has been destroyed.
For example, a volume that has its VTOC in the middle of the pack is accidentally
initialized to create a VTOC on cylinder 0. The volume labels address the VTOC
in cylinder 0, but the original VTOC remains in the middle of the volume. Using
VTOC search, SAE locates and selects the VTOC in a middle of the volume. The
volume map based on the original VTOC display the dataset(s) (if any) that reside
at the location of the new VTOC (Cyl 0). This indicates which dataset(s) have been
damaged by the creation of the new VTOC.
Finishing
VTOC Selection
Screen
After you finish viewing the dataset list and/or volume map, use PF3 to close.
After using PF3 from the Volume Map Screen, the following screen displays to
allow final VTOC selection:
VTOC ADDRESS: 00C8 0001
PROCESS VOLUME TO USE THIS VTOC: Y
REPLY Y TO HAVE VOLUME USE THE SELECTED VTOC
REPLY N OR USE PF3 TO RETURN TO VTOC SELECTION
Selecting a
VTOC
To make the selected VTOC the volume’s active VTOC, press ‘Y’. To return to
the VTOC selection screen, press ‘N’ or use PF3.
15-146
Volume Map – “M”
Procedure
To access a detailed volume map that shows physical dataset and free space
locations:
Step
Action
1.
From the Volume Selection Screen, use the NEW LINE key to move the
cursor in front of the volume.
2.
Type “M”.
Selecting Extents
From the Volume Map Screen, you can select any extent for DASD Extent Zap.
Navigation
Select Volume using ‘M’ on Volume Selection Screen.
Volume Map
Screen
Descriptions
MAP OF VOLUME SYSRES (01C1) -------------------------------------------COMMAND ==> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
EXTENT CYL
HH CYL
HH TRACKS
*** IPL AND LABEL RECORDS ***
01/01 00000-00 00000-00
1
SYS1.VTOCIX.SYSRES
01/01 00000-01 00000-04
4
SYS1.ALT.MLPALIB
01/04 00000-05 00000-09
5
SYS1.VVDS.VSYSRES
01/01 00000-10 00000-12
3
SYS3.SYS.PROFILE.DATASET.INDEX
01/01 00000-13 00000-13
1
SYS1.SVCLIB
02/03 00000-14 00000-14
1
*** OS VTOC ***
01/01 00001-00 00002-14
30
SYS3.SYS.SMPCSI.CSI.DATA
01/01 00003-00 00005-09
40
SYS3.SYS.SMPCSI.CSI.INDEX
01/01 00005-10 00005-14
5
ISPFSYS.CLIST
01/01 00006-00 00012-02
93
ISPFSYS.ISPMLIB
01/01 00012-03 00012-06
4
ISPFSYS.ISPPLIB
01/01 00012-07 00035-06
345
ISPFSYS.ISPSLIB
01/01 00035-07 00056-13
322
ISPFSYS.ISPTLIB
01/01 00056-14 00056-14
1
ISPFSYS.LOADLIB
01/01 00057-00 00063-01
92
ISPFSYS.PIMLIB
01/01 00063-02 00063-07
6
*** FREE SPACE ***
00063-08 00079-01
234
SYS1.PARMLIB
04/10 00079-02 00079-02
1
SYS3.SYS.SMPSCDS
01/01 00079-03 00079-09
7
SYS3.SYS.SMPMTS
01/01 00079-10 00079-10
1
SYS3.SYS.SMPPTS
01/01 00079-11 00080-10
15
The following table provides descriptions for the various columns:
Column
Description
EXTENT
Indicates the extent number and the number of extents in the given dataset,
for example, the fourth extent of a dataset that is made up of 10 extents is
shown as 04/10.
CYL HH
The two CYL HH headings indicate the low and high ranges for the given
extent.
TRACKS
Lists the number of tracks in the extent.
Continued on next page
15-147
GA
Volume Map – “M”, Continued
Lost Extents
A search is made for space that is neither assigned to a dataset extent nor assigned
as a free space extent. These lost extents indicate a VTOC problem and display as
'*** UNASSIGNED ***'.
15-148
Sorting the Volume Map Extent List
Sorting Volume
Map Extent List
To change the sort order of the list, use the following commands:
Command
Description
SORTCYL
Sort list by starting Cylinder number
SORTDSN
Sort list by Dataset Name
15-149
GA
Locating an Extent
Finding Extents
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Volume Map Extent
List. SAE also supports a Locate “L” command.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Volume Selection List use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down
the Volume Selection List use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Volume Selection List.
Sorting By
Cylinder
To find a specific cylinder (when the extent list was sorted by cylinder):
Step
Sorting By
Dataset Name
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a cylinder number
following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified cylinder.
To find a specific Dataset (when the extent list is sorted by Dataset Name):
Step
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a full or partial Dataset
Name following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified Dataset.
15-150
Printing the Volume Map List
How to Print
To print the Volume Map Extent Selection List contents, enter the PRINT
command on the Command Line.
Defining a
Printer
If you have not defined the printer address, a prompt appears, allowing you to
define a printer address.
15-151
GA
Invoking DASD Extent Services
Invoking
Commands
To invoke DASD Extent Services, an extent is selected using a specific line
selection character that represents the service.
Selection Character
Processing an
Extent
Description
E
Extent Edit (Zap)
S
Extent Edit (Zap)
B
Extent Browse (Ver)
To process an extent, and.
Step
Action
1.
Move your cursor in front of the extent you want to select.
2.
Type the selection character.
15-152
DASD Extent Services
Definition
DASD Extent Services allow you to select and alter any DASD record, even
if the record is contained within an unsupported dataset structure (for
example, VTOC or VSAM).
Two Screens
Two screens comprise the DASD Extent Services function: the
Cylinder/Head Address screen and the Alter DASD Extent screen.
Cylinder/Head
Address Screen
You can use the first screen to optionally alter the extent record’s starting
cylinder/head address.
After you select an extent from the Volume Map Screen, the starting
cylinder/head address displays on this screen. If the record you want to view
or alter is at another cylinder/head location, you can type over the displayed
address and press Enter.
Note
To use this feature, the current userid must have access authority number 4.
Navigation
Select an Extent using ‘S’, ‘E’ or ‘B’ on the Volume Map Screen.
Cylinder/Head
Address Screen
ALTER THE STARTING CYL/HEAD ADDRESS IF DESIRED
CCCCHHHH
00010000
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE, PF3 TO END
Alter DASD
Extent Screen
You can use the second screen to view or alter the records in the extent.
The data displayed is both the key (if present) and data portion of the DASD
record. The record’s address displays in the heading (cylinder/head/record),
along with the key and data lengths. You can display the next record in the
extent by using PF9 or PF21.
15-153
GA
View/Alter Screen for DASD Extent Record
Navigation
View/Alter
Screen
Scrolling
Information
Select a Extent using ‘S’, ‘E’ or ‘B’ on Volume Map Screen
ZAP ---- CYL=0001,HEAD=0000,REC=01,KEYL=2C,DATAL=0060 -----------------COMMAND ==> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
000000 04040404 04040404 04040404 04040404 *................*
000010 04040404 04040404 04040404 04040404 *................*
000020 04040404 04040404 04040404 F4000000 *............4...*
000050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 *................*
000060 00000000 00000000 00010000 00000100 *................*
000070 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 *................*
000080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 *................*
SAE supports multiple ways of scrolling up or down the record display, and
all scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Volume Selection List use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down
the Volume Selection List use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Volume Selection List.
Moving to the
Next Record
You may move to the next record in the extent by using PF 9 or 21. Note that
using PF 9 or 21 (Next Record) also saves the current record if changes have
been made.
Altering Record
Contents (Alter
Only)
To modify the existing contents of the hexadecimal data, you can type new
hexadecimal data over the data that is currently displaying. You can also use
the Replace command.
Continued on next page
15-154
View/Alter Screen for DASD Extent Record, Continued
Descriptions
The following table lists the commands and their descriptions:
Command
Verify
(VER offset data)
Description
Use the VER command to position the displayed text at a
specific offset.
You can enter the VER command on the Command Line. The
first operand is a one- to six-digit hexadecimal offset at which
the screen is to be positioned. You can enter hexadecimal or
character data (to be verified at the given offset) as an optional
second operand. For hexadecimal data, enter two to sixteen
hexadecimal characters (without quotes) that represent one to
eight bytes of data. For character data, you can specify one to
sixteen characters (in quotes). The specified data is compared
to the existing data at the given offset. SAE issues a message if
the entered data does not match the existing data.
Examples of the VER command are:
VER 12A
VER 12A C1C2C3C4C5
VER 12A 'ABCDE'
Replace
(REP offset data)
Replaces the contents at the supplied offset with the supplied
data. Enter character data in quotes, and hexadecimal data
without quotes.
Examples of the REP command are:
REP 12A C1C2C3C4C5
REP 12A 'ABCDE'
Find
(F text/”text”)
Finds the specified data within the currently selected DASD
extent. Enter character data in quotes, and hexadecimal data
without quotes.
Cancel
(CAN)
Does not save the dataset and returns you to the previous
screen.
Saving the
Zapped Extent
Record
SAE saves the extent record only if the record has been modified and a save
is requested.
Exiting Without
Saving
Use PFkeys 2/14 or the Cancel command (CAN) to exit the Zap screen
without saving the record. SAE returns to the previous screen without writing
the record to disk.
Use PFkeys 3, 15, 4, or 16 to request that the record be saved.
Use PF 9 or 21 (Next Record) to save the current record if changes have been
made.
15-155
GA
Chapter 16: Dataset Services
Overview
Introduction
Dataset Services is an integral component of Action Services. Dataset
Services provide functions that are directed against datasets on DASD
Volumes. Dataset Services are launched through the selection of a DASD
Volume in Volume Services. Dataset Services is also the launching point for
Member Services, Edit/Browse Services, ZAP Services, and Catalog
Services.
In this Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Dataset Services
GA
Page
Dataset Selection
16-158
Locating a Dataset
16-159
Dataset List Print
16-160
Invoking Services
16-161
Dataset RACF and Password Indicators
16-163
Dataset Rename - R
16-164
Dataset Information - I
16-165
Dataset Allocation - ALLOC
16-167
Valid Dataset Allocation Specifications
16-169
Copying Between Datasets
16-172
Copying Selected Members
16-177
Dataset Copy Restrictions
16-179
Source and Target Datasets
16-180
16-157
Dataset Selection
Definition
The Dataset Selection Screen contains a list of Datasets that reside on a
DASD Volume.
Navigation
Select Volume using ‘S’ on Volume Selection Screen.
Dataset Selection
Screen
Descriptions
DATA SETS ON VOLUME SYSRES (0242) -------------------------- ROW 564 OF 623
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
ORG RF LRECL BLKSZ #EX LAST REF
SYSTEM.CATALOG.ICF.MASTER.SYSA
ICF CATALOG
SYS1.LINKLIB
PO U
0 19069
2 90/01/23
SYS1.LOGREC
PO U
0 1944
1 90/01/23
SYS1.LPALIB
PO U
0 13030
1 90/01/23
SYS1.MACLIB
PO FB
80 3120
1 90/01/26
SYS1.NEW.SMP.CSI
VS U
0 4096
1
SYS1.NUCLEUS
PO U
0 19069
3 90/01/23
SYS1.PARMLIB
PO FB
80 3120
6 90/02/03
SYS1.PPMACDEF
PO FB
80 3120
1 90/01/06
SYS1.PPOPTION
PO FB
80 3120
1 90/02/25
SYS1.PROCLIB
PO FB
80 3120 10 90/03/04
SYS1.RMFCLS
PO VB
255 3120
1 89/11/04
SYS1.RMFCLSFB
PO FB
80 3120
1 90/01/16
SYS1.RMFMAC01
PO FB
80 3120
1 90/02/15
SYS1.RMFMOD01
PO U
0 6144
1 89/10/28
SYS1.RMFMSG
PO FB
80 3120
1 90/01/09
SYS1.RMFPNL
PO FB
80 3120
1 90/02/21
SYS1.SAMPLIB
PO FB
80 3120
1 89/12/06
SYS1.SBLSCL1V
PO VB
255 3120
1 90/02/10
SYS1.SBLSCLI0
PO FB
80 3120
1 89/11/28
The information shown for each dataset on the Dataset Selection list is as
follows:
Column
Description
DATA SET NAME
Dataset name
ORG
Dataset Organization
RF
Record Format
LRECL
Logical Record Length
BLKSZ
Block Size
#EX
Number of Extents
LAST REF
Last Referenced Date
16-158
Locating a Dataset
Finding Datasets
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Dataset Selection
List. SAE also supports a Locate “L” command.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Volume Selection List use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down
the Volume Selection List use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Volume Selection List.
Locating a
Dataset
To find a specific dataset:
Step
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a full or partial dataset
name following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified dataset.
16-159
GA
Dataset List Print
How to Print
To print the Dataset Selection List contents, enter the PRINT command on
the Command Line.
Defining a
Printer
If you have not defined the printer address, a prompt appears, allowing you to
define a printer address.
16-160
Invoking Services
How to Invoke
Services
To invoke specific Services, you can use a Line Selection character to issue a
command or select a dataset.
Command Line
To invoke specific Services via the command line:
Command
Description
ALLOC
New Dataset Allocation (see page 16-169).
COPY
Invoke Dataset Copy Services (see page 16-172) to copy
between two datasets on the same volume.
SHOWRACF
Display RACF & Password settings (see page 16-163)
NORACF
Turn OFF RACF (see page 16-163)
RACF
Turn ON RACF (see page 16-163)
NOPASSWORD
Turn OFF Password required (see page 16-163)
PASSWORDW
Turn ON Write Password (see page 16-163)
PASSWORDRW
Turn ON Read Write Password (see page 16-163)
Line Selection
To invoke specific Services, a dataset is selected using a specific line
selection character that represents the service.
Processing
Datasets
Datasets with a record format of Undefined (RECFM=U) that are selected
using ‘S’, ‘E’ or ‘B’ on the Dataset Selection Screen are processed with
Zap/Verify instead of Edit/Browse.
Datasets selected using ‘Z’ on the Dataset Selection Screen are processed
with Zap/Verify independent of the record format of the dataset.
Continued on next page
16-161
GA
Invoking Services, Continued
Selection
Characters
The selection characters for Services are:
Command
Description
For Partitioned Datasets
R
Dataset Rename (see page 16-164).
I
Dataset Information (see page 16-165).
S
Dataset Member Services Edit (see page 17-181).
E
Dataset Member Services Edit (see page 17-181).
B
Dataset Member Services Browse (see page 17-181).
Z
Dataset Member Services Zap (see page 17-181).
For Sequential Datasets
R
Dataset Rename (see page 16-164).
I
Dataset Information (see page 16-165).
S
Dataset Edit (see page 18-193).
E
Dataset Edit (see page 18-193).
B
Dataset Browse (see page 18-193).
Z
Dataset Zap (see page 19-201).
For ICF Catalogs
I
Dataset Information (see page 16-165).
S
Altercat Services (see page 20-207).
E
Altercat Services (see page 20-207).
B
Listcat Services (see page 20-207).
For Other Dataset Types
I
Dataset Information (see page 16-165).
Processing a
Dataset with a
Service
To process a dataset with a service, move the cursor in front of the dataset to
be selected and type the selection character.
Datasets that do
Not Start With
SYS
To access datasets with names that do not start with 'SYS', the current userid
must have access authority number 1.
16-162
Dataset RACF and Password Indicators
Procedure
To use the RACF and Password Indicator commands:
Step
Action
1.
Enter the command on the command line.
2.
Select the dataset for which to apply the command by using the NEW
LINE key to move the cursor in front of the dataset name
3.
Type “S”.
RACF/Password
Must Be Enabled
To use this command set, you must enable the RACF/Password feature
(DLIB@OPT utility). Furthermore, the current userid must have access
authority number 8.
Descriptions
The following table contains descriptions of the commands:
Command
Description
SHOWRACF
Displays the current RACF and PASSWORD settings for the
selected dataset. A message returns indicating the settings (for
example, RACF NOPASSWORD indicates that the RACF
indicator is on and no PASSWORD is required).
NORACF
Turns OFF the RACF indicator for the selected dataset. RACF
uses the RACF indicator to indicate that a discrete dataset
profile exists.
RACF
Turns ON the RACF indicator for the selected dataset.
NOPASSWORD
Turns OFF the password required indicator for the selected
dataset.
PASSWORDW
Turns ON the password required (WRITE only) indicator for
the selected dataset
PASSWORDRW
Turns ON the password required (READ and WRITE)
indicator for the selected dataset
16-163
GA
Dataset Rename - R
Procedure
To rename a dataset:
Step
Rename
Function
Description
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the dataset name.
2.
Type “R”.
3.
Type the new name over the displayed name.
The Rename function is a VTOC dataset rename only, it does not alter any
catalog entries.
When used alone, it is useful in swapping two datasets that exist on the same
volume (for example. SYS1.NUCLEUS and SYS1.OLD.NUCLEUS).
When used along with the Altercat function, you can rename a dataset and
alter an existing catalog entry to point to the volume now containing the
renamed dataset. You can only rename one dataset at a time.
Indexed VTOC
Record Split
Under certain conditions, when renaming a dataset, an Indexed VTOC record
split may be required. In these infrequent cases, SAE renames the dataset in
the OS VTOC and disables the index portion of the Indexed VTOC.
z/OS recognizes the new dataset name and acknowledges the index disable by
issuing message 'IEC606I VTOC INDEX DISABLED ON ddd,ser,cde'. The
next allocate access to the volume by DASDM results in the conversion to an
OS VTOC and message 'IEC604I VTOC CONVERT ROUTINE ENTERED
ON ddd,ser,cde' being issued. The Indexed VTOC can be rebuilt using normal
ICKDSF procedures.
16-164
Dataset Information - I
Definition
The Dataset Information function provides information on an existing dataset.
Dataset Information displays in a format similar to that provided by ISPF 3.2.
Procedure
You can access information on existing Datasets from the Dataset Selection
Screen by:
Step
Navigation
Dataset
Information
Screen
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the Dataset Name.
2.
Type “I”.
Select Dataset using ‘I’ on Dataset Selection Screen
---------------- DATA SET INFORMATION --------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
EXT STARTING ENDING
VOLUME SERIAL ==> SYSRES
# CCCCHHHH CCCCHHHH
DEVICE TYPE
==> 3380
UNIT ==> 0345
1 06170000 0617000E
2 062D0000 062D000E
DSN: SYS1.PARMLIB
3 062E0000 062E000E
4 062F0000 062F000E
SPACE UNIT
==> CYL
5 06300000 0630000E
PRIMARY QTY
==> 1
6 06310000 0631000E
SECONDARY QTY ==> 1
7 06320000 0632000E
DIRECTORY BLKS ==> 90
8 06330000 0633000E
RECORD FORMAT ==> FB
9 06340000 0634000E
RECORD LENGTH ==> 80
10 06350000 0635000E
BLOCK SIZE
==> 3120
11 06360000 0636000E
12 06370000 0637000E
ORGANIZATION
==> PO
13 06380000 0638000E
ALLOCATED TRKS ==> 195
Dataset
Information
The Dataset Information Screen provides the following information:
Preserving Initial
Values
After you view an existing dataset's information, SAE holds the information
and uses it as the initial values for the Dataset Allocation function. This
allows you to use one dataset’s attributes to allocate another dataset (See
Dataset Allocation on page 16-167 for more information).
The space units
Primary and secondary space specifications
Number of directory blocks (zero for non-PDS datasets)
Record format
Logical record size
Block size
Organization
Total allocated tracks
Each Extent’s DASD address
Continued on next page
16-165
GA
Dataset Information - I, Continued
Dataset
Information
EMPTY
Command
The EMPTY command empties a partitioned dataset and rebuilds the
directory blocks for an existing dataset. Once issued, all members of the
dataset are deleted, and the dataset is emptied.
When to Use The
EMPTY
Command
Use this command in situations where you might normally delete and reallocate prior to copying members from another dataset.
16-166
Dataset Allocation - ALLOC
Definition
The Dataset Allocation function provides services to allocate partitioned and
sequential datasets. The allocation information is specified in a manner
similar to ISPF 3.2.
Invoking Dataset
Allocation
You can invoke the Dataset Allocation function from:
The Volume Selection Screen, or
The Dataset Selection Screen.
The volume on which the dataset is to be allocated is determined by which
volume is selected on the Volume Selection Screen, or by using the current
volume in the case of the Dataset Services
Volume Selection
Screen
-- ALL VOLUMES ON ALL UNITS ------------------------------- ROW 111 OF 120
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VOLSER RENAME UNIT DEVT CYLS SUBC CHPID
A SYSRES
0345 3380 2655 0012 03 04
Invoking from
the Volume
Selection Screen
To enter the allocation function from the Volume Selection Screen, place an
“A” next to the volume name, as shown above.
Dataset Selection
Screen
DATA SETS ON VOLUME SYSRES (0345) ---------------------------- ROW 564 OF 623
COMMAND ===> ALLOC
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
ORG RF LRECL BLKSZ #EX LAST REF
SYS1.PARMLIB
PO FB
80 3120 13 90/02/03
Invoking from
the Dataset
Selection Screen
To enter the allocation function from the Dataset Selection Screen, enter
“ALLOC” on the Command Line, as shown above.
Continued on next page
16-167
GA
Dataset Allocation - ALLOC, Continued
Dataset
Information
The Dataset Allocation Screen allows you to enter the name of the dataset to
be allocated, along with the dataset’s space and allocation attributes.
Navigation
Select volume using “A” on Volume Selection Screen, or
Enter “ALLOC” command on Dataset Selection Screen.
Dataset
Allocation Screen
-------------- DATA SET ALLOCATE ---------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
VOLUME SERIAL
DEVICE TYPE
==> SYSRES
==> 3380
UNIT ==> 0345
DSN: _
SPACE UNIT
PRIMARY QTY
SECONDARY QTY
DIRECTORY BLKS
RECORD FORMAT
RECORD LENGTH
BLOCK SIZE
Editing Dataset
Information
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
CYLS (CYLS, TRKS, BLKS, BKRD)
1
CONTIG ==> NO
1
90
FB
80
3120
You must enter the dataset name in the DSN field. If you used the Dataset
Information function (see page 16-165) to view a dataset's information, that
information displays in the space and allocation attribute fields. You can edit
this information. Valid specifications are described under 'Valid Dataset
Allocation Specifications'.
After editing the desired fields, carefully review the specifications, and if they
are correct, press Enter to allocate the dataset. Once the dataset is allocated,
SAE invokes the Dataset Information Screen to display the new dataset.
16-168
Valid Dataset Allocation Specifications
Descriptions
The Dataset Allocation specifications are as follows:
Command
SPACE UNIT
Description
CYLS
Specify the number of cylinders
TRKS
Specify the number of tracks
BLKS
Specify the number of blocks, calculates number of
TRKS
BKRD
Specify blocks round, calculates number of CYLS
PRIMARY QTY
Specify the number of space units to use for the primary
extent.
CONTIG
Specify if the primary quantity of space must be contiguous or
may be obtained over several extents.
If you specify 'NO', up to five extents may be used to
obtain the primary space unit quantity.
If you specify 'YES', only one extent is used while trying
to obtain the primary space unit quantity.
In either case, the dataset is allocated even if the full primary
space could not be obtained. The CONTIG parameter has no
effect other than described above and does not apply to
secondary extents. When allocating datasets that must be in a
single extent (for example, SYS1.NUCLEUS), 'YES' should
be coded along with a secondary space quantity of zero.
SECONDARY
QTY
Specify the number of space units used for each secondary
extent
DIRECTORY
BLKS
Specify the number of directory blocks to create and
determine the dataset organization.
Specify zero directory blocks to allocate a sequential dataset.
Specify a non-zero number of directory blocks to allocate a
partitioned dataset. The number of directory blocks may be
reduced if the first extent is of insufficient size to
accommodate the amount specified
Continued on next page
16-169
GA
Valid Dataset Allocation Specifications, Continued
Descriptions (continued)
Command
RECORD
FORMAT
Description
F
Fixed
FA
Fixed ANSI
FM
Fixed Machine
FB
Fixed Block
FBA
Fixed Block ANSI
FBM
Fixed Block Machine
V
Variable
VA
Variable ANSI
VM
Variable Machine
VS
Variable Spanned
VB
Variable Block
VBA
Variable Block ANSI
VBM
Variable Block Machine
VBS
Variable Block Spanned
U
Undefined
Note
Although you can allocate a Variable Spanned
and Variable Block Spanned dataset, SAE does
not support these types of datasets for edit, copy
or restore.
Continued on next page
16-170
Valid Dataset Allocation Specifications, Continued
Descriptions (continued)
Command
Description
RECORD
LENGTH
Specify the logical record length in bytes. For variable record
format datasets, this value specifies the maximum record
length.
BLOCK SIZE
Specify the block size in bytes.
For fixed record format datasets, the record length must divide
evenly into the block size. For variable record format datasets,
the value specifies the maximum block size and must be at
least four bytes larger than the record length.
Note
SAE can allocate new datasets but cannot catalog
them. If you are allocating a new dataset on a
volume that is SMS-managed, the following screen
displays. To continue with the allocation, reply ‘Y’.
NEW DATASET ALLOCATION WARNING
THIS OPERATION MAY CREATE AN UNCATALOGED DATASET ON A
SMS MANAGED VOLUME.
DATASET: SYS1.SMSTEST
VOLUME : SMS001
CONTINUE WITH ALLOCATION ==>
(Y/N)
16-171
GA
Copying Between Datasets
Source and
Target Datasets
For Dataset Copy, the source ('from' dataset) and target ('to' dataset) datasets
may be on the same or different volumes.
SAME vs.
DIFFERENT
Volumes
To differentiate between “same” and “different” volumes, this topic specifies
“SAME VOLUME” or “DIFFERENT VOLUME” in the paragraph title.
Location
Determines How
Command is
Invoked
The location of the source and target datasets determines how SAE invokes
the Dataset Copy function.
If both datasets reside on the same volume, then you must invoke the Dataset
Copy function from the Dataset Selection Screen, active for that volume.
If the datasets reside on different volumes, then you must invoke the Dataset
Copy function from the Volume Selection Screen. In this case, the volume list
active on the Volume Selection Screen must contain both volumes.
Definition
The Dataset Copy function provides services to copy from one dataset to
another. Datasets being copied must be of the same organization (partitioned
or sequential) and the same record format (fixed, variable, or undefined).
Copying
Partitioned
Datasets
For partitioned datasets, all or selected members may be copied. SAE
supports fixed, variable, or undefined record formats. Partitioned dataset
members are always added to the end of the target dataset, acquiring
additional extents as necessary
Copying
Sequential
Datasets
For sequential datasets, SAE supports fixed or variable record formats.
Invoking the
Dataset Copy
Function
To identify the source and target datasets, the Dataset Copy function presents
selection lists.
To invoke the Dataset Copy function, enter the COPY command on the
command line of either the Volume Selection Screen or the Dataset Selection
Screen.
Continued on next page
16-172
Copying Between Datasets, Continued
DIFFERENT
VOLUMES:
Volume Selection
Screen
DIFFERENT
VOLUMES:
Invoking Copy
for Datasets on
Different
Volumes
--- ALL VOLUMES ON ALL UNITS ------------------------------ ROW 111 OF 120
COMMAND ===> COPY_
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VOLSER RENAME UNIT DEVT CYLS SUBC CHPID
SYSRES
0345 3380 2655 0012 05 06 1B 1D
IPL=OS/390
OLDRES
0346 3380 2655 0012 05 06 1B 1D
IPL=OS/390
If a copy involves two datasets that reside on different volumes, enter the
COPY command on the Volume Selection Screen. Both volumes on which
the two datasets reside must be in the current volume list. Once the COPY
command is entered, the process of identifying both the source and target
datasets begins. The steps involved are:
Step
Action
1.
An instruction screen displays indicating that you must identify the
volume containing the source dataset. Press Enter. The Volume
Selection Screen displays. Locate and select the volume on which the
source dataset resides.
2.
An instruction screen displays, indicating that you have to identify the
source dataset. Press Enter. The Dataset Selection Screen displays for the
selected source volume. Locate and select the source dataset.
3.
An instruction screen displays indicating that you have to identify the
volume containing the target dataset. Press Enter. The Volume Selection
Screen displays. Locate and select the volume on which the target
dataset resides.
4.
An instruction screen displays, indicating that you have to identify the
target dataset. Press Enter. The Dataset Selection Screen displays for the
selected target volume. Locate and select the target dataset.
5.
After identifying both the source and target datasets, the Dataset Copy
Screen displays.
Continued on next page
16-173
GA
Copying Between Datasets, Continued
SAME
VOLUME:
Invoking Copy
for Datasets on
the Same Volume
DATA SETS ON VOLUME SYSRES (0345) ---------------------------- ROW 564 OF 623
COMMAND ===> COPY
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
ORG RF LRECL BLKSZ #EX LAST REF
SYS1.LINKLIB
PO U
0 32760
8 92/01/03
SYS1.LINKLIB.OLD
PO U
0 32760
6 90/06/03
SAME
VOLUME:
To copy between two datasets residing on the same volume, enter the COPY
command on the Dataset Selection Screen. Both datasets must be in the
Copying Between current dataset list. After entering the COPY command, you must identify
Two Datasets on
both the source and target datasets. The steps involved are as follows:
the Same Volume
Step
Action
1.
An instruction screen displays, indicating that you have to identify the
source dataset. Press Enter. The Dataset Selection Screen displays.
Locate and select the source dataset.
2.
An instruction screen displays, indicating that you have to identify the
target dataset. Press Enter. The Dataset Selection Screen displays. Locate
and select the target dataset.
3.
After identifying both the source and target datasets, the Dataset Copy
Screen displays.
Continued on next page
16-174
Copying Between Datasets, Continued
Reserved
Volumes
The Dataset Copy function reserves both the source and target volumes.
Navigation
Enter COPY command on Volume Selection Screen, or
Enter COPY command on Dataset Selection Screen.
Dataset Copy
Screen
DATASET COPY --------------------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
COPY FROM:
SYS1.PARMLIB
SYSRES
0600
DSORG RECFM
PO
FB
LRECL BLKSZ
80 3120
SYS1.PARMLIB.OLD
SYSRES
0600
DSORG RECFM
PO
FB
LRECL BLKSZ
80 3120
COPY TO:
IF PARTITIONED, COPY ALL MEMBERS
==> NO (YES OR NO)
REPLACE LIKE-NAMED MEMBERS ==> YES (YES OR NO)
Dataset Copy
Screen
Information
The Dataset Copy Screen provides control and confirmation of the Dataset
Copy function. For Sequential Datasets, press Enter to begin the copy
process.
Copying to a
Partitioned
Dataset
When you copy to a partitioned dataset, each new member (even if replaced)
is written to the end of the dataset and the directory is updated.
Avoiding Out-ofSpace Conditions
If you are replacing all the members in the target dataset and you want to
avoid out-of-space conditions, you should consider first using the Dataset
Information function's EMPTY command on the target dataset. The EMPTY
command allows the copy to take place as if the target dataset was newly
allocated. See page 16-165 for more information.
Copied Members
Replace LikeNamed Members
Members copied from the source dataset will, by default, replace any like
named members in the target dataset.
If you do not want this to occur, change the 'REPLACE LIKE-NAMED
MEMBERS' prompt to 'NO'. All or selected member of the partitioned
datasets can be copied.
Continued on next page
16-175
GA
Copying Between Datasets, Continued
Copying Selected
Members
To copy selected members, set the 'COPY ALL MEMBERS' prompt to 'NO'
and press Enter. The Member Copy Selection Screen displays, listing the
members in the source dataset.
Copying All the
Members
To copy all of the members from the source dataset to the target dataset,
change the 'COPY ALL MEMBERS' prompt to 'YES' and press Enter.
The Dataset Copy Screen displays the name of each member as the member is
copied. After the operation is complete, the Member Copy Selection Screen
displays, showing the results for each member.
16-176
Copying Selected Members
Specifying “No”
When you specify 'NO' for the 'COPY ALL MEMBERS' prompt of the
Dataset Copy Screen, the Member Copy Selection Screen displays.
This screen provides for the selection of members that are to be copied from
the source dataset to the target dataset. The members listed on the screen are
those in the source dataset.
Copying a
Member
To copy a Member:
Step
1.
Action
Place an “S” in front of the member name.
You can select multiple members at once.
2.
Dataset Copy
Screen
Press Enter.
COPY --- SYS1.PARMLIB USING SAE--------------------------- SELECT COPY MEMBERS
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
NAME
RENAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
ADYSET00
01.04 84/03/10 90/10/23 08:43
10
10
5 USER2
ADYSET01
ADYSET02
COMMNDAB *COPIED
01.01 89/04/25 90/04/12 16:23
28
26
28 USER4
COMMNDC1 *COPIED
01.00 89/12/04 90/08/02 08:26
23
23
0 USER8
COMMNDHY *REPL
01.05 86/12/14 87/10/30 09:00
28
18
28 USER2
COMMND00
01.17 87/05/25 91/01/01 12:17
28
19
12 USER2
COMMND01
01.17 89/08/20 90/11/12 21:27
22
28
22 USER4
COMMND41
01.00 88/07/02 90/03/27 19:32
28
28
0 USER2
ERBRMFBU
01.00 89/03/30 89/12/31 17:10
36
36
0 USER1
ERBRMFFE
01.01 90/11/26 90/12/03 16:19
6
6
2 USER8
ERBRMFR1
01.04 89/05/25 90/07/06 09:46
41
42
5 USER4
ERBRMFR2
01.03 88/06/16 89/02/09 09:53
15
15
3 USER2
ERBRMFR3
01.00 89/12/22 89/12/24 16:43
40
40
0 USER4
ERBRMF00
01.04 89/09/17 90/01/17 22:45
34
36
2 USER4
ERBRMF01
ERBRMF02
ERBRMF03
ERBRMF04
ERBRMF05
GIMOPCDE
Continued on next page
16-177
GA
Copying Selected Members, Continued
Copy Status
The status of each member copy request displays to the right of each member
name. Possible status values are as follows:
Command
Description
*COPIED
The member was copied successfully.
*REPL
The member was copied successfully and replaced a likenamed member that already existed in the target dataset.
*NO-REPL
The member was not copied. A like-named member existed in
the target dataset and no replacement was specified.
*ALIAS
The member was not copied. The member is an alias and the
main member was not selected.
To copy this member, select the main member for ‘copy’ and
its alias members will be automatically be copied.
RD ERROR
The member was not copied. An error occurred while trying
to read the member from the source dataset.
DIR FULL
The member was not copied and other copy requests were not
processed. The directory of the target dataset is full.
WRTERROR
The member was not copied and other copy requests were not
processed. An error occurred while writing the member in the
target dataset. The message area will further describe the
error.
*NO COPY
The member was selected for copy but was not copied. An
error occurred while trying to copy another member; as a
result, this copy request was not processed.
16-178
Dataset Copy Restrictions
Dataset Copy
Restrictions
The Dataset Copy operation has the following restrictions:
Advance
Processing for
Alias Members
Both the source and target datasets for the copy operations must be of the same
organization and record format. The record format restriction applies to the base
record format (fixed, variable or undefined) and not variations of the same base
record format. For example, datasets of F, FB, FBA or FBM could be copied to
one another.
Datasets with keys, record format variable spanned, or record format variable
block spanned, are not supported.
The Dataset Copy function provides some advanced processing for alias
members.
Whenever a member (non-alias) is selected for copy (explicit selection or
copy all), SAE makes a search for any alias entries. The alias entries are
automatically copied.
Cannot Copy
Alias Member by
Itself
You cannot select an alias member for copy by itself. It can only be copied as
an automatic function of copying the main member.
Additional
Restrictions
Depending on the record format, additional restrictions apply.
Where
Restrictions Are
Enforced
For fixed and variable record format datasets, both the source and target datasets
must have the same logical record length. Block sizes may differ.
For undefined record format datasets, the maximum block size of the source
dataset cannot exceed the maximum block size of the target dataset.
These restrictions are enforced at time of Dataset Copy, and are not
considered during selection.
16-179
GA
Source and Target Datasets
Overlay Load
Modules
Unlike ISPF copy, the SAE Dataset Copy function supports overlay load
modules and they may be copied.
Dataset
Compression
The Dataset Copy function does not support in place compression of
partitioned datasets (for example, for Copy, the source and target dataset
cannot be the same). If you must compress a dataset, you can use one of
several techniques to achieve the same result.
Step
Action
1.
Use the Dataset Information function to view the dataset that is to be
compressed (old dataset).
2.
Use the Dataset Allocate function to allocate a new dataset with the
same attributes and size as the old dataset, if possible, on the same
volume.
3.
Use the Dataset Copy function to copy from the old dataset to the new
dataset. After the copy, the new dataset is a compressed version of the
old dataset.
Then to finish the task, follow one of these:
4.
If both old and new datasets are on the same volume, rename the old
dataset and then rename the new dataset to the old dataset's original
name. After z/OS operation is restored, delete the old dataset.
5.
If the old and new datasets are on different volumes, rename the old
dataset, and then rename the new dataset to the old dataset's original
name. Then update the catalog entry for the original dataset to show the
location of the renamed new dataset. After z/OS operation is restored,
delete the old dataset.
6.
Use the Dataset Information function's EMPTY command to empty the
old dataset (effectively delete all and compress), and then copy from the
new dataset back to the old dataset. Delete the new dataset after z/OS
operation is restored. This method has the disadvantage that the original
dataset is altered prior to the restoration of the z/OS system.
16-180
Chapter 17: Member Services
Overview
Introduction
Member Services is an integral component of Action Services. Member
Services provide functions that are directed against members of partitioned
datasets on DASD Volumes.
You can launch Member Services by selecting a Partitioned Dataset in
Dataset Services. Member Services is also the launching point for
Edit/Browse Services.
In this Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Member Services
GA
Page
Member Selection – Edit/Browse
17-182
Member Selection – Zap/Verify
17-183
Locating a Member
17-184
Print Member List
17-185
Invoking Services
17-186
Empty Datasets and New Member (Edit Only)
17-187
Member Create (Edit Only)
17-188
Member Rename (Edit or Zap Only)
17-189
Member Delete (Edit or Zap Only)
17-190
CSECT Selection – ZAP/Verify
17-191
Selecting a CSECT
17-192
17-181
Member Selection – Edit/Browse
Overview
The Member Selection Screen contains a list of members within a partitioned
dataset. If the partitioned dataset that was selected from the Dataset Selection
Screen has a Record Format of Fixed or Variable (RECFM=FB/VB) then the
Edit/Browse form of the Member Selection Screen is used.
Edit/Browse
Member
Selection List
From the Edit/Browse Member Selection List, you can rename, delete, or
select members for Edit/Browse. You can also create new members.
Navigation
Select partitioned dataset using ‘S’ on Dataset Selection Screen.
Member
Selection Screen
Screen Contents
EDIT --- SYS1.PARMLIB USING SAE------------------------- ROW
1 OF 234
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
NAME
RENAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
ADYSET00
01.04 84/03/10 90/10/23 08:43
10
10
5 USER2
ADYSET01
ADYSET02
COMMNDAB
01.01 89/04/25 90/04/12 16:23
28
26
28 USER4
COMMNDC1
01.00 89/12/04 90/08/02 08:26
23
23
0 USER8
COMMNDHY
01.05 86/12/14 87/10/30 09:00
28
18
28 USER2
COMMND00
01.17 87/05/25 91/01/01 12:17
28
19
12 USER2
COMMND01
01.17 89/08/20 90/11/12 21:27
22
28
22 USER4
COMMND41
01.00 88/07/02 90/03/27 19:32
28
28
0 USER2
ERBRMFBU
01.00 89/03/30 89/12/31 17:10
36
36
0 USER1
ERBRMFFE
01.01 90/11/26 90/12/03 16:19
6
6
2 USER8
ERBRMFR1
01.04 89/05/25 90/07/06 09:46
41
42
5 USER4
ERBRMFR2
01.03 88/06/16 89/02/09 09:53
15
15
3 USER2
ERBRMFR3
01.00 89/12/22 89/12/24 16:43
40
40
0 USER4
ERBRMF00
01.04 89/09/17 90/01/17 22:45
34
36
2 USER4
ERBRMF01
ERBRMF02
ERBRMF03
ERBRMF04
ERBRMF05
GIMOPCDE
The Member Selection Screen displays each member name and any
associated SPF information that may exist.
17-182
Member Selection – Zap/Verify
Overview
If the partitioned dataset that was selected from the Dataset Selection Screen
has a Record Format of Undefined (RECFM=U), then the Zap/Verify form of
the Member Selection Screen is used. The Member Selection Screen contains
a list of members within a partitioned dataset.
Zap/Verify
Member List
Functionality
From the Zap/Verify Member List, you can rename, delete, or select members
for Zap/Verify. You cannot create new members for undefined record format
datasets.
Navigation
Select partitioned dataset using ‘S’ on Dataset Selection Screen
Member
Selection Screen
Member
Selection Screen
Description
ZAP ---- SYS1.LPALIB USING SAE ----------------------------- ROW 341 OF 2489
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
NAME
RENAME
SIZE
ENTRY TTR
ALIAS-OF
IEFBB410
05F460 034590 005646 IEFW21SD
IEFBR14
000008 000000 004E10
IEFDB4D0
002410 000000 004E18
IEFDB401
000020 000000 004E21
IEFDB475
004F00 000240 004E29
IEFDB476
004F00 000968 004E29 IEFDB475
IEFEB4UV
001218 000000 004F04
IEFENFNM
000F38 000000 004F0D
IEFGB4DC
05F460 006880 005646 IEFW21SD
IEFGB4UV
001218 000FC8 004F04 IEFEB4UV
IEFGB400
000130 000070 004F15
IEFIB650
008A10 000FB0 005215 IEFSD060
IEFIIC
008A10 000000 005215 IEFSD060
IEFIRECM
000750 000000 004F1D
IEFJDSNA
0000D8 000000 005005
IEFJDT01
000040 000000 00500D
IEFJDT02
002A38 000000 005015
IEFJDT03
001670 000000 00501D
IEFJDT04
0011B0 000000 005025
IEFJJTRM
0000A0 000000 00502D
IEFJRASP
000928 000000 005108
The Member Selection Screen displays the size, entry point, and any alias for
each load module.
The TTR value displays for all members. You can use the TTR value to
validate the alias name that is taken from the directory.
17-183
GA
Locating a Member
Finding
Members
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Member Selection
List. SAE also supports a Locate “L” command.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Member Selection List use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down
the Member Selection List use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Member Selection List.
Locating
Member
To find a member:
Step
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a full or partial
member name following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified member.
17-184
Print Member List
How to Print
To print the Member Selection List contents, enter the PRINT command on
the Command Line.
Defining a
Printer
If you have not defined the printer address, a prompt appears, allowing you to
define a printer address.
17-185
GA
Invoking Services
How to Invoke
Services
To invoke specific Services, a command is issued or a member is selected
using a Line Selection character.
Command Line
To invoke specific Services via the command line:
Command
Line Selection
Description
S xxxxxxxx
Create new member or select an existing one (xxxxxxxx)
(Edit only) (see pages 17-188, 18-193, and 19-201)
RENAME old new
Rename member (old name to new name)
DELETE xxxxxxxx
Delete member (xxxxxxxx)
To invoke specific Services, a member is selected using a specific line
selection character that represents the service.
The selection characters for Services are:
Command
Processing a
Dataset
Description
R
Member Rename (see page 17-189)
S
Member Select (Edit/Browse/Zap/Verify)
To process a dataset with a service, move the cursor in front of the dataset
you want to select and type the selection character.
17-186
Empty Datasets and New Member (Edit Only)
Creating a
Temporary
Member
If the partitioned dataset you select for edit contains no members, SAE
bypasses the Member Selection Screen and invokes edit with the member
name 'TEMPNAME'.
If you edit and save TEMPNAME, the Member Selection Screen then
displays and you can rename the member.
17-187
GA
Member Create (Edit Only)
Procedure
To create a new member:
Step
Action
1.
Type “S” on the Command Line, followed by the new member name.
Results: The Edit Screen displays, showing the empty member.
2.
You can now edit and save the member.
The member is actually created at edit save time; therefore, if it is not
saved, the member will not exist.
17-188
Member Rename (Edit or Zap Only)
Renaming a
Member
To rename a member do one of the following:
Type RENAME on the Command Line, followed by the existing name and the
new name.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the member and type
“R”. Then TAB over and specify the new name. You can only rename one
member at a time this way.
The member is renamed and the member selection list re-positioned to the
newly renamed member.
For ZAP Only
As is the case with SPF, renaming a member with SAE does not affect any
aliases. The connection between a member and its alias is via TTR and not
the name displayed in the ALIAS-OF field.
17-189
GA
Member Delete (Edit or Zap Only)
Deleting a
Member
To delete an existing member:
Type DELETE on the Command Line, followed by the name of the member you
want to delete.
The member selection list re-displays after the deletion is complete.
17-190
CSECT Selection – ZAP/Verify
Selecting a Load
Module
When you select a member of a partitioned dataset for the Member Selection
Screen and that member is a Load Module, the CSECT Selection Screen
displays.
You can use the CSECT Selection Screen to select the Control Section
(CSECT) from within the Load Module.
Navigation
CSECT Selection
Screen
Select Load Module member using ‘S’ on Member Selection Screen.
CSECTS IN LOAD MODULE IEFBB410 ---------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
NAME
ORIGIN LENGTH
IEEAB400
3EFD8
398
IEEAB401
3F370
4A8
IEEMB848
EA18
600
IEFAB4A0
38598
ED0
IEFAB4A2
39468
2258
IEFAB4A3
3F818
488
IEFAB4A4
3CE80
1268
IEFAB4A6
3E0E8
8D8
IEFAB4A8
3E9C0
618
IEFAB4B0
3FCA0
4D8
IEFAB4B2
40178
500
IEFAB4C2
40678
4A8
IEFAB4C4
40B20
438
IEFAB4DD
40F58
668
IEFAB4DE
415C0
4B8
IEFAB4EA
41A78
290
IEFAB4EB
41D08
1D8
IEFAB4EC
37CE0
8B8
IEFAB4ED
41EE0
1328
IEFAB4EE
43208
5E0
IEFAB4EF
437E8
650
17-191
GA
Selecting a CSECT
Two Methods to
Select
You can select a Control Section (CSECT) for Zap/Verify in one of two
ways:
Type “S” on the Command Line, followed by the CSECT name.
Move the cursor in front of the CSECT name and type “S”.
Result: After you have selected a CSECT, the Zap or Verify Screen displays.
After Selection
After selecting a CSECT, SAE checks to determine if the CSECT contains all
printable characters. If so, the following screen displays.
DO YOU WISH TO PROCESS THIS CSECT AS TEXT DATA ==>
(Y/N)
This screen gives you to option of using Edit/Browse for the CSECT instead
of Zap/Verify. Certain CSECTs (like MSTJCL00) are much easier to work
with in an Edit/Browse format than hexadecimal.
CSECT Edit provides for text type-over editing. Other commands like line
repeat, delete, or insert are not permitted.
To process the CSECT with Edit/Browse reply ‘Y’.
17-192
Chapter 18: Edit Services
Overview
Introduction
Edit Services is an integral component of Action Services. Edit Services
provide functions that are directed against the contents of datasets (sequential)
or dataset members.
Edit Services are launched by selecting:
Processing
Datasets
A sequential dataset in Dataset Services or
A partitioned dataset member in Member Services.
Datasets with a record format of Undefined (RECFM=U) that are selected using
‘S’, ‘E’ or ‘B’ on the Dataset Selection Screen are processed with Zap/Verify
instead of Edit/Browse.
Datasets that are selected using ‘Z’ on the Dataset Selection Screen are
processed with Zap/Verify, independent of the record format of the dataset.
In this Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Edit Services
Page
Edit/Browse
18-194
Positioning
18-195
Printing
18-196
Altering Contents
18-197
Member Undelete (Edit Only)
18-199
18-193
GA
Edit/Browse
Functionality
Navigation
The Edit Processing Screen allows the contents of a member or sequential
dataset to be modified and 'saved' back on DASD.
Select partitioned dataset member using ‘S’ on Member Selection Screen
or
Processing
Screen
Select sequential dataset using ‘S’, ‘E’, or ‘B’ on Dataset Selection Screen
EDIT --- SYS1.PARMLIB(IEASYS00) USING SAE --------------- COLUMNS 001 072
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ************************ TOP OF DATA *****************************
000001 MLPA=(00,NOPROT),
ADDITIONAL REENTRANT MODULES
000002 LPA=00,
INCLUDE PROGRAM PRODUCTS LPALIB
000003 APF=00,
AUTHORIZATION LIST
000004 CMB=(COMM,8),
CHANNEL MEASUREMENT BLOCKS
000005 CMD=00,
AUTOMATIC START UP COMMANDS
000006 APG=07,
AUTOMATIC PRIORITY GROUP IS 7 DEFAULT
000007 CSA=(3072,3072),
CONSIDER SETTING TO LIMIT USER REG TO 8 MEG
000008 CVIO,
CLEAR OUT VIO DATA SETS
000009 DUMP=DASD,
PLACE SVC DUMPS ON SYS1.DUMPXX
000010 FIX=(00,NOPROT),
FIX MODULES SPECIFIED IN BASE AND TSO LIST
000011 GRS=NONE,
NO GRS AT THIS TIME
000012 HARDCPY=(SYSLOG,
HARDCOPY LOG IS SYSTEM LOG(SYSLOG)
000013
ALL,
RECORD ALL WTO/WTOR WITH ROUTE CODES
000014
STCMDS),
OPR & SYSTEM CMDS, STATIC STATUS DISPLAYS
000015 ICS=00,
SELECT INSTALL CNTL SPECS <=====
000016 IPS=00,
SELECT INSTALL PERF SPECS <=====
000017 LNK=(00,L),
SPECIFY LNKLST00 AS LINK LIST
000018 LOGCLS=0,
WILL BE PRINTED BY DEFAULT
000019 LOGLMT=020000,
MUST BE 6 DIGITS, MAX WTL MESSAGES
000020 MAXUSER=250,
(SYS TASKS + INITS + TSOUSERS) <250
000021 PAGNUM=(6,3),
ALLOW ADDITION OF 6 PAGE D/S & 3 SWAP D/S
18-194
Positioning
Scrolling
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Edit/Browse Screen.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Edit/Browse Screen use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down the
Edit/Browse Screen use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Edit/Browse Screen.
18-195
GA
Printing
How to Print
To print the dataset or member contents, enter the PRINT command on the
Command Line.
Defining a
Printer
If you have not defined the printer address, a prompt appears, allowing you to
define a printer address.
18-196
Altering Contents
Modifying
Existing
Contents
To modify the existing contents of the displayed dataset or member, type the
new data over the displayed data. SAE does not update or insert sequence
numbers.
SAE Ignores
Data Longer
than 72
Characters
In cases where the logical record length of the member is less than the screen
width (72 characters), the entire screen width remains an unprotected field;
however, SAE ignores any data you enter on the screen that is past the end of
the record.
SAE provides three line commands that allow you to insert, repeat, or delete
lines from the dataset.
Edit Processing
Commands
Certain commands that are entered on the Command Line are accessed only
through the Edit Processing Screen and function only with respect to Datasets
and Members. These commands are:
Command
Description
CAN
Do not save the dataset and return to the previous screen.
SAVE
Save the dataset and return to the previous screen.
INPLACE
Save the member over the original member.
COPY mmmmmmmm
Copy the specified member from the same partitioned
dataset into the member that is currently being edited. Use
the ‘A’ line command to specify the location the incoming
member is to be placed after.
UNDELETE
Locate and copy in the next orphaned member.
See page 18-199 for more information.
F text/'text' (Find
Command)
Locates the specified text in the current dataset starting
with the first displayed record.
C text/'text' text/'text' Locates the first operand text in the current dataset
starting with the first displayed record and changes that
text to the second operand text. Operand lengths must be
equal.
CAPS ON
Turn on automatic lowercase to uppercase character
conversion
CAPS OFF
Turn off automatic lowercase to uppercase character
conversion
Continued on next page
18-197
GA
Altering Contents, Continued
Line Commands
Certain commands that are entered as line commands are accessed through
the Edit/Browse Selection Screen. These commands are:
Command
Description
I
INSERT a blank logical record.
R
REPEAT logical record.
D
DELETE logical record.
A
AFTER - places the copied member after a line.
18-198
Member Undelete (Edit Only)
Creating and
Recovering
Orphaned
Members
When a member is updated in a PDS, the member is written to the end of the
dataset and then updates the directory to point to the new member. The old
version of the member still resides in the dataset, but without a pointer in the
directory, it is left orphaned.
When a member is deleted, the pointer in the directory is removed; therefore,
like the old version of a member, it also is left orphaned.
In both cases, the old versions and deleted members continue to exist in the
dataset until it is compressed.
SAE provides a facility to access these orphaned members. For each orphaned
member, there is no way of knowing the member name under which it once
existed. The data in each orphaned member is your only guide. The Undelete
facility accesses the orphaned members in order, from the end of the dataset
to the beginning. You will therefore see the most recently orphaned member
first.
Procedure
To Undelete members:
Step
Accessing
Deleted Member
and Previous
Versions
Action
1.
Open the Edit Screen.
2.
Enter UNDELETE on the Command Line.
Result: The UNDELETE command copies the most recently updated
orphaned member into the current member.
3.
If this happens to be the orphaned member for which you were looking
to re-establish, edit it further (if necessary), then Save.
4.
If it is not the correct member, enter UNDELETE again (or use PF9).
Results: SAE copies the next previous orphaned member into the
current member, replacing the one that was displayed.
5.
Continue until you locate the member for which you were looking.
You can only access deleted members and previous versions of a member
using the Edit Screen's UNDELETE command.
To use the UNDELETE command:
Select a new member (see 'Creating a new member'). Once the Edit Screen
displays for the new member, you can use the UNDELETE command. The
UNDELETE command is described in the Edit Screen Section.
18-199
GA
Chapter 19: Zap Services
Overview
Introduction
Zap Services is an integral component of Action Services. Zap Services
provide functions that are directed against the contents of datasets (sequential)
or dataset members where the data contains non-displayable hexadecimal
data.
You can launch Zap Services by selecting:
Selecting
Datasets
A sequential dataset in Dataset Services, or
A partitioned dataset member in Member Services.
Datasets with a record format of Undefined (RECFM=U) that are selected
using ‘S’, ‘E’ or ‘B’ on the Dataset Selection Screen are processed with
Zap/Verify instead of Edit/Browse.
Datasets selected using ‘Z’ on the Dataset Selection Screen are processed
with Zap/Verify independent of the record format of the dataset.
In this Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Zap Services
GA
Page
ZAP/Verify
19-202
Positioning
19-203
Command Line Commands
19-204
Altering Contents
19-205
ZAP Saving a Zapped Dataset
19-206
19-201
ZAP/Verify
Zap/Verify
Overview
Navigation
The Zap/Verify Screen allows the hexadecimal contents of a load module
CSECT, a member, or sequential dataset to be modified and 'saved' back on
DASD.
Zap/Verify
Screen
Alter/Verify
CSECT or
Dataset Contents
Select a partitioned dataset member using ‘S’ on the Member Selection Screen,
or
Select a sequential dataset using ‘S’, ‘E’, ‘B’ or ‘Z’ on the Dataset Selection
Screen
ZAP ---- IEFBB410 CSECT IEEAB400 ------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
000000 47F0F024 003016C9 C5C5C1C2 F4F0F040 *.00....IEEAB400 *
000010 F8F5F1F6 F240D1C2 C2F2F2F2 F00047F0 *85162 JBB2220..0*
000020 F0060050 90ECD00C 05C04AF0 F00407FF *0..&..}..{ó00...*
000030 5800C35A B20B0000 B20A0010 5800C35A *..C!..........C!*
000040 181D58F0 C02605EF 47F0C03A 47F0C02E *...0{....0{..0{.*
000050 000016A0 00001744 0A0A120E 58F0C02A *.............0{.*
000060 4770C01C 18B19200 B09947F0 C05C5800 *..{...k..r.0{*..*
000070 C35AB20B 0000B20A 00104510 C0540A0A *C!..........{...*
000080 18B19201 B09950D0 B0044220 B098B20A *..k..r&}.....q..*
000090 20009802 D01450B0 D00818DB B20A0000 *..q.}.&.}.......*
0000A0 D207B048 1000B20A 00105850 B0485890 *K..........&....*
0000B0 500058F0 B04C58A0 F00045E0 C1341FFF *&..0.<..0..\A...*
0000C0 194F4770 C0F459F0 A1604770 C0AC45E0 *.│..{4.0~-..{..\*
0000D0 C1B447F0 C0EC5880 A16048F0 80004BF0 *A..0{...~-.0...0*
0000E0 80024120 00111F33 43309001 1E2319F2 *...............2*
0000F0 47B0C0EC 96808006 181A9500 B0994770 *..{.o.....n..r..*
000100 C0E258F0 C35E05EF 47F0C0E8 58F0C362 *{S.0C;...0{Y.0C.*
000110 05EF45E0 C1E245E0 C20645E0 C2C44320 *...\AS.\B..\BD..*
000120 B09858D0 D0045800 C35A181B 9500B099 *.q.}}...C!..n..r*
000130 4770C128 5800C35A 58F0C11E 070005EF *..A...C!.0A.....*
000140 47F0C124 47F0C122 000017F0 0A0A47F0 *.0A..0A....0...0*
000150 C12A0A0A B20A2000 98ECD00C 07FE9180 *A.......q.}...j.*
You can use the Zap Processing Screen to alter/verify the contents of a load
module CSECT or a dataset.
For a load module CSECT, the data displays for the length of the selected
CSECT only.
For a dataset or dataset member, all of the data displays and there is no
indication of logical records or physical blocks.
19-202
Positioning
Scrolling
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Zap/Verify Screen.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Zap/Verify Screen use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down the
Zap/Verify Screen use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Zap/Verify Screen.
19-203
GA
Command Line Commands
List of
Commands
The following table lists the ZAP commands:
Command
Description
VER
(Verify Command)
See Altering contents.
REP
(Replace Command)
See Altering contents.
F text/'text'
(Find Command)
Find the specified data within the currently selected
DASD extent. Character data must be entered in quotes,
and hexadecimal data entered without quotes.
For example:
F ‘ABC’
F C1C2C3
CAN
Do not save the dataset and return to the previous screen.
19-204
Altering Contents
Modifying
Existing
Contents
To modify the existing contents of the displayed dataset, member, or CSECT,
type the new hexadecimal data over the displayed hexadecimal data.
Alternatively, you can also use the VER and REP commands to locate and
verify (VER) or replace (REP) data.
VER Command
To position the displayed text at a specific offset, use the VER command.
You enter the VER command on the Command Line. The first operand is a
one to six digit hexadecimal offset at which the screen is to be positioned. A
hexadecimal or character data, to be verified at the given offset, may be
entered as an optional second operand.
For hexadecimal data, two to sixteen hexadecimal characters are entered
(without quotes) which represent one to eight bytes of data.
For character data, one to sixteen characters can be specified in quotes.
The specified data is compared to the existing data at the given offset. If the
entered data does not match the existing data, SAE issues a message.
Examples of the VER command are:
REP Command
VER
12A
VER
12A C1C2C3C4C5
VER
12A 'ABCDE'
Use the REP command to replace the contents, at the supplied offset, with the
supplied data. Character data must be entered in quotes, and hexadecimal data
entered without quotes.
REP
12A C1C2C3C4C5
REP
12A 'ABCDE'
19-205
GA
ZAP Saving a Zapped Dataset
How to Save and
Exit
SAE perform a save operation only if the contents have been modified and
you request a save.
To request a Save operation, use PFkeys 3/15, or 4/16.
To exit the Zap Processing Screen without saving the dataset, use PFkeys 2/14 or
type CAN on the Command Line. SAE returns to the previous screen without
writing the dataset to disk.
19-206
Chapter 20: Catalog Services
Overview
Introduction
Catalog Services is an integral component of Action Services. Catalog
Services provides:
Functions that are directed against ICF Catalogs.
The ability to locate a dataset and process it directly in Dataset Services.
To launch Catalog Services, select an ICF Catalog in Dataset Services.
Commands
ICF Catalogs selected using ‘S’, ‘E’ or ‘B’ on the Dataset Selection Screen
are processed with Altercat/Listcat instead of Edit/Browse.
In this Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Catalog Services
Page
Catalog Selection
20-208
Altercat/Listcat
20-209
Catalog Types
20-210
Locating a Catalog Entry
20-211
Invoking Dataset Services
20-212
Altering a Catalog Entry
20-213
Capturing Tape Column Serial Numbers
20-214
Circumventing Uncataloged Dataset Problems
20-215
20-207
GA
Catalog Selection
Limiting The
Amount of
Displayed Data
The Altercat/Listcat Control Screen provides the means of limiting the
amount of data displayed for the selected catalog.
LISTCAT -- SYSTEM.CATALOG.ICF.MASTER.SYSA ----------------------------
Listcat Control
Screen
LEAVE FIELDS BLANK FOR A FULL CATALOG LISTING
THE LISTING MAY BE LIMITED TO CATALOG ENTRIES FOR SPECIFIC
DATASETS BY USING DSNAME LEVEL AND/OR DATASETS CATALOGED ON A
SPECIFIC VOLUME BY USING VOLUME SERIAL
DSNAME LEVEL ==>
VOLUME SERIAL ==>
Limiting The
Catalog Display
List
You can limit the catalog display list based on dataset name and/or cataloged
volume serial.
By specifying a partial dataset name, SAE only selects matching catalog entries
for display. For example, if you specify SYS1 in the dataset name field, only
catalog entries that start with SYS1 display.
If you specify a complete volume serial number, only catalog entries having that
volume display.
Volume Serial
Field
The volume serial field is useful when a DASD volume has been lost (for
example, a hardware failure). By using Volser limiting on the master catalog,
you can determine what, if any, IPL-critical datasets were lost.
Full Catalog List
For a full catalog list, leave both the dataset name level and Volser serial
fields blank.
20-208
Altercat/Listcat
Altercat
Functionality
The Altercat Processing Screen displays the contents of the selected ICF
Catalog. From the Altercat Screen, you can alter the cataloged Volser and
device type for a NONVSAM dataset.
Navigation
Select ICF Catalog using ‘S’, ‘E’ or ‘B’ on Dataset Selection Screen.
Altercat/Listcat
Screen
ALTERCAT -- SYSTEM.CATALOG.ICF.MASTER.SYSA ------------ ROW
266 OF
928
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
ENTRY TYPE
VOLSER DEVICE
SYSTEM.CATALOG.ICF.USERCAT5
USERCAT
CAT001 3380
SYS1.LINKLIB
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.LOGREC
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.LPALIB
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.MACLIB
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.MAN1
CLUSTER
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.MAN2
CLUSTER
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.MAN3
CLUSTER
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.MODGEN
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.NUCLEUS
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.PARMLIB
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.PPMACDEF
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.PPOPTION
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.PROCLIB
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.RMFCLS
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS1.RMFMAC01
NONVSAM
SYSRES 3390
SYS2.SYSA.SYSLOG
GDG
BASE
SYS2.SYSA.SYSLOG.G2165V00
GDG
015634 3480
SYS2.SYSA.SYSLOG.G2166V00
GDG
043582 3480 >
SYS2.SYSA.SYSLOG.G2167V00
GDG
024637 3480 >
SYS3
SYSTEM.CATALOG.ICF.USERCAT1 ALIAS
20-209
GA
Catalog Types
Catalog Entry
Types
You can display five different catalog entry types:
Displays…
Type of Entry
Screen
Navigation
ALIAS
The associated catalog
CLUSTER
The associated volume/device type
USERCAT
The associated volume/device type
GDG
The GDG base entry, followed by any GDG dataset entries and
their associated Volser/device type
NONVSAM
The associated volume/device type
If more than one Volser is associated with a NONVSAM or GDG entry, a ‘>‘
character appears to the right of the Volser.
You can view any additional Volsers (up to seven) one at a time by using
PF11/PF23 (Scroll Right).
Use PF10/PF22 (Scroll Left) to return to a previous Volser.
The column heading of ‘VOLSER’ is replaced with ‘VOL +x’ where x is a
number ‘1’ through ‘9’ to indicate the current relative position of the displayed
Volser.
20-210
Locating a Catalog Entry
Finding Catalog
Entry
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Altercat Selection
Screen. SAE also supports a Locate “L” command.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Altercat Selection Screen use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll
down the Altercat Selection Screen use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Altercat Selection Screen.
Locating by
Catalog Entry
To find a specific entry name:
Step
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a full or partial entry
name following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified entry name.
20-211
GA
Invoking Dataset Services from Catalog Services
Procedure
You can select a Catalog entry for a NONVSAM dataset for processing with
Dataset Services.
To select the entry:
Step
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the dataset name.
2.
Type “S”.
Catalog Services extracts the Volser from the catalog entry and then
searches the DASD Units on the system for that volume. After locating
the volume, Dataset Services processes the volume.
Results: The Dataset Selection Screen displays positioned at the
selected dataset.
20-212
Altering a Catalog Entry
Procedure
You can alter a NONVSAM dataset entry to specify a new volume serial
number and/or device type.
To alter the entry:
Step
Changing Device
Types
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the dataset name.
2.
Type “A”.
3.
Type the new Volser and/or device type over the displayed values.
Results: The catalog entry is altered immediately after you press Enter.
You can change device types to any of the following types. They must be
specified exactly as shown.
3330
3400-3
3480
0000
3350
3400-5
3480X
3375
3400-6
3490E
3380
3390
9345
3590
The device type of '0000' is typically only used for datasets cataloged to
Volser '******' (system residence volume serial number).
20-213
GA
Capturing Tape Column Serial Numbers
Procedure
The tape volume serial numbers on which a dataset is cataloged may be
captured for use in Restore Services. This allows the Volsers required for a
restore to be determined via the catalog.
To capture the volume serial numbers for a cataloged tape dataset:
Step
For More
Information
Action
1.
Use the NEW LINE key to move the cursor in front of the dataset name.
2.
Type “C”.
For more information on using the captured tape Volsers in Restore Services,
see page 20-254.
20-214
Circumventing Uncataloged Dataset Problems
Work-arounds
Although you cannot use Altercat to catalog a dataset, there are other ways to
circumvent problems that are caused by uncataloged datasets.
You can determine a given dataset’s location using the dataset search facility
(see page 15-132).
In most cases, the JCL involved can then be edited to specify the UNIT and
VOL=SER parameters.
If the uncataloged dataset is referenced by the Master JCL, the MSTJCL00
member of SYS1.LINKLIB can be zapped to add the UNIT and VOL=SER
parameters.
20-215
GA
Part V:
Fast DASD Erase
Overview
Introduction
You can use the Fast DASD Erase function to completely erase 3380, 3390,
or 9345 volumes. For EAVs, SAE R16 only supports the erasing of the Track
Managed Space.
In This Part
This part contains the following topics:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Fast DASD Erase Overview
20-219
Unit Selection
20-221
EAV Erase Setting
20-221
Erase Parameter Setting
20-223
Erase Reports
20-226
Sorting Volume List
20-228
Locating a Volume
20-229
Printing a Volume List
20-230
Erase Commands
20-231
Starting an Erase
20-233
Erase Status
20-235
Fast DASD Erase Monitoring
20-236
DRPCLIP Command
20-237
Erase Summary Report
20-238
Erase Failure
20-240
No Response Conditions
20-243
20-217
Fast DASD Erase Overview
Prerequisites
To use Fast DASD Erase:
The Fast DASD Erase feature must be enabled (DLIB@OPT).
The current userid must have access authority number 2.
What Fast DASD
Erase Does
You can use the Fast DASD Erase function to completely erase 3380, 3390,
or 9345 volumes (For EAVs, SAE R16 only supports the erasing of the Track
Managed Space.). You can also optionally perform a quick initialize (QUICK
INIT).
Useful After
Disaster
Recovery
Fast DASD Erase is useful at the completion of Disaster Recovery testing,
when you do not want to leave ANY data behind at a hot site. It is also good
to use before releasing Storage hardware to a third party.
QUICK INIT
QUICK INIT is useful when data security is considered to have lesser
importance.
Advantages
Although the time taken by FAST ERASE or QUICK INIT to function
against a single volume is considered fast, their real advantage is in
performing many erases or initializations concurrently.
Fast DASD Erase is designed to perform highly optimized I/O, which results
in a relatively small utilization of available paths per device. Devices on
different paths can be erased with little or no effect on the performance. For
devices on same paths, each additional concurrent erase will result in a
minimal increase in erase time. Even at total path utilization, the total saving
in erase or initialization time is substantial.
Not
Recommended
Under VM
Generally, use of Fast DASD Erase is not recommended under VM. VM may
report missing interrupts and affect SAE and other VM guests. Native use of
SAE is preferable over VM use. However, if VM use is the only option, the
virtual machine must have only one attached CPU. If more than one CPU is
present, VM I/O ASSIST will be disabled and cause unpredictable results.
Erase Failures
To prevent failures, all volumes being erased must be off-line to all other
systems. If another system accesses a volume that is being erased, the erase
will fail.
Erase failures can also occur for volumes attached via a 3990 control unit if
another system, that is also connected to the same control unit, is IPLed
(system reset notification) during the erase.
Continued on next page
GA
20-219
Fast DASD Erase Overview, Continued
Unit Selection
Screen
Note: To enter the Fast
DASD Erase application at
the UNIT SELECTION
Screen, select Option 2
from the SAE primary menu.
Erase Parameter
Setting
The ERASE Selection
Screen automatically
issues PRINT to create
“Before” and “After”
reports of Erase/INIT
activity.
ERASE Selection
Screen
FAST ERASE
QUICK INIT
Monitor ERASE/INIT
processing in real time using
the ERASE Selection Screen
Writes binary zeros on
all tracks except
cylinder 0, tracks 0.
The new volume label
is ERASED.
Creates a new one
track VTOC on a
volume. The new
volume label is
VTINIT.
Use the DRPCLIP command
to automatically clip volumes
labeled ERASED or VTINIT
so they conform to site
naming standards.
20-220
Unit Selection
Process
Fast DASD Erase uses the same Unit Selection process as Action Services.
You can control the list of volumes that can be selected for erase using the
Unit Selection Screen.
For more information on Unit Selection and Volume Selection Re-use, see
page 15-132 in the Action Services section of this manual.
Parallel Access
Volume (PAV)
Alias Volumes
One selection criteria available for Unit Selection (see page 15-132) that is of
particular interest when erasing volumes is PAV Alias selection. When erasing a
primary PAV volume, you may wish to avoid directly erasing its aliases volumes.
You may exclude PAV Alias volumes from the volume selection list by using this
selection criteria.
20-221
GA
EAV Erase Setting
Navigation
After processing the DASD Erase Parameter Setting Screen, if any EAV
volumes are present in the volume list, the following screen is presented.
EAV Erase
Settings
EXTENDED ADDRESS VOLUMES (EAVs) ARE PRESENT IN THE VOLUME SELECTION LIST
EAVs ARE NOT FULLY SUPPORTED FOR ERASE IN THIS RELEASE
HOWEVER, YOU MAY CHOOSE TO ERASE THE TRACK MANAGED SPACE ON THESE VOLUMES.
IF YOU REPLY Y, SAE WILL ERASE THE FIRST 65,520 CYLs (TRACK MANAGED SPACE) ON
THESE VOLUMES AND CREATE A STANDARD VTOC ON EACH EAV VOLUME. DATA IN THE
CYLINDER MANAGED SPACE WILL NOT BE ERASED BUT WILL NOT BE READILY ACCESSIBLE.
IF YOU REPLY N, SAE WILL NOT ALLOW EAVs TO BE SELECTED FOR ERASE AND ALL DATA
ON THOSE VOLUMES WILL REMAIN UNTOUCHED.
ERASE TRACK MANAGED SPACE ON EAVs ==>
Erasing Track
Managed Space
(Y/N)
SAE R16 does not fully support the erasing of EAVs. Track Managed Space may be
erased but Cylinder Managed Space may not.
You may choose to not erase the EAV volumes at all (select ‘N’) in which case any
EAVs in the list will not be selectable for erase.
Or you may choose to erase the Track Managed Space (cylinders 65520 and below)
on the volumes (select ‘Y’). If you elect to erase the Track Managed Space, EAV
volumes will be selectable for erase and if selected, SAE will erase the Track
Managed Space cylinders and create a standard VTOC on the volume. The VTOC
will describes both the Track Managed and Cylinder Managed Space and any VTOC
information regarding the contents of the Cylinder Managed Space will have been
erased, but the actual contents of the Cylinder Managed Space will have not been
changed.
If EAVs are erased, a message will appear in the report indicating that Cylinder
Managed Space was not erased.
“WARNING - EAV CYLINDER MANAGED SPACE NOT ERASED'”
Additionally, the report will show EAV volumes as having only 65,534 cylinders.
20-222
Erase Parameter Setting
Navigation
DASD Erase
Parameter
Setting Screen
After the processing of Unit Selection, Fast DASD Erase displays the DASD
Erase Parameter Setting Screen. You can use this screen to set various Fast
DASD Erase options.
DASD ERASE PARAMETER SETTING ------------------------------------------------Change the following values as required – PF1 for Help
Full Volume Erase
Disable 3990 CACHE
Erase Alternate Tracks
Maximum Auto-restarts per unit
Restarts for same cylinder
Erase method
Erasure Data Pattern
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
Y
N
N
50
1
B
00
(Y/N) Use N for Quick Init
(Y/N) If Y, use 'CACHE ON' after erase
(Y/N)
(S - Sustained, B - Burst)
(00 or suggestions: 55, AA, or FF)
The following may only be changed on advice of Customer Support
Progress reporting Cyl Interval
No response time (min)
Terminate no response (min)
Produce Diagnostic Reports
Restart/Resume monitor interval
Auto screen refresh interval
Parameter
Full Volume
Erase (with Y)
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
==>
25
25
45
Y
5
300
Description
If you specify ‘Y’, SAE erases the entire DASD unit.
Full Volume Erase writes binary zeros (or if specified some
other byte value) on all tracks except cylinder 0, track 0. On
track 0, the volume label record is changed to Volser ERASED
and the remainder of the track is erased. If the volume
contained a valid VTOC prior to erase, then a new one track
VTOC is created on track 1.
After the erase, the volume will be clipped to ERASED.
Full Volume
Erase (with N)
If you specify ‘N’, then all volumes are processed with Quick
Initialization only.
You can request that QUICK INIT creates a new one track
VTOC on the volume, but does not erase the remaining tracks.
The QUICK INIT process is very fast and an alternative to a
total erasure when data security is a secondary consideration.
Using QUICK INIT, data is not erased; however, the new
VTOC limits access.
After creating the one track VTOC, the Quick Initialization
function will clip the volume to VTINIT and the STATUS field
will show *INIT.
Continued on next page
20-223
GA
Erase Parameter Setting, Continued
DASD Erase Parameter Setting Screen (continued)
Parameter
Disable 3990
Cache
Description
If you specify ‘Y’, Fast DASD Erase deactivates the Cache for
each DASD volume on the volume selection list that is
attached to a 3990 controller with cache support.
The operation is deemed to be successful when the device
accepts the command. De-staging of data may continue for
some time after the operation has indicated success. Disabling
3990 Cache improves erase performance for real 3990-3 and
3990-6 controllers. However, most emulated 3990 controllers
(for example, SCSI RAID) ignore cache deactivation requests.
If 3390 Cache is disabled, it must be manually enabled after the
erase using the CACHE ON command.
Erase Alternate
Tracks
If you specify ‘Y’, Fast DASD Erase operations attempt to
erase alternate and defective tracks. As alternate tracks are
assigned and unassigned, data may remain on alternate and
defective tracks. An attempt to erase each alternate track (or if
an alternate track is assigned, the defective track that it
replaced) is made when the erase operation is started for a
volume.
In the case of defective tracks, the erase may be unsuccessful,
depending on the seriousness of the defect. Specifying ‘N’ is
recommended.
Maximum Autorestarts per unit
Specify the maximum number of times that an automatic
restart should be attempted on a volume. An automatic restart
is the restarting of an erase that has failed. You can set a value
between 0 and 255.
Restarts for same
cylinder
Specify the number of times that a restart operation should try
to erase a failing cylinder before skipping it. You can select a
value between 0 and 255.
To never skip over a failing cylinder, set Restarts for
same cylinder to the same value as Maximum Autorestarts per unit.
To always skip over a failing cylinder without a retry, set
Restarts for same cylinder to zero.
Continued on next page
20-224
Erase Parameter Setting, Continued
DASD Erase Parameter Setting Screen (continued)
Parameter
Erase Method
Description
Specify the erase mode for Fast DASD Erase to use. Two
choices are available: Burst or Sustained.
Burst – This mode is recommended for new technology
RAID devices that emulate 3380 or 3390 devices.
Sustained – This mode is recommended for legacy
equipment. Use this method if the devices you are erasing
are real 3380s or 3390s behind real 3990 controls.
Prior to SAE Release 11, only the Sustained mode was
available. The Burst mode was introduced with SAE Release
11 and is the default.
Erasure Pattern
Additional
Settings
Specify the hexadecimal value to be written on each byte of the
DASD track.
00 - An erase of zero has special significance and provides
the greatest performance. This is the default.
xx - A value other than 00 (hexadecimal values 01-FF)
require the movement of 47K of data across the channel for
each track on each DASD unit being erased and as a result
will effect erase performance. A non-zero erasure pattern is
only supported for ECKD 3390 devices. Other devices
such as 3380s or 9345s will be erased with a zero erasure
pattern, independent of the value specified. Some
suggested bit patterns are: x’55’ = 01010101, x’AA’ =
10101010 and x’FF’ = 11111111.
The Fast DASD Erase Parameter Setting Screen also contains additional
parameters for Customer Support Staff to use when diagnosing problem
situations. These parameters are normally protected from change. Do not alter
them without first consulting NewEra Customer Support Staff.
20-225
GA
Erase Reports
Automatic
Reports
SAE’s Fast DASD Erase produces several reports that provide documentation
of:
what was erased
what errors occurred
what erase performance was achieved
These reports are produced automatically if printing is active. Prior to
displaying the Erase Volume Selection screen, the following screen displays
(if printing is not active).
Fast DASD Erase
Screen
FAST DASD ERASE ---------------------------------------------------------FAST DASD ERASE AUTOMATICALLY CREATES REPORTS FOR YOUR FUTURE REFERENCE.
THESE REPORTS INCLUDE:
-
ERASE SUMMARY REPORT
DETAIL VOLUME LIST (BEFORE & AFTER ERASE)
ENVIRONMENT REPORT (TECHNICAL DETAILS ON EACH VOLUME)
DIAGNOSTIC REPORT (DETAILS ON ANY ERASE FAILURES)
THESE REPORTS ARE ONLY CREATED AUTOMATICALLY IF YOU HAVE PRINTING ACTIVE.
YOU MAY DIRECT PRINT OUTPUT TO A CHANNEL ATTACHED PRINTER OR HAVE IT
CAPTURED TO A DISK OR TAPE DATASET.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
Directing SAE
Print Output to a
Tape Dataset
In the case of DRP Hot Site testing, you may wish to direct your SAE print
output to a Tape dataset. This allows you to easily take reports with you at the
conclusion of your DRP test and perform the actual printing to hardcopy at
your own installation.
20-226
Fast DASD Erase/QUICK INIT Selection
Using the Erase
Selection Screen
Erase Selection
Screen
Automatic
Printing
You can use the Unit Selection Screen to control which devices are selectable
for erase processing. Use the Erase Selection Screen to select one or more
volumes for erasing or initialization.
ERASE SELECTION
COMMAND ===> _
VOLSER STATUS
CATLOG
SYSRES
BCKRES
SMP001
EAVSD2
ACC003
CICS03
CICS01
ACC004
ACC001
ACC005
ACC002
OLN002
ONL001
OLN003
SYS003
SYS001
USER01
SYS002
--
0 ACT
0 NRSP
0 RSTR----------- ROW
1 OF 120
SCROLL ===> PAGE
UNIT DEVT CYLS INFO CHPID
01C0 3390 2226 B
05 06 1B 1D
01C1 3390 2226 B
05 06 1B 1D
01C2 3390 2226 B
05 06 1B 1D
01C4 3390 2226 B
05 06 1B 1D
01D0 3390 76K B
04 1A 1C 1E
0341 3380 2655 B
03 04 1A 1C
0342 3380 2655 B
03 04 1A 1C
0343 3380 2655 B
03 04 1A 1C
0344 3380 2655 B
03 04 1A 1C
0345 3380 2655 B
03 04 1A 1C
0346 3380 2655 B
03 04 1A 1C
0347 3380 2655 B
03 04 1A 1C
0580 3350 555 B
01 02
0582 3350 555 B
01 02
0583 3350 555 B
01 02
0740 3380 885 B
09 0A/07 08
0742 3380 885 B
09 0A/07 08
0743 3380 885 B
09 0A/07 08
0745 3380 885 B
09 0A/07 08
The Erase Selection Screen automatically issues a PRINT command. If you
have not defined a printer address, a prompt appears allowing you to do so.
The PRINT command is again automatically issued when leaving the Erase
Selection Screen. This provides a before and after listing of the volumes that
were erased or initialized.
Volume Selection
List Descriptions
The Erase Selection Screen displays the volumes sorted by unit address.
The information shown for each volume on the Volume Selection list is as
follows:
Command
Description
VOLSER
Volume Serial Number
UNIT
Unit Address
DEVT
Device Type
CYLS
Number of cylinders
SUBC
Sub-channel number
CHPID
Channel Path IDs - Installed, available and operational are
shown preceding a ‘/’. Installed but not available and/or not
operational follow the ‘/’
20-227
GA
Sorting Volume List
Changing the
Sort Order
Use the following commands to change the list’s sort order:
Command
Description
SORTVOL
Sort list by Volser
SORTDUP
Sort list by Volser but list duplicate
volsers first
SORTUNIT
Sort list by Unit address
SORTCYL
Sort list by number of cylinders
20-228
Locating a Volume
Finding Volumes
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Erase Selection List.
SAE also supports a Locate “L” command.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Erase Selection List use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down the
Erase Selection List use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Erase Selection List.
Locating a
Volume
To find a specific volume (when the volume list was sorted by Volser):
Step
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a full or partial volume
name following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified column.
20-229
GA
Printing a Volume List
How to Print
To print the contents of the Erase Selection List, enter the PRINT command
on the Command Line.
Defining a
Printer
If you have not defined the printer address, a prompt appears, allowing you to
define a printer address.
20-230
Erase Commands
Overview
To invoke specific functions, a command is issued or a volume is selected
using a Line Selection character.
Command Line
To invoke specific functions via the command line:
Command
Seldom Used
Commands
Description
ERASEALL
Select all volumes for Erase (see page 20-233)
DRPCLIP
Rename all volumes uniquely (see page 20-237)
RESTART
Select for erase restart all volumes on which an erase operation
has failed and reset the automatic restart counts.
KILLALL
Stop all active erase operations and do not restart them
automatically.
The following ERASE commands are not used frequently.
Command
Description
ECKD
Enable the use of ECKD channel programs for erase operations
(Default setting).
CKD
Disable the use of ECKD channel programs for erase
operations.
ENVIRON
Use this command primarily for diagnostic purposes. It
produces a report that shows detailed internal device
information for devices that have reported failures.
DIAGNOSE
Produce Diagnostic Reports for all volumes with currently
active or failed erase operations.
Continued on next page
20-231
GA
Erase Commands, Continued
Line Selection
To invoke a specific function, select a volume using a specific line selection
character that represents the service.
The selection characters for Services are:
Command
Processing a
Volume With a
Selection
Description
E
Select a volume for Erase (See page 20-233)
F
Select a DASD String for ERASE processing (see page 20-233).
U
UN-select a volume for ERASE processing (see page 20-233).
K
Stop the erase operation and do not automatically restart
To process a volume with a selection:
Move the cursor in front of the volume to be selected
Type the selection character.
20-232
Starting an Erase
Recommendation
Fast DASD Erase can be directed at some or all of the volumes listed on the
Erase Selection Screen. NewEra recommends that you use Volser and/or unit
masking or range on the Unit Selection Screen to limit the volumes displayed,
and to be as close as possible to the volumes that are to be erased.
Select Volumes
Twice
To start erasing a volume, the volume must be selected twice.
First Selection
The first time you select the volume, it enters a ‘pending erase’ status.
Double selection is a safeguard against erasing the wrong volumes. When you
use the selection commands the first time, you can see what will be erased
when you repeat the commands.
For a volume that is in ‘pending erase’ status, the screen is updated with
'*CNFRM' (as shown below) to indicate that confirmation is required prior to
the beginning of the actual erase.
Updated Screen
VOLSER STATUS UNIT DEVT CYLS SUBC CHPID
ACC001 *CNFRM 0345 3380 2655 0012 03 04
Second Selection
The second time you select the volume, the actual erase starts.
Erasing Methods
Any number of volumes may be selected for erase by using one of three
methods:
To select
Then…
An individual
volume for erase
Place an “E” in front of the volume.
An entire string for
erase
Place an “F” in front of the first volume on the string
(address must be xxx0). All units xxx0 through xxxF are
selected. Use of the SORTUNIT command may be of
assistance for this type of selection.
All the volumes in
the volume
selection list
Enter the ERASEALL command on the command line. The
ERASEALL command does not start the devices in
numerical order so that the Erase starts are spread across all
controllers.
Continued on next page
20-233
GA
Starting an Erase, Continued
UN-selecting a
Volume
To UN-Select Volumes for erase (removed from awaiting confirmation
status) place a “U” in front of the volume.
Erasing Volumes
When a large number, but not all, of the volumes listed are to be erased, the
ERASEALL command can still be of use.
By issuing the ERASEALL command, all volumes are placed in erase
confirmation status. You can then use the UN-select line command (U) to
UN-select the volumes that should not be erased. By issuing the ERASEALL
command again, all volumes awaiting confirmation begin erasure, and the
previously UN-selected volumes enter confirmation status.
Delays in
Updating
During the period when many erase operations are starting, the Erase
Selection Screen may not update for several minutes. During this period, a
message displays for each volume as its erase operation initializes.
20-234
Erase Status
Updated Fields
When the erase is in progress, SAE updates the “STATUS” and “INFO”
fields:
The “Status” field changes to *ERASE.
The “INFO” field updates with a combination of the following field codes:
Column
1
C or E for CKD/ECKD
2
B or S for Burst/Sustained mode
3
O or F for CACHE ON/OFF
4
R if a RAMAC device
VOLSER STATUS UNIT DEVT CYLS INFO CHPID
ACC001 *ERASE 0345 3380 2655 CB
03 04
Sample Screen
Status Line
Info Field Code
While in erase mode, a status line appears on the top on the screen. This line
shows the number of:
active erases (ACT)
erases in a no-response state (NRSP)
erases that have been re-started (RSTR)
A sample display is shown below:
Erase Selection
Screen
ERASE SELECTION
COMMAND ===> _
VOLSER STATUS
CATLOG
SYSRES
BCKRES
SMP001
--
1 ACT
0 NRSP
0 RSTR ---------- ROW
1 OF 120
SCROLL ===> PAGE
UNIT DEVT CYLS INFO CHPID
01C0 3390 2226
05 06 1B 1D
01C1 3390 2226
05 06 1B 1D
01C2 3390 2226
05 06 1B 1D
01C4 3390 2226
05 06 1B 1D
20-235
GA
Fast DASD Erase Monitoring
Monitoring the
Erase Status
After initiating the Fast DASD Erase operation, you can monitor the Erase
status by viewing several fields on the screen. The number of cylinders
displayed for the volume decrements to indicate the number of cylinders yet
to be erased.
Based on the cylinders erased up to that point, SAE calculates and displays
the number of cylinders erased per minute. This is useful in comparing the
erase performance of the volumes being erased.
Differences in device type, controller types, the number of paths to each
controller, the number of devices behind each controller, and hardware
servicing of requests all affect the erase performance of each device. The
number of minutes the Fast DASD Erase operation has been running also
displays.
Sample Screen
An Estimate of
Time Remaining
VOLSER STATUS UNIT DEVT CYLS INFO CHPID
ACC001 *ERASE 0345 3380 2050
03 04 CYL/MIN=222 MN=
2
In addition to the individual cylinder per minute displays, an estimate of the
number of minutes required to complete the erase is displays in the message
area.
This rough estimate is based on the device with the largest number of
cylinders still to be erased and its most recent cylinder per minute rate. As
erases end for some devices, others receive more service, so, in general, the
erase operation should complete sooner than the estimate displayed.
Refreshed
Information
The monitoring information is re-calculated and the screen updated once a
minute (auto screen re-fresh), or when the Enter key is used.
After Completion
Once the Fast DASD Erase operation completes, the Volser field shows the
new Volser of the erased unit as ERASED and the final erase rate (cylinders
per minute). If you used QUICK INIT, all initialized volumes have Volsers of
VTINIT.
Sample Screen
Amount of Time
Required
VOLSER STATUS UNIT DEVT CYLS INFO CHPID
ERASED
0345 3380 2655
03 04 CYL/MIN=220 MN= 12
The amount of time required to complete the erase depends on the device
type, configuration, and the number of erase operations active against devices
on the same paths.
20-236
DRPCLIP Command
Overview
You can use the DRPCLIP command to change all ERASED volumes to
unique volume serial numbers.
When issued on the Command Line of the Erase Selection Screen, all
volumes with Volsers of ERASED or VTINIT are renamed to a Volser that is
made up of the unit address.
Identifying
Duplicate Volsers
After the Fast DASD Erase operation has completed, all erased volumes have
Volsers of ERASED. If you used QUICK INIT, all initialized volumes have
Volsers of VTINIT. This makes it easy to confirm which volumes have been
erased or initialized. The duplicate Volsers are inconvenient for other
operations like IPLing z/OS.
Three Character
Operand
You can issue the command with or without a three-character operand.
If you specify an operand, SAE uses the value as the first three characters of
the new Volsers. The last three characters are the unit address of the device.
For example, if the volume serial at unit address 385 was ERASED, the
command 'DRPCLIP CLR' would result in the volume being clipped to
CLR385.
If you issue the command without an operand, the first three characters are
also the unit address. For example, if the volume serial at unit address 385
was ERASED, the command 'DRPCLIP ' would result in the volume being
clipped to 385385.
Four Digit Unit
Addresses
Supported
DRPCLIP also supports devices with four digit unit addresses where the first
digit is non-zero.
For example:
Does not Affect
Active Volumes
‘DRPCLIP CLR’ will re-name unit 385 to CLR385 but unit 1385 to Volser
CL1385.
‘DRPCLIP’ without an operand will re-name unit 385 to 385385 but unit 1385 to
001385.
You can issue the DRPCLIP command from the Erase Selection Screen at
any time but it does not affect volumes being actively erased.
20-237
GA
Erase Summary Report
Printing a Report
When you exit the Erase Volume Selection screen, SAE automatically
produces an Erase Summary Report.
This report groups devices that:
are of the same device type
attached to the same control unit
reports erase summary information for each device group.
The report includes ‘real’ device types that enable the identification of the
actual device (for example, RAMAC, RAMAC RVA, etc.) that was erased.
The Erase Summary Report will be displayed for online viewing. If a printer
has been defined, the report is also automatically printed.
Send Us a Copy
of Your Erase
Reports
NewEra would like a copy of your Erase Reports. Having these reports allows
us to monitor the performance of Fast DASD Erase in a variety of
configurations, and allows us to update the benchmarks. Our mailing address
is:
18625 Sutter Boulevard
Suite 950
Morgan Hill CA 95037
Erase Summary
Report
The following pages contain a sample of the Erase Summary Report:
*
11/05/20 20:05 SAE 16.0(A008)ERASE SUMMARY REPORT
SERIAL - 000000
MODEL
- 2064-108 ARCH
- ZAR
*
PAGE STORAGE
1
- 1152.0M
ADDRESS QTY PA DEV DEV
------ E R A S E ------ BEST WORST AVG
BEST WORST AVG
ERASED VEN -DEVICE- ---- CONTROLLER ----RANGE
TH TYPE CYLS START RESTR FAIL
OK
CYL/M CYL/M CYL/M TIME TIME TIME
GB
DOR TYPE MOD TYPE MOD
SEQUENCE
--------- ---- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ------- --- ---- --- ---- --- -----------7000-7007
8 4 3390 3339
8
0
0
8
20
18
18
172
187
181
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7008-701F
24
4 3390
3339
24
0
0
24
21
18
19
159
187
176
65.81 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7020-7027
8
4 3390
3339
8
0
0
8
21
19
19
163
184
172
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7028-703F
24
4 3390
3339
24
0
0
24
21
18
19
162
189
179
65.81 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7040-7047
8
4 3390
3339
8
0
0
8
20
18
19
168
190
178
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7048-705F
24
4 3390
3339
24
0
0
24
23
18
19
151
190
177
65.81 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7060-7067
8
4 3390
3339
8
0
0
8
22
18
19
156
187
179
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7068-707F
24
4 3390
3339
24
0
0
24
24
18
19
144
190
176
65.81 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7080-7087
8
4 3390
3339
8
0
0
8
20
18
18
174
188
181
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
20-238
7088-709F
24
4 3390
3339
24
0
0
24
22
18
19
153
191
178
65.81 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
70A0-70A7
8
4 3390
3339
8
0
0
8
22
18
19
152
187
176
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
70A8-70BF
24
4 3390
3339
24
0
0
24
21
18
19
164
189
176
65.81 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
70C0-70C5
6
4 3390
3339
6
0
0
6
20
18
19
171
189
181
16.45 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
70D0-70DF
16
4 3390 10017
16
0
0
16
40
39
39
255
259
257
131.62 HTC 3390 B9C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
70E0-70E7
8
4 3390 10017
8
0
0
8
40
39
39
251
258
255
65.81 HTC 3390 A98 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
70E8-70FF
24
4 3390 10017
24
0
0
24
40
39
39
253
258
256
197.43 HTC 3390 B9C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
7200-7207
8
8
0
0
8
20
18
18
167
188
180
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
4 3390
3339
11/05/20 20:05 SAE 16.0(A008)ERASE SUMMARY REPORT
SERIAL - 000000
MODEL
- 2064-108 ARCH
- ZAR
PAGE STORAGE
5
- 1152.0M
ADDRESS QTY PA DEV DEV
------ E R A S E ------ BEST WORST AVG
BEST WORST AVG
ERASED VEN -DEVICE- ---- CONTROLLER ----RANGE
TH TYPE CYLS START RESTR FAIL
OK
CYL/M CYL/M CYL/M TIME TIME TIME
GB
DOR TYPE MOD TYPE MOD
SEQUENCE
--------- ---- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ------- --- ---- --- ---- --- -----------76C0-76C7
8
4 3390
3339
8
0
0
8
18
16
16
186
215
205
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
76C8-76DF
24
4 3390
3339
24
0
0
24
19
16
16
181
216
203
65.81 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
76E0-76E7
8
4 3390
3339
8
0
0
8
18
16
16
194
215
206
21.93 HTC 3390 A38 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
76E8-76F0
9
4 3390
3339
9
0
0
9
19
16
16
180
215
202
24.67 HTC 3390 B3C 3990 006 000000012345
HTC 3390 AX8 3990
--------- ---- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ------- --- ---- --- ---- --- -------------------- ---- -- ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ------- --- ---- --- ---- --- -----------7000-76F0 977
977
0
0
977
40
10
19
15
259
189 2974.54
WARNING - EAV CYLINDER MANAGED SPACE NOT ERASED
THE FIRST ERASE OPERATION WAS STARTED AT
THE LAST ERASE OPERATION WAS STARTED AT
THE LAST ERASE OPERATION ENDED AT
VOLUMES ERASED
GIGABYTES ERASED
ERASE ELAPSED MINIUTES
NUMBER OF UNITS WITH CNTLR CACHE ON
NUMBER OF UNITS WITH CNTLR CACHE OFF
NUMBER OF UNITS WITHOUT CNTLR CACHE
:
15:32
:
15:33
:
19:52
:
977
: 2974.54
:
259
:
977
:
0
:
0
FULL VOLUME ERASE
ERASE ALTERNATE TRACKS
PROGRESS REPORTING CYL INTERVAL
NO RESPONSE TIME (MIN)
TERMINATE NO RESPONSE (MIN)
ERASE METHOD
ERASURE PATTERN
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Y
N
25
25
45
B (SUSTAINED/BURST)
00
PROCESSOR TYPE
PROCESSOR SEQ
LPAR NAME
VM LEVEL
VM GUEST ID
:
:
:
:
:
2064.108.IBM.02
0000000000000000
SYS1
Note: As per new international standards, a GB is now represents 1000x1000x1000 bytes. Releases prior
to R14 used GB to represent 1024x1024x1024 bytes.
20-239
GA
Erase Failure
I/O Errors May
Cause Failure
If an I/O error occurs during an erase operation, the device information is
updated with 'FAILED' and may include the Device and Subchannel status
(ST=) and sense bytes (SENSE=).
If SAE has a valid printer address, diagnostic reports are automatically
produced (if enabled) that document the error’s cause. Retain these reports
for analysis.
ST= Value
The ST=xxyy value represents the Device and Subchannel status:
Device (xx)
Subchannel (yy)
80 Attention
80 Program-controlled int
40 Status modifier
40 Incorrect length
20 Control-unit end
20 Program check
10 Busy
10 Protection check
08 Channel end
08 Channel-data check
04 Device end
04 Channel-control check
02 Unit check
02 Interface-control check
01 Unit exception
01 Chaining check
Continued on next page
20-240
Erase Failure (continued)
Bit Settings
Some of the more common bit settings for sense data (SENSE=) are:
Byte
Bits
Meaning
0
0
Command Reject
1
Intervention Required
2
Bus Out Parity Check
3
Equipment Check
4
Data Check
5
Overrun
6
1
2
7
Incomplete Domain
0
Permanent Error
1
Invalid Track Format
2
End-of-Cylinder
3
Message to Operator
4
No Record Found
5
File Protected
6
Write Inhibited
7
Imprecise Ending
0
Request Inhibit Write
1
Correctable (data check)
2
First Logged Error
3
Environmental-Data Present
4
5
Imprecise Ending
6
7
Continued on next page
20-241
GA
Erase Failure (continued)
Restarting Failed
Erase Operations
Failed erase operations are automatically restarted. If the maximum number
of restarts for a particular volume is reached but additional restarts are
desired, you can use the RESTART command to reset the restart count for
volumes in ‘FAILED’ status and to resume restart operations.
20-242
No Response Conditions
No Response
Situations
If a volume that is being erased does not post an interrupt for an extended
period of time, the '*ERASE' indicator change to '*NORSP' (no response).
If a printer address was supplied to SAE, a diagnostic report is automatically
produced (if enabled), that documents the last interrupt received.
Retain these reports for analysis.
A 'no response' condition may clear, but if it is persistent, it may be a sign that
the erase has failed without host notification. After a second time period has
elapsed, the I/O to the device is cleared and a restart is attempted.
20-243
GA
Part VI:
Hardware Confirmation
Overview
Introduction
Hardware Confirmation uses Device Services to inspect hardware
configurations and the accessibility to ALL I/O devices. It checks a device’s
status, availability, and address.
In This Part
This part contains the following topics:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Hardware Confirmation Process Diagram
20-245
Device Services
20-246
Device Selection
20-249
Sorting a Device List
20-251
Locating a Device
20-252
Printing a Device List
20-253
Invoking Services
20-254
20-244
Hardware Confirmation Process Diagram
Hardware
Confirmation
Process Diagram
The following diagram shows how the Hardware Confirmation Process takes
place:
SYSPLEX
CPU 1
To enter the
Hardware
Confirmation
application at the
UNIT SELECTION
Screen, select
Option 3 from the
SAE Primary Menu
CPU 2
UNIT
SELECTION
Screen
CPU n
Device
Selection
Screen
Hardware Confirmation accesses
all CPUs and devices in a
SYSPLEX that are logically
connected to the CPU on which
SAE is executing.
Each selected device provides the following
information:
the device type (DEVICE)
the control unit type (CNTRL)
the sense-id model code for the device
and for the control unit (CODE)
the unit address (UNIT)
and for S/390 systems, the subchannel
number (SUBC) and channel path ids
(CHPID)
The installed, available, and operational CHPIDs
are shown followed by (/).
20-245
GA
Device Services
Identifying
Hardware
Device Services provide functions that you can use to identify any and all
hardware devices.
Creating a
Device List
You can use the Unit Selection Screen to control which devices are selectable
for further processing in Device Services.
The Unit Selection Screen provides two criteria for selection: Unit Address
and Device Type. For a device to be considered selected, it must meet all the
specified criteria.
Navigation
Unit Selection
Screen
Select Option 3 (Confirm) from the SAE Primary Screen
UNIT SELECTION ---------------------------------------------------------COMMAND ===> _
ADDRESS RANGES (BLANK FOR ALL UNITS)
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
UNITS ==>
(EXAMPLES: 600, 6**, 600-700, E1*-F1*, ¬A**, ¬A00-B34)
DEVICE (BLANK FOR ALL DEVICE TYPES)
DEVTYP =>
DEVTYP =>
DEVTYP =>
DEVTYP =>
DEVTYP =>
DEVTYP =>
(EXAMPLES: 3390, 33*0, ¬3480)
Selecting All
Devices
DEVTYP =>
DEVTYP =>
DEVTYP =>
To select all devices, leave all selection criteria on the Unit Selection Screen
blank
Continued on next page
20-246
Device Services, Continued
Unit Address
You can make up to nine unit-address specifications. If no unit address
specifications are made, all unit addresses meet the UNITS criteria.
Unit Address
Specifications
Unit address specifications can be either:
A specific address or address range for inclusion
A specific address or address range for exclusion
To indicate exclusion, prefix the UNITS specification with a ‘¬’ character.
Specifying
UNITS
If an address is specified for both inclusion and exclusion, the unit is excluded.
If the address is only specified for exclusion, all other addresses are included.
You can specify UNITS as follows:
A complete and explicit 3- or 4-digit unit address, for example, 62C or 102C.
A masked partial 3- or 4-digit unit address. The mask character is an asterisk (*).
An asterisk is specified for each wildcard digit (for example, 8** results in a
search of units 800-8FF).
A unit address range. The range is specified with two complete 3- or 4- digit unit
addresses separated by a dash (for example, 245-560 results in the search of units
245 through 560).
Unit address range and masking are mutually exclusive.
Continued on next page
20-247
GA
Device Services, Continued
Device Type
You can make up to nine device-type specifications. If no device-type
specifications are made, all devices meet the DEVTYP criteria.
Device Type
Specifications
Device type specifications can be either
A specific device type
A device type mask
To indicate exclusion prefix the DEVTYP specification with a ‘¬’ character.
If a device type is specified for both inclusion and exclusion, the device type is
excluded.
If the device type is only specified for exclusion, all other device types are
included.
Specifying Device
Types
You can specify DEVTYP as follows:
Determining the
Device Type
The device type of any given device is determined by using the SENSE ID
channel command. Some devices may not support SENSE ID, some may
return a device type other than expected.
A complete 4 digit device type (for example, 3390)
A partial masked 4-digit device type.
The mask character is an asterisk (*). An asterisk is specified for each wildcard
character (for example, 33** would match all device types starting with 33)
20-248
Device Selection
Device Selection
Screen
The Device Selection Screen provides information on all device types:
DEVICE LIST ---------------------------------------------- ROW
1 OF 641
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DEVICE CNTRL CODE UNIT SUBC CHPID
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
3380 3880 1E33 031D 0012 03 04 1A 1C
VOL=SYSRES
3380 3880 1E33 031E 0013 03 04 1A 1C
VOL=OLDRES
3490 3490 0402 0400 0062 05 06
3490 3490 0402 0401 0063 05 06
3490 3490 0402 0402 0064 05 06
3490 3490 0402 0403 0065 05 06
3390 3990 0ACC 0440 0034 07 08 1D 1E
LABEL=CMS
3390 3990 0ACC 0441 0035 07 08 1D 1E
LABEL=CMS
3390 3990 0ACC 0442 0036 07 08 1D 1E
LABEL=CMS
3390 3990 0ACC 0443 0037 07 08 1D 1E
LABEL=CMS
0000 0000 0000 0500 0022 09 0A
SENSE-ID FAILED
3390 3990 0ACC 0600 0040 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=CICS01
3390 3990 0ACC 0601 0041 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=TSO001
3390 3990 0ACC 0602 0042 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=WORK01
3390 3990 0ACC 0603 0043 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=TSO002
3390 3990 0ACC 0604 0044 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=CICS03
3390 3990 0ACC 0605 0045 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=CICS02
3390 3990 0ACC 0606 0046 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=WORK04
3390 3990 0ACC 0607 0047 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=TSO003
3390 3990 0ACC 0608 0048 0B 0C 1B 1C
VOL=CICS05
Parameter
Descriptions
The information shown for each device on the Device Selection list is as
follows:
Parameter
Additional Label
Information
Description
DEVICE
Device Type
CNTRL
Controller Type
CODE
Device Type code followed by Controller type code
UNIT
Unit Address
SUBC
Sub-channel number
CHPID
Channel Path IDs - Installed, available and operational are shown
preceding a ‘/’ . Installed but not available and/or not operational
follow the ‘/’
If SAE can read the volume label of a DASD unit, the following information
also displays:
LABEL=
VOL=
Continued on next page
20-249
GA
Device Selection, Continued
SENSE ID
Channel
Command
SAE uses the SENSE ID channel command to determine any given device’s
device type.
However, some devices may not support SENSE ID, and others may return an
unexpected device type.
20-250
Sorting a Device List
Changing the
Sort Order
Use the following commands to change the list’s sort order:
Command
Description
SORTDEV
Sort list by Device Type
SORTUNIT
Sort list by Unit address
20-251
GA
Locating a Device
Finding Devices
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Device Selection
List. SAE also supports a Locate “L” command.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Device Selection List use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll down the
Device Selection List use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Device Selection List.
Locating a
Device
To find a specific device:
Step
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a device number
following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified device.
20-252
Printing a Device List
How to Print
To print the Device Selection List contents, enter PRINT on the Command
Line.
Printer Address
Not Defined
If you have not defined the printer’s address, a prompt appears that allows
you to define the printer.
20-253
GA
Invoking Services
Invoking Specific
Services
To invoke specific Services, you can use a Line Selection character to issue a
command or select a device.
Command Line
Use the following command to invoke Services via the command line:
Command
VTQUICK
Description
Performs Volume Initialization for all DASD volumes in the
current Device Selection List. VTQUICK works as if the ‘V’
line selection was made for each DASD device.
Use Unit Selection to limit the list to only DASD devices you
want to initialize, then use VTQUICK.
Line Selection
To invoke specific Services, a volume is selected using a specific line
selection character that represents the service.
The selection characters for Services are:
Character
S
Description
Select DASD device for Dataset Services (see page 16-157).
Select Tape device for Restore Tape Scan (see page 23-277).
Processing a
Device With a
Service
I
Select DASD device for Volume Information (see page 15-143).
M
Select DASD device for Volume Map (see page 15-147).
V
Select DASD device for Volume Initialization (see page 15-144).
Unlike, Action Services, you may use ‘V’ from the Hardware
Confirmation Selection Screen to select a volume for initialization
that does not contain a valid volume label. Unlabelled volumes do
not appear on the Action Services Volume Selection Screen.
To process a device with a Service:
Step
Action
1.
Move your cursor in front of the volume you want to select
2.
Type the selection character from the above list
20-254
Part VII: Restore Services
Overview
Introduction
This part discusses SAE’s Restore Services in detail.
In This Part
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Restore Services
21-257
IEB Restore
22-259
Tape Scan
23-277
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Restore
24-281
FDR/DSF Restore
25-285
DSS or FDR Restore
26-289
Performing a Volume Copy
27-319
Performing a Volume Compare
28-323
20-255
Chapter 21: Restore Services
Overview
SAE’s Restore Services are a comprehensive collection of tools that allow a
stand alone restore of a dataset or an entire volume.
This type of restore is a departure from other stand alone restore products
which provide for the stand alone restore of a full volume (or selected
absolute tracks) only. In many recovery situations, restoring a complete
DASD volume is not required and may also regress other changes that would
further complicate the recovery process.
SAE’s ability to restore a single dataset, combined with its ability to allocate
and copy datasets, provides a much more flexible restore capability.
Also, SAE’s support of restore from DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) or FDR volume
dumps means that you can use SAE’s restore capabilities without having to
change or add to your existing backup processes.
Dataset Restore
From Three
Backup Sources
Restore Services provide for a stand alone dataset restore from three backup
sources:
Full Volume
Restore From
Two Backup
Sources
Restore Services provide for a stand alone full volume restore from two
backup sources:
FDR and
DFSMSdss
SAE does not use FDR or DFSMSdss in processing dumps created by those
products. The file format of FDR and DFSMSdss dumps vary and may
change from release to release. SAE may not support all current FDR or
DFSMSdss formats, nor future formats of FDR or DFSMSdss releases.
Tape Scan and
Full Volume
Disk-to-Disk
Compare and
Copy Utilities
In addition to restore options, Restore Services provides a tape scan utility
and full volume disk-to-disk compare and copy utility.
IEBCOPY or IEBGENER unloaded dataset tapes.
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Full volume or Dataset dumps on tape or DASD.
FDR Full volume or DSF Dataset dumps on tape or DASD.
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Full volume dumps on tape or DASD.
FDR Full volume dumps on tape or DASD.
You can use the tape scan utility to identify tape contents and volume sequence
numbers.
You can use the full volume compare utility to determine if differences exist
between two volumes. You can also use the full volume copy utility to create
mirror images of a DASD volume.
Continued on next page
GA
21-257
Restore Services, Continued
Navigation
Use the Restore Selection Screen to invoke a specific restore service.
Select option 5 from the SAE primary menu. The Restore Services Selection
Screen appears.
Restore Services
Selection Screen
SAE RESTORE SERVICES ---------------------------------------------------OPTION ===>
1
2
3
IEB RESTORE
TAPE SCAN SHORT
TAPE SCAN FULL
- SAE RESTORE USING IEBCOPY/IEBGENER TAPE BACKUPS
- SCAN TAPE TO FIRST FILE
- SCAN ENTIRE TAPE
4
5
6
DFSMSdss INSPECT - LIST DATASETS IN A DSS DUMP BACKUP
DFSMSdss DATASET - RESTORE A DATASET FROM A DSS DUMP BACKUP
DFSMSdss VOLUME - RESTORE A VOLUME FROM A DSS DUMP BACKUP
7
8
9
FDR INSPECT
FDR DATASET
FDR VOLUME
- LIST DATASETS IN A FDR DUMP BACKUP
- RESTORE A DATASET FROM A FDR DUMP BACKUP
- RESTORE A VOLUME FROM A FDR DUMP BACKUP
10 VOLUME COPY
- COPY ONE DASD VOLUME TO ANOTHER
11 VOLUME COMPARE
- COMPARE ONE DASD VOLUME TO ANOTHER
NOTE: DFSMSdss IS A COPYRIGHTED PRODUCT OF IBM CORP. FDR IS A COPYRIGHTED
PRODUCT OF INNOVATION DATA PROCESSING. SAE DOES NOT USE THESE PRODUCTS
IN PROCESSING TAPES CREATED BY THEM.
21-258
Chapter 22: IEB Restore
Overview
Introduction
This chapter discusses SAE’s IEB Restore in detail.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See Page
IEB Restore Overview
22-260
Restoring Datasets with IEB Restore
22-264
IEB Restore Dataset Restrictions
22-265
IEB Restore Target Dataset Selection
22-266
IEB Restore Using the Backup Master from Tape
22-267
IEB Restore Backup Master Selection
22-269
IEB Restore Backup Master Selection Commands
22-271
IEB Restore Backup Tape Mount
22-272
IEB Restore Advanced Processing
22-276
22-259
GA
IEB Restore Overview
Restore
Functions
You can use the IEB Restore function to:
Restore a partitioned dataset (or selected members of a partitioned dataset) from
a tape containing an IEBCOPY unloaded partitioned dataset or
Restore a sequential dataset from an IEBGENER unloaded sequential dataset.
Restoring to a
Different Device
Type
The restore may be made to an unlike device type (for example, 3380 backup
restored to 3390). The target dataset for the restore must already exist. You
can use SAE’s dataset allocation function to allocate the target dataset if it
does not already exist (see page 15-132 for more information).
Target Dataset
Too Small
If the target dataset is smaller than the dataset being restored, SAE will
allocate additional extents to accommodate the restore.
Continued on next page
22-260
IEB Restore Overview, Continued
Diagram
The following diagram displays the IEB Restore process:
Backup Source Files
IEBCOPY
IEBGENER
SAE Backup Control System
SAE
Backups
SAE
Backup Control System
Master Files
Description, VOLSER
Sequence #
Backup TAPE datasets are on a single tape volume with a standard label reel type 3420, or cartridges type
3480, 3490.
Backup Master
Selection Screen
Volser and File
Sequence
Number must
be known to
begin
RESTORE
Use of SAE
Backup is
Optional
USE?
YES
NO
Note: To access the
Backup Control
System through the
RESTORE
Application, select
Option 5 from the
SAE Primary Menu
Sequential
Copy (IEBGENER) to
the Target Dataset on
Disk
File Formats:
Fixed and Variable
Backup Tape Mount
Screen
The RESTORE
process is designed
to appear as if the
copy is occurring
between DISKs
Dataset
Restore
Screen
Partitioned
IEBCOPY Unload to the
Target Dataset on Disk
File Formats:
Fixed, Variable, and
Undefined
All Target Datasets
reside on Disk
Continued on next page
22-261
GA
IEB Restore Overview, Continued
Required
Information
To restore a dataset from tape, you must know:
SAE Backup
Control Part of
the SAE Utilities
To aid in taking the backups and determining the required restore information
(the Volser and file sequence number), NewEra ships the SAE Backup
Control System as part of the SAE Utilities (see page 8-65 for more
information).
Backup Master
File Contents
Besides taking the backups of selected datasets, the SAE Backup Control
System maintains a Backup Master File that describes:
The tape Volser and
The file sequence number of the backup dataset.
the dataset that was backed up,
the tape Volser on which the backup resides and
the file sequence number of the backup dataset on that tape.
The Backup Master file is maintained on DASD and two copies can be
maintained on tape. If you maintain tape copies of the Backup Master file, the
copies are always written to the same two tape Volsers that you define during
SAE during installation.
If a restore is required and the DASD copy of the Backup Master File is
unavailable, SAE can request the mount of one of the Backup Master file
tapes. From the Backup Master file tape, the correct location (Volser and file
sequence number) of the required backup can be determined.
Continued on next page
22-262
IEB Restore Overview, Continued
Three Methods
to Determine the
Correct Backup
Volser
By using the Backup Control System, you can determine the correct backup
Volser and file sequence number by one of three methods:
Method 1:
If You Know the
Name
If you know the name of the Backup Master file on DASD, you can use SAE
dataset search to locate it (see page 15-132 for more information). After you
locate the Backup Master file you can browse it. By viewing the file you can
determine the tape Volser and file sequence number of the required backup.
This information can be supplied once the Dataset Restore function has been
invoked.
Method 2:
If you Keep Tape
Copies
If you maintain tape copies of the Backup Master file, you can use a service
of the IEB Restore function to read the tape copy of the Backup Master file
and display a selection list of all backups. You can then select the appropriate
backup from the list, and IEB Restore function discovers the Volser and file
sequence number information.
Method 3:
Backup Control
System Listings
You can use the Backup Control System listings to determine the tape Volser
and file sequence number of the required backup. This information can be
supplied once the IEB Restore function has been invoked.
Backup Control
System is
Optional
Using the Backup Control System is completely optional; it is not required to
create backups that are acceptable to the IEB Restore function. You can use
any IEBCOPY or IEBGENER job to make backups that are acceptable to IEB
Restore.
Advantages
Advantages of the Backup Control System are:
you can easily make backups
you can minimize tape usage
you can maintain vital restore information with availability in a stand alone
environment in mind.
22-263
GA
Restoring Datasets with IEB Restore
Restore both
Sequential and
Partitioned
Datasets
The IEB Restore function can restore sequential and partitioned datasets from
a tape backup.
For sequential datasets, the tape backup is a copy (IEBGENER) of the disk
dataset.
For partitioned datasets, the tape backup must be created by an IEBCOPY
unload of the disk PDS.
Backup datasets must be on standard labeled tape reels (3420 type) or tape
cartridges (3480, 3490, 3590 types). The backup dataset must be contained on
a single tape volume; multi-volume datasets are not supported.
Restore
Definition
The term ‘restore’ describes a copy process from tape. NewEra designed the
IEB Restore function to appear similar to a copy between two disk datasets.
The description of restore involves three datasets:
Restoring a
Dataset from
Tape
the original dataset that was backed up (called the 'source dataset')
the backup dataset on tape (called the 'tape dataset')
the dataset being restored (called the 'target dataset')
To restore a dataset from tape you must know the tape Volser and the file
sequential number of the backup tape dataset.
If you are using the SAE Backup Control System, the Backup Master File
will contain that information. For more information see 'Backup Control
System' page 8-65.
Restoring from
Partitioned
Datasets
You can restore all or selected members from partitioned datasets.
The source dataset (original dataset that was backed up) must have had the
same organization (partitioned or sequential) and the same record format
(fixed, variable, or undefined) as the dataset being restored. The tape dataset
does not have to have been created from the dataset that is being restored. For
example, several members from a backup of SYS1.LINKLIB could be
restored to dataset SYS1.LPALIB.
For partitioned datasets, the record format can be fixed, variable, or
undefined. Partitioned dataset members are always added to the end of the
target dataset, acquiring additional extents as necessary.
For sequential datasets, a record format can be fixed or variable.
22-264
IEB Restore Dataset Restrictions
Source and
Target Datasets
Must Have Same
Organization and
Record Format
As previously mentioned, both the source dataset (original dataset that was
backed up) and the target dataset for the restore operation must be of the same
organization and record format.
Additional Rules
Additionally, datasets with keys, record format variable spanned, or record
format variable block spanned, are not supported. Depending on the record
format, additional restrictions apply.
Block Sizes
The record format restriction applies to base record format (fixed, variable or
undefined) and not variations of the same base record format. For example,
datasets of F, FB, FBA or FBM could be restored to one another.
For fixed and variable record format datasets, both the source and target datasets
must have the same logical record length. Block sizes may differ.
For undefined record format datasets, the maximum block size of the source
dataset cannot exceed the maximum block size of the target dataset.
22-265
GA
IEB Restore Target Dataset Selection
Identify the
Target Dataset
Once invoked, the IEB Restore function requires that you identify the target
dataset (the dataset in which the restore operation will write data).
You can identify the target dataset using the normal Unit Selection, Volume
Selection and Dataset selection screens. Instructional screens display to
remind you of the purpose of the selection (in this case, target dataset).
For more information on the Unit Selection, Volume Selection and Dataset
Selection screens, see Actions Services, page 14-125.
22-266
IEB Restore Using the Backup Master from Tape
Data Restore
Screen
Backup Master
File Usage Screen
Once you select the dataset you want to restore, the Dataset Restore screen
appears. This screen controls whether or not a tape copy of the Backup
Master file is to be used in identifying the Volser and dataset file sequence
number of the backup tape.
DATASET RESTORE ------------------------------------------------------IN ORDER TO PERFORM THE RESTORE, THE TAPE VOLSER AND DATASET
FILE SEQUENCE NUMBER OF THE BACKUP MUST BE KNOWN. IF THE TAPE
WAS CREATED USING THE SAE BACKUP CONTROL SYSTEM, THE BACKUP
MASTER FILE (TAPE VOLUME SAEMT1 OR SAEMT2) WILL CONTAIN
THAT INFORMATION.
ACCESS THE SAE BACKUP MASTER FILE ==> YES (YES OR NO)
IF NO, THE VOLSER AND FILE SEQ # OF THE BACKUP MUST BE KNOWN
IF YES, A TAPE COPY OF THE BACKUP MASTER MUST BE AVAILABLE
Known Volser
and File
Sequence
Number
If you know the Volser and the file sequence number, then reply 'NO' to the
'ACCESS THE SAE BACKUP MASTER FILE' prompt. The process of
using the Backup Master file is then bypassed.
See 'IEB Backup Tape Mount' for instructions on how to continue.
If You Do Not
Know the Volser
and File
Sequence
Number
If you need to determine the Volser and file sequence number of the backup
tape using a tape copy of the Backup Master file, then reply 'YES'.
Backup Tape
Mount Screen
You can use the Backup Tape Mount screen to specify the volume and file
sequence number of the backup tape dataset to be used, and the tape drive on
which it is to be mounted.
If you specify 'YES', you must have a tape copy of the Backup Master file
available.
If you selected a dataset from the Backup Master Selection screen, then the
Volser and file sequence number display. If not, these values must be
supplied.
Continued on next page
22-267
GA
IEB Restore Using the Backup Master from Tape, Continued
Accessing the
Backup Master
File
If you have to access the Backup Master file, the Backup Master Tape Mount
Screen appears.
Procedure
The first Volser defined at installation as containing a tape copy of the Backup
Master file is displayed.
The second Volser is identified in the message area.
To process the tape mount:
Step
Backup Master
Tape Mount
Screen
Action
1.
Locate the tape.
2.
Mount it on the tape drive you are going to use.
3.
Once the tape is mounted and the drive is ready, specify the tape drive
address on the screen.
4.
Press Enter.
Result: After SAE reads the tape and determines the tape dataset
attributes, the Backup Master Selection Screen appears.
TAPE MOUNT REQUEST --------------------OPTIONALLY USE SAEMT2 FOR MASTER
COMMAND ==>
FOR TAPE MOUNT, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
- MOUNT THE DESIRED TAPE AND READY THE DRIVE
- SUPPLIED REQUIRED VALUES
- PRESS ENTER
TAPE DRIVE UNIT ADDRESS
==>
TAPE VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER ==> SAEMT1
DATASET'S FILE SEQ NUMBER ==> 1
22-268
IEB Restore Backup Master Selection
Contents of the
Backup Master
Selection Screen
The Backup Master Selection Screen lists the contents of the Backup Master
file that was on the mounted tape.
The following information appears on the Backup Master Selection Screen:
the name and original location (volume) of the backed up dataset
the time and date of when the backup took place
the tape volume and file sequence number of the backup dataset
After selecting a dataset backup, the Volser and file sequence number for that
backup are reflected on the Backup Tape Mount Screen.
Backup Master
Selection Screen
BACKUP MASTER FILE--------------------------------------- ROW 85 OF 115
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
BACKED UP DATASETS
VOLSER DATE TIME TAPE
FILE
SYS1.CMDLIB
SJ3RES 92030 13:11 T00109 78
SYS1.CMDLIB
S1ARJ2 92030 10:19 T00109 7
SYS1.CMDLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 15:39 T00030 8
SYS1.CMDLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 12:32 T00195 5
SYS1.JES3LIB
SJ3RES 92030 13:15 T00109 79
SYS1.LINKLIB
SJ3RES 92030 13:33 T00109 81
SYS1.LINKLIB
S1ARJ2 92030 10:16 T00109 3
SYS1.LINKLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 15:29 T00030 4
SYS1.LINKLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 12:46 T00195 10
SYS1.LPALIB
SJ3RES 92030 13:21 T00109 80
SYS1.LPALIB
S1ARJ2 92030 10:24 T00109 11
SYS1.LPALIB
S1ARJ2 92023 15:48 T00030 12
SYS1.PARMLIB
S1ARJ2 92036 13:10 T00087 2
SYS1.PARMLIB
S1ARJ2 92034 12:03 T00027 2
SYS1.PARMLIB
S1ARJ2 92034 11:59 T00098 2
SYS1.PARMLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 15:09 T00030 2
SYS1.PARMLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 12:47 T00195 11
SYS1.PROCLIB
S1ARJ2 92030 13:54 T00109 86
SYS1.PROCLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 15:09 T00030 3
SYS1.PROCLIB
S1ARJ2 92023 12:48 T00195 12
SYS1.SVCLIB
S1ARJ2 92030 13:52 T00109 85
Continued on next page
22-269
GA
IEB Restore Backup Master Selection, Continued
Finding Backup
Dataset
SAE provides multiple ways of scrolling up or down the Backup Master
Selection List. SAE also supports a Locate “L” command.
Scrolling
Information
All scrolling activities are based on a fixed scroll size of one page.
To scroll up the Backup Master Selection List use PFkeys 7 and 19, to scroll
down the Backup Master Selection List use PFkeys 8 and 20.
If you specify “M” on the command line, the scroll PFkey (7, 19 or 8, 20)
scrolls to the top or bottom of the Backup Master Selection List.
Locating Backup
Dataset
To find a specific Backup Dataset (when the extent list was sorted by
cylinder):
Step
Selecting a
Backed Up
Dataset for
Restore
Action
1.
Type “L” (for Locate) on the command line with a full or partial dataset
name following.
2.
Press Enter.
Result: SAE positions the selection list at the specified dataset.
You can select a backed up dataset for restore by using the NEW LINE key to
move the cursor in front of the dataset name and typing “S”.
22-270
IEB Restore Backup Master Selection Commands
From the
Command Line
You can use the following commands at the Command Line:
L dataset - Positions at the specified dataset.
M - Use PFkeys to position at the top or bottom of list.
Line Commands
The following Line Command is available:
S - Select a backed up dataset for restore.
22-271
GA
IEB Restore Backup Tape Mount
Using the Backup
Tape Mount
Screen
Use the Backup Tape Mount Screen to specify the volume and file sequence
number of the backup tape dataset to be used, and the tape drive on which it is
to be mounted.
If a dataset was selected from the Backup Master Selection Screen, then the
Volser and file sequence number already displays on this screen. If not, you
must supply these values.
Procedure
To process the backup tape mount:
Step
IEB Backup
Tape Mount
Screen
Action
1.
Locate the tape.
2.
Mount it on the tape drive you are going to use.
3.
Once the tape is mounted and the drive is ready, specify the tape drive
address on the screen.
4.
Press Enter.
Results: After SAE reads the tape and determines the tape dataset
attributes, the Dataset Restore Screen appears.
TAPE MOUNT REQUES------------------------- SOURCE FOR DATASET RESTORE
COMMAND ==>
FOR TAPE MOUNT, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
- MOUNT THE DESIRED TAPE AND READY THE DRIVE
- SUPPLIED REQUIRED VALUES
- PRESS ENTER
TAPE DRIVE UNIT ADDRESS
==>
TAPE VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER ==>
DATASET'S FILE SEQ NUMBER ==>
Continued on next page
22-272
IEB Restore Backup Tape Mount, Continued
Dataset Restore
Function
The Dataset Restore Screen provides control and confirmation for the Dataset
Restore function.
For sequential datasets, press Enter to begin the restore process.
IEB Dataset
Restore Screen
DATASET RESTORE --------------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
RESTORE FROM:
92036.H1310.FILE2
T00087
0301
DSORG RECFM
PO
FB
LRECL BLKSZ
80 3120
DSORG RECFM
PO
FB
LRECL BLKSZ
80 3120
RESTORE TO:
SYS1.PARMLIB
SYSRES
0600
IF PARTITIONED, RESTORE ALL MEMBERS
==> NO (YES OR NO)
REPLACE LIKE-NAMED MEMBERS ==> YES (YES OR NO)
Restoring to a
Partitioned
Dataset
When restoring to a partitioned dataset, each new member (even if replaced)
is written to the end of the dataset and the directory is updated.
Avoiding Out-ofSpace Conditions
with EMPTY
To avoid out-of-space conditions, if you are replacing all of the target dataset
members, consider using the Dataset Information function's EMPTY
command on the target dataset first (see page 16-165 for more information).
This command will allow the restore to take place as if the target dataset was
newly allocated.
Restored
Members
Replace LikeNamed Members
By default, members restored from the source dataset replace any like-named
members in the target dataset.
Procedure
To restore selected members:
If you do not want this to occur, change the 'REPLACE LIKE-NAMED
MEMBERS' prompt to 'NO'. All or selected members of the partitioned
datasets can be restored.
Step
Action
1.
Leave the 'RESTORE ALL MEMBERS' prompt at 'NO'.
2.
Press Enter.
Results: The Member Restore Selection Screen appears, listing the
members in the source dataset.
Continued on next page
22-273
GA
IEB Restore Backup Tape Mount, Continued
Procedure
To restore all the members from the backup tape dataset to the target dataset:
Step
Restore Selected
Members
Action
1.
Change the 'RESTORE ALL MEMBER' prompt to 'YES'
2.
Press Enter.
Results: The Dataset Restore Screen updates with the name of each
member as it is restored. When the operation is complete, the
Member Restore Selection Screen appears, showing each
member’s results.
If you specify 'NO' to the 'RESTORE ALL MEMBERS' prompt on the
Dataset Restore Screen, the Member Copy Selection Screen appears.
This screen allows you to select the members to copy from the backup tape to
the target dataset. The members listed on the screen are those on the backup
tape.
Procedure
To copy a member:
Step
Member Copy
Selection Screen
Action
1.
Place an “S” in front of the member name.
2.
Press Enter.
Note
You can select several members at once.
COPY --- 91360.H1548.FILE2 USING SAE--------------- SELECT COPY MEMBERS
COMMAND ===> _
SCROLL ===> PAGE
NAME
RENAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
ADYSET00
01.04 84/03/10 90/10/23 08:43
10
10
5 USER2
ADYSET01
ADYSET02
COMMNDAB *COPIED
01.01 89/04/25 90/04/12 16:23
28
26
28 USER4
COMMNDC1 *COPIED
01.00 89/12/04 90/08/02 08:26
23
23
0 USER8
COMMNDHY *REPL
01.05 86/12/14 87/10/30 09:00
28
18
28 USER2
COMMND00
01.17 87/05/25 91/01/01 12:17
28
19
12 USER2
COMMND01
01.17 89/08/20 90/11/12 21:27
22
28
22 USER4
COMMND41
01.00 88/07/02 90/03/27 19:32
28
28
0 USER2
ERBRMFBU
01.00 89/03/30 89/12/31 17:10
36
36
0 USER1
ERBRMFFE
01.01 90/11/26 90/12/03 16:19
6
6
2 USER8
ERBRMFR1
01.04 89/05/25 90/07/06 09:46
41
42
5 USER4
ERBRMFR2
01.03 88/06/16 89/02/09 09:53
15
15
3 USER2
ERBRMFR3
01.00 89/12/22 89/12/24 16:43
40
40
0 USER4
ERBRMF00
01.04 89/09/17 90/01/17 22:45
34
36
2 USER4
ERBRMF01
ERBRMF02
ERBRMF03
ERBRMF04
ERBRMF05
GIMOPCDE
Continued on next page
22-274
IEB Restore Backup Tape Mount, Continued
Column
Descriptions
The status of each member restore copy request is shown to the right of each
member name.
Value
Description
*COPIED
Member was copied successfully
*REPL
Member was copied successfully and replaced a like-named
member that already existed in the target dataset.
*NO-REPL
The member was not copied. A like-named member existed in
the target dataset and no replace was specified.
*ALIAS
The member was not copied. The member is an alias and the
main member was not selected. To copy this member, select
the main member for copy, and alias members will
automatically be copied as well.
RD ERROR
The member was not copied and other copy requests were not
processed. An error occurred while trying to read the member
from the backup tape.
DIR FULL
The member was not copied and other copy requests were not
processed. The directory of the target dataset is full.
WRTERROR
The member was not copied and other copy requests were not
processed. An error occurred while writing the member in the
target dataset. The message area will further describe the
error.
*NO COPY
The member was selected for copy but was not copied. An
error occurred while trying to copy another member and, as a
result, this copy request was not processed.
22-275
GA
IEB Restore Advanced Processing
Alias Members
The Dataset Restore function provides some advanced processing for alias
members.
Whenever you select a member (non-alias) for restore (explicit selection or
copy all), SAE makes a search for any alias entries. All alias entries are
automatically restored.
An alias member cannot be selected for restore by itself, it can only be
restored as an automatic function of restoring the main member.
Overlay Load
Modules
Supported
The Dataset Restore function also supports restoring overlay load modules.
22-276
Chapter 23: Tape Scan
Overview
Introduction
This chapter discusses SAE’s Tape Scan feature in detail.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Tape Scan Overview
23-278
Tape Scan
23-279
23-277
Tape Scan Overview
Tape Scan Short
and Tape Scan
Full
Both Tape Scan Short and Tape Scan Full can read and display a tape’s
contents.
Tape Scan Short reads the tape until the first block of the first data file is read.
Tape Scan Short
For a standard labeled tape, Tape Scan Short displays label information from
the volume and the first dataset, as well as displaying the first block of data
from the first dataset (Tape Scan Full reads the tape until an End-of-File is
encountered).
NewEra recommends Tape Scan Short when only information on the volume
and/or the first dataset is required.
Tape Scan Full
For a standard labeled tape, Tape Scan Full displays label information from
the volume and all datasets as well as displaying the first block of data from
the each dataset and the number of blocks in each dataset.
As Tape Scan Full must read the entire tape, it can take several minutes to
complete.
Stand Alone
Restores
When performing a stand alone restore, using either SAE or another
(DFSMSdss or FDR) stand alone restore utility, you must mount the backup
volumes in the correct order.
You can use SAE’s Tape Scan utility to quickly determine the volume order
by displaying each tape’s volume sequence number.
23-278
Tape Scan
Opening the
Tape Mount
Request Screen
Selection of Tape Scan Short or Tape Scan Full will both display the Tape
Mount Request Screen.
You must supply the unit address of the tape drive to be used, and the Volser
of the tape to be scanned.
Automatically
Filling the Device
Address
Tape Scan Tape
Mount Screen
Selecting a tape device from the Device List presented via Hardware
Confirmation invokes Tape Scan Short and fills in the device address
automatically (see 20-254 for more information).
TAPE MOUNT REQUEST ----------------------------------- TAPE TO BE SCANNED
COMMAND ==>
FOR TAPE MOUNT, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
- MOUNT THE DESIRED TAPE AND READY THE DRIVE
- SUPPLIED REQUIRED VALUES
- PRESS ENTER
TAPE DRIVE UNIT ADDRESS
==> 570
TAPE VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER ==> NES737
Tape Scan Short
After the Tape Scan Short function has scanned a tape, the results appear.
You may use all of the Browse functions to view the tape scan output.
Label records are displayed, followed by an interpretation of the contents of
the label. For the first dataset on the tape, a portion of the first block is
displayed in EBCDIC and in Hex, followed by the block length.
Tape Scan Short
Report
BROWSE - TAPESCAN.OF.VOLUME.NES737 USING SAE ---------------- COLUMNS 001 072
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ****************************** TOP OF DATA *************************
000001 VOL1NES737
000002 *** VOLUME SERIAL ------ NES737
000003 HDR15.BACKUP.SEPT0996NES73700010001
962530000000000000IBM OS/VS 37
000004 *** DATASET ID --------- 5.BACKUP.SEPT0996
000005 *** VOLUME SEQUENCE #--- 0001
000006 *** DATASET SEQUENCE #-- 0001
000007 *** CREATION DATE ------ 96253
000008 *** EXPIRATION DATE ---- 000000
000009 *** SECURITY FLAG ------ 0 (NONE)
000010 HDR2U000000000000P390BC2 /SCPMV5
54800
000011 *** RECORD FORMAT ------ U
000012 *** BLOCK LENGTH ------- 00000
000013 *** RECORD LENGTH ------ 00000
000014 *** CREATE JOB/STEP ---- P390BC2 /SCPMV5
000015 ***********************************-TAPEMARK-************************
000016 ..........................0..SCPMV5i.o...............................
000017 000000418800000020002000E00FF00ECDDEF8092314203120020600311020003000300
000018 0011108000000002E002E0E6A0FF0002374559065F0254000E0137008541E1020002100
000019 *** FIRST BLOCK SHOWN ABOVE, SIZE IS 00072.
****** ***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA*********************
Continued on next page
23-279
GA
Tape Scan, Continued
Tape Scan Full
After the Tape Scan Full function has scanned a tape, the results appear. You
may use all of the Browse functions to view the tape scan output.
Label records display, followed by an interpretation of the contents of the
label. For each dataset on the tape, a portion of the first block displays in
EBCDIC and in Hex, followed by the block length and the number of blocks
in the dataset.
Tape Scan Full
Display
BROWSE - TAPESCAN.OF.VOLUME.NES737 USING SAE ---------------- COLUMNS 001 072
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
000004 *** DATASET ID --------- 5.BACKUP.SEPT0996
000005 *** VOLUME SEQUENCE #--- 0001
000006 *** DATASET SEQUENCE #-- 0001
000007 *** CREATION DATE ------ 96253
000008 *** EXPIRATION DATE ---- 000000
000009 *** SECURITY FLAG ------ 0 (NONE)
000010 HDR2U000000000000P390BC2 /SCPMV5
54800
000011 *** RECORD FORMAT ------ U
000012 *** BLOCK LENGTH ------- 00000
000013 *** RECORD LENGTH ------ 00000
000014 *** CREATE JOB/STEP ---- P390BC2 /SCPMV5
000015 ***********************************-TAPEMARK-*************************
000016 ............................0..SCPMV5i.o..............................
000017 000000418800000020002000E00FF00ECDDEF8092314203120020600311020003000300
000018 0011108000000002E002E0E6A0FF0002374559065F0254000E0137008541E1020002100
000019 *** FIRST BLOCK SHOWN ABOVE, SIZE IS 00072.
000020 *** FILE CONTAINS 04465 BLOCKS
000021 ***********************************-TAPEMARK-*************************
000022 EOV15.BACKUP.SEPT0996NES73700010001
962530000000004465IBM OS/VS 37
000023 EOV2U000000000000P390BC2 /SCPMV5
54800
000024 ***********************************-TAPEMARK-*************************
****** ***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *************************
23-280
Chapter 24: DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Restore
Overview
Introduction
This chapter discusses SAE’s DSS Restore in general.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topics
See Page
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Dataset Restore Overview
24-282
DSS Dataset Restore Restrictions
24-283
24-281
GA
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Dataset Restore Overview
How DFSMSdss
Dataset Restore
Works
You can use the DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) Dataset Restore function to restore a
partitioned or sequential dataset from a DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) FULL or
DATASET backup.
The restore must be made to a like device type (for example, a 3390 backup
restored to 3390), but the number of cylinders on the device need not be the
same. If necessary, you can use SAE’s Copy function after the restore to copy
the dataset to a different device type. The target dataset for the restore must
already exist. You can use SAE’s Dataset Allocation function to allocate the
target dataset if it does not already exist (see page 16-169 for more
information).
The volume from which the DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) backup was created does
not have to be the volume on which the dataset is restored. If the target
dataset is smaller than the dataset being restored, SAE allocates additional
extents to accommodate the restore.
Volsers and
Volume
Restrictions
You can restore a dataset from a DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) backup that resides on
DASD or Tape. To restore a dataset from a DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) backup that
resides on tape, the tape Volsers of the backup must be known and the tape
volumes must be mounted in the correct order.
SAE’s LISTCAT/ALTERCAT function supports the extraction of the tape
volumes on which a cataloged dataset resides. If the DFSMSdss (DF/DSS)
backup dataset on tape is cataloged, you can use this feature to automatically
determine the required volumes and their sequence (see page 20-214 for more
information).
DFSMSdss
Restore and
FDR/DSF
Restore
The User Interface for performing a DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) restore is the same
as for performing a FDR/DSF restore. For this reason, both types of restore
are described together. From this point on, both DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) FULL
and DATASET backups are referred to as DSS.
24-282
DSS Dataset Restore Restrictions
Supported
Backups
SAE supports both DFSMSdss and DF/DSS backups that reside on DASD or
Tape. The supported backup types are FULL and DATASET for dataset
restore:
A DSS FULL backup is that of an entire DASD volume.
A DSS DATASET backup is that of selective datasets on a DASD volume.
COMPRESS Not
Supported
SAE does not support DSS backups created with the COMPRESS keyword.
The COMPRESS keyword instructs DSS to software compress each track
image before writing it to tape. The compression algorithm is unpublished
and proprietary to IBM, so SAE is not capable of de-compressing the track
images.
Hardware
Compression
Do not confuse this type of software compression with hardware compression
like IDRC used for Tape. SAE will restore from IDRC compressed tapes
(provided they are mounted on IDRC capable drives). With most installations
having IDRC-capable tape drives and doing hardware compression, NewEra
recommends that you do not use the DSS Software Compression for DSS
backups. This allows your DSS backups to be used for stand alone restores
using SAE.
Not Accurate for
DSS DATASET
Backups
DSS DATASET backups include a copy of the entire VTOC and not just the
VTOC Format-1 DSCBs for the actual datasets contained in the backup. For
this reason, the Dataset Selection Screen that lists the datasets contained
within a backup is not accurate for DSS DATASET backups and may list
datasets that are not contained within the backup.
VTOC Free
Space Invalid
Restoring a smaller volume to a device with larger capacity invalidates the
VTOC free space information. The VTOC free space information is rebuilt
when the next dataset allocation takes place on the volume using z/OS.
Unlabelled
Volumes
Unlabelled volumes do not appear on the Restore Volume Selection Screen.
To perform a full volume restore to a volume that does not already contain a
valid volume label, first initialize the volume using ‘V’ from the Hardware
Confirmation Volume Selection Screen (see page 20-254 for more
information).
Not All
DFSMSdss
Formats
Supported
SAE does not use DFSMSdss in processing dumps created by that product.
The file format of DFSMSdss dumps varies and may change from release to
release. SAE may not support all current DFSMSdss formats or the formats of
future DFSMSdss releases.
24-283
GA
Chapter 25: FDR/DSF Restore
Overview
Introduction
This chapter discusses SAE’s FDR Restore in general.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topics
GA
See Page
FDR/DSF Dataset Restore Overview
25-286
FDR Dataset Restore Restrictions
25-287
25-285
FDR/DSF Dataset Restore Overview
Using FDR
Dataset Restore
You can use the FDR Dataset Restore function to restore a partitioned or
sequential dataset from a FDR or DSF backup on DASD or Tape.
You must make the restore to a like device-type (for example, a 3390 backup
restored to 3390), but the number of cylinders on the device need not be the
same.
If necessary, you can use SAE’s Copy function after the restore to copy the
dataset to a different device type. The target dataset for the restore must
already exist.
You can use SAE’s dataset allocation function to allocate the target dataset if
it does not already exist. The volume from which the FDR or DSF backup
was created does not have to be the volume on which the dataset is restored.
If the target dataset is smaller than the dataset being restored, SAE allocates
additional extents to accommodate the restore.
Restoring a
Dataset from
FDR or DSF
Backup
You can restore a dataset from a FDR or DSF backup that resides on DASD
or Tape. To restore a dataset from an FDR or DSF backup that resides on
tape, you must know the tape Volsers of the backup, and the tape volumes
must be mounted in the correct order.
SAE’s LISTCAT/ALTERCAT function supports the extraction of the tape
volumes on which a cataloged dataset resides. If the FDR or DSF backup
dataset is cataloged, you can use this feature to automatically determine the
required volumes and their sequence (see page 20-214 for more information).
FDR and DSF
User Interface
The user interface for performing an FDR or DSF restore is the same as for
performing a DSS restore. For this reason, both types of restore are described
together. The sample screens shown are for DSS but the corresponding FDR
screens are very similar. From here on, both FDR and DSF backups are
referred to as FDR.
25-286
FDR Dataset Restore Restrictions
FDR and DSF
Backups
SAE supports both FDR and DSF backups that reside on DASD or Tape.
SAE supports both FDR and DSF (see restrictions below) backups for dataset
restore.
A FDR backup is that of an entire DASD volume.
A DSF backup is that of selective datasets on a DASD volume.
COMPRESS Not
Supported
SAE does not support FDR or DSF backups created with the COMPRESS
keyword. The COMPRESS=keyword parameter instructs FDR to software
compress each track image before writing it to tape. The compression
algorithm is unpublished and proprietary to Innovative Data Processing, so
SAE is not capable of de-compressing the track images.
Hardware
Compression
Do not confuse this type of software compression with hardware compression
like IDRC. SAE will restore from IDRC compressed tapes (provided they are
mounted on IDRC capable drives). With most installations having IDRCcapable tape drives and doing hardware compression, NewEra recommends
that you do not use the FDR Software Compression for FDR backups. This
allows your FDR backups to be used for stand alone restores using SAE.
DSF Backups
With VTOC
Supported
SAE only supports DSF backups that include the VTOC.
VTOC Free
Space Invalid
Restoring a smaller volume to a device with larger capacity invalidates the
VTOC free space information. The VTOC free space information is rebuilt
when the next dataset allocation takes place on the volume using z/OS.
Unlabelled
Volumes
Unlabelled volumes do not appear on the Restore Volume Selection Screen.
To perform a full volume restore to a volume that does not already contain a
valid volume label, first initialize the volume using ‘V’ from the Hardware
Confirmation Volume Selection Screen (see page 20-254 for more
information).
Not All FDR
Formats
Supported
SAE does not use FDR in processing backups created by that product. The
file format of FDR backups varies and may change from release to release.
SAE may not support all current FDR formats or the formats of future FDR
releases.
The VTOC is included for DSF backups that specify the DSN=VTOC
specification. NewEra recommends that all DSF backups of system datasets
include the TYPE=DSF,DSN=VTOC specification so you can use these
backups for stand alone dataset restores using SAE.
25-287
GA
Chapter 26: DSS or FDR Restore
Overview
Introduction
This chapter discusses SAE’s DSS or FDR Restore feature in detail.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Preparing for a DSS or FDR Restore
26-290
Full Volume Restore Requirements
26-291
Obtaining Backup Tape Volsers
26-292
Obtaining Tape Drive Unit Addresses
26-294
Obtaining Dataset Information
26-295
INSPECT
26-296
Performing a DSS or FDR Restore
26-300
Full Volume Restore Target Identification
26-301
Identifying the Tape Volumes
26-302
Tape Mount Options
26-304
First Volume Mount
26-306
Backup Information
26-307
Dataset Restore Source Dataset Selection
26-308
Restore Confirmation
26-309
Restore Time
26-311
Performing a DSS or FDR Compare
26-313
Full Volume DSS/FDR Compare
26-314
DSS/FDR Dataset Compare
26-316
26-289
Preparing for a DSS or FDR Restore
Dataset Restore
Requirements
To perform a stand alone dataset restore from a DSS or FDR backup using
SAE, the following are required:
If restoring from a DSS or FDR backup that resides on DASD:
The name and location (volume) of the DSS or FDR backup dataset on DASD.
The name and location (volume) of an existing target dataset.
Dataset name of the source dataset (dataset that was backed up).
If restoring from a DSS or FDR backup that resides on tape:
Determining the
Requirements
Tape Volsers of the DSS or FDR backup tapes, and their correct sequence.
Unit addresses of the tape drives to be used.
The name and location (volume) of the existing target dataset.
Dataset name of the source dataset (dataset that was backed up).
SAE contains several functions that help you to determine these requirements.
These functions are described in the following sections. If you have all the
required information, you may skip over these sections.
26-290
Full Volume Restore Requirements
Full Volume
Restore
Requirements
To perform a stand alone full volume restore from a DSS or FDR backup
using SAE, the following are required:
If restoring from a DSS or FDR backup that resides on DASD:
The name and location (volume) of the DSS or FDR backup dataset on DASD.
The Volser or unit address of the volume to be restored.
If restoring from a DSS or FDR backup that resides on Tape:
Determining the
Requirements
Tape Volsers of the DSS or FDR backup tapes and their correct sequence.
Unit addresses of the tape drives to use.
The Volser or unit address of the volume to be restored.
SAE contains several functions that help you to determine these requirements.
These functions are described in the following sections. If you have all the
required information, you may skip over these sections.
26-291
GA
Obtaining Backup Tape Volsers
Extracting
Required Volsers
When restoring from Tape, if you do not know the volume serial numbers of
the DSS or FDR backup that you wish to use, but you have cataloged your
backup datasets, you can use the Action Services LISTCAT/ALTERCAT
Capture command to extract the required Volsers (see page 20-214 for more
information). You must know at least the high level prefix of the cataloged
backup datasets.
The LISTCAT/ALTERCAT Capture command can be useful in determining
the correct backup tapes, even if you are performing a full volume restore
with another stand alone restore utility.
Searching for the
Volume
If you know the name of the z/OS Catalog under which your backup datasets
are cataloged, you can have the Action Services Unit Selection Screen search
for the volume that contains the catalog:
Step
Action
1.
Select the volume from the Volume Selection Screen.
2.
On the Dataset Selection List, locate and select the Catalog.
3.
On the ALTERCAT selection list, locate the backup tape dataset you
want to use.
4.
Next to the backup tape dataset, place the line command ‘C’.
5.
Press Enter.
Action Services
Unit Selection
Screen
LISTCAT --- MVSV5.MASTER.CATALOG ------------------------- ROW
392 OF 1420
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
ENTRY TYPE
VOLSER DEVICE
c P390.MVSV5R.BACKUP.OCT1096
NONVSAM
NES591 3480
>
Volume Serial
Numbers
SAE captures and displays the volume serial numbers of the associated tapes
later in the restore process.
Using the Master
Catalog
If you do not know the name of the z/OS Catalog under which your backup
datasets are cataloged, you must follow the alias entries from your Master
Catalog.
If you do not know the name and location of your Master Catalog, use the z/OS
Inspect application to access the Master Catalog.
If you know the name and location of the Master Catalog, then use Action
Services to get to the ALTERCAT Selection list for the Master.
Continued on next page
26-292
Obtaining Backup Tape Volsers, Continued
Locating the
Backup Datasets
When you are in the ALTERCAT selection list for the Master Catalog,
perform a locate on the high level prefix for your backup dataset names.
If you find the backup datasets cataloged in the Master Catalog, you can use
the ‘C’ capture command as described above.
If, however, you find the high level prefix is an alias entry, then note the
name of the associated User Catalog and do a locate on that name. You will
see the User Catalog entry and the volume on which it resides. You now
know the name and location of the catalog in which your backup datasets are
cataloged and can proceed as described above.
26-293
GA
Obtaining Tape Drive Unit Addresses
Hardware
Confirmation
Application
When restoring from Tape, if you do not know the addresses of the tape
drives attached to the system on which SAE is running, you can use the
Hardware Confirmation application to list them (see page 20-244 for more
information).
Procedure
Using the Hardware Confirmation application, enter only the appropriate
device types (for example, 3480, 3490, 3590) on the Unit Selection screen,
and press Enter. The resulting Device Selection Screen lists all attached
devices that meet your specification.
Running Tape
Scan
If you run Tape Scans to determine the contents or volume sequence numbers
of tapes, select a tape drive from the Device Selection Screen and you are
taken directly into the Tape Scan with the tape device address already copied
over.
26-294
Obtaining Dataset Information
Dataset Restore
For dataset restore, if the target dataset already exists, you can use normal
Action Services to locate the dataset.
If you need to allocate a new dataset as the target dataset for the restore, you
may require dataset information (DCB) about the source dataset. You can use
the DSS INSPECT and FDR INSPECT functions to view the Dataset
Information Screen for a Dataset contained within a DSS or FDR Backup.
See the description of the Inspect functions for more information.
26-295
GA
INSPECT
Using DSS
INSPECT
You can use the DSS INSPECT and FDR INSPECT functions to display
information about:
a backup and the datasets contained within.
the type of backup.
the date when it was taken.
a list of the datasets contained within the dump (see DSS Dataset Backup
restrictions).
You can select datasets to display the Dataset Information Screen that shows
DCB characteristics and the physical position of the dataset’s extents on the
original volume.
Backup on DASD
or Tape
When you select Option 4 (DSS Inspect) or Option 7 (FDR Inspect) from the
Restore Services Selection Screen, you must then make a selection based on
whether the DSS or FDR backup dataset resides on DASD or Tape.
RESTORE SOURCE (DUMP) SELECTION--------------------------------------OPTION ===>
1
TAPE SOURCE
- DSS PHYSICAL DUMP DATASET IS ON TAPE
2
DASD SOURCE
- DSS PHYSICAL DUMP DATASET IS ON DASD
NOTE: IF SOURCE DUMP DATASET IS ON DASD, SELECTION SCREENS WILL FOLLOW
FOR UNIT AND DATASET
Locating the
backup dataset
on DASD
When using Option 4 (DSS Inspect) or Option 7 (FDR Inspect), if you select
Option 2 to indicate that the backup source is on DASD, a Unit Selection
screen will be displayed. Once the DASD Unit that contains the backup
dataset is selected, a Dataset Selection screen is displayed. Instructional
screens appear to remind you of the purpose of each selection. The Unit
Selection and Dataset Selection screens and process are not described further
in this selection as these are exactly the same as documented in Action
Services.
Once the dataset containing the backup is selected, the Inspect process will
continue as documented below under “Inspect Backup Information Screen for
backup on DASD”.
26-296
Opening the
Inspect Tape
Mount Screen
When using Option 4 (DSS Inspect) or Option 7 (FDR Inspect), if you select
Option 1 to indicate that the backup source is on Tape, the Inspect Tape
Mount Screen appears.
If you use the LISTCAT/ALTERCAT Capture command, the Volser field is
filled with the first Volser of the backup.
Inspect Tape
Mount Screen
TAPE MOUNT REQUEST ---------------------------- MOUNT FIRST DSS BACKUP VOLUME
COMMAND ==>
FOR TAPE MOUNT, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
- MOUNT THE DESIRED TAPE AND READY THE DRIVE
- SUPPLIED REQUIRED VALUES
- PRESS ENTER
TAPE DRIVE UNIT ADDRESS
==>
TAPE VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER ==> NES591
DATASET'S FILE SEQ NUMBER ==> 1
Procedure
Mount the required volume and identify the tape device, then press Enter to
continue. If the tape contains a valid backup for the selected Inspect (DSS or
FDR), the Inspect Backup Information Screen appears.
Inspect Backup
Information
Screen for
backup on DASD
Once the DSS or FDR backup dataset has been opened, if on DASD, this
Backup Information screen is displayed.
DFSMSdss BACKUP INFORMATION -------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
DUMP INFORMATION
DASD VOLSER: VPWRKR
VOLUME SEQ NUMBER:
DATASET SEQ NUMBER:
DATASET NAME: NESOFT.FULLVOL.BACKUP.VPCTGF.CYL100.JAN1317
BACKUP INFORMATION
DUMP TYPE:
FULL
BACKUP DATE: 17/01/13
SOURCE VOLUME: VPCTGF
DFSMSdss VER: V1R3.0
TIME: 14:24
DEVICE TYPE: 3390
CYLS:
100
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
Inspect Backup
Information
Screen for
backup on Tape
Once the DSS or FDR backup dataset has been opened, if on Tape, this
Backup Information screen is displayed.
DFSMSdss BACKUP INFORMATION ------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
TAPE INFORMATION
TAPE VOLSER: NES591
DATASET NAME: 5R.BACKUP.OCT1096
BACKUP INFORMATION
DUMP TYPE:
FULL
BACKUP DATE: 96/10/11
SOURCE VOLUME: MVSV5R
VOLUME SEQ NUMBER:
DATASET SEQ NUMBER:
DFSMSdss VER: V1R3.0
TIME: 14:04
DEVICE TYPE: 3380
CYLS:
1
1
2655
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
26-297
GA
Continuing the
Procedure
Inspect Dataset
Selection Screen
Displaying the
Dataset
Information
Screen
To continue and have the Dataset Selection List displayed for the backup,
press Enter. To end, use PF3.
DATA SETS ON VOLUME MVSV5R (=DSS) ------------------------------ROW 562 OF 625
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
ORG RF LRECL BLKSZ #EX LAST REF
SYS1.LPALIB
PO U
0 32760
5 96/07/12
SYS1.MACLIB
PO FB
80 23440
2 96/09/18
SYS1.MIGLIB
PO U
0 32760
1 96/09/21
SYS1.MODGEN
PO FB
80 23440
1 96/09/18
SYS1.MSGENP
PO VB
259 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.MSGENU
PO VB
259 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.NUCLEUS
PO U
0 32760
1 96/09/21
SYS1.NVULIB
PO U
0 32760
3 95/10/26
SYS1.OVERLIB
PO VB 8205 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.PDEFLIB
PO VB 8205 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.PSEGLIB
PO VB 8205 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.README
PO FB
80 23440
1 95/10/31
SYS1.SADMMAP
PO FB
400 23200
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SADMMOD
PO U
0 32760
1 96/09/21
SYS1.SADMPCF
PO FB
400 23200
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SADMSYM
PO FB
400 23200
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SAFHFORT
PO U
0 32760
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SAMPLIB
PO FB
80 23440
4 96/09/21
SYS1.SANRHLP
PO FB
80 23440
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SANRMSG
PO FB
80 23440
1 95/10/26
The Inspect Dataset Selection list displays the datasets that are contained
within the backup. The unit address field for the DASD volume displays as
=DSS or =FDR to indicate the volume is contained within a backup.
To display the Dataset Information Screen for a dataset, select it with the ‘S’
or ‘I’ line command.
Continued on next page
26-298
INSPECT, Continued
Inaccurate
Contents
The Dataset Selection list may not accurately reflect the datasets contained
within the backup for DSS DATASET Backups.
See DSS Restrictions (page 24-283) for more information.
DSS or FDR
Dataset
Information
Screen
------------- DATA SET INFORMATION ------------------------- UNDER SMS CONTROL
COMMAND ==>
EXT STARTING ENDING
VOLUME SERIAL ==> MVSV5R
# CCCCHHHH CCCCHHHH
DEVICE TYPE
==> 3380
UNIT ==> =DSS
1 094E0000 0977000E
2 09780000 097B000E
DSN: SYS1.LPALIB
3 097C0000 097F000E
4 09800000 0983000E
SPACE UNIT
==> CYLS
5 05780000 057B000E
PRIMARY QTY
==> 42
SECONDARY QTY ==> 4
DIRECTORY BLKS ==> ??????
RECORD FORMAT ==> U
RECORD LENGTH ==> 0
BLOCK SIZE
==> 32760
ORGANIZATION
==> PO
ALLOCATED CYLS ==> 58
Dataset
Information
Screen Contents
The Dataset Information Screen displays the attributes of the dataset that is
contained within the backup.
The unit address field for the DASD volume displays as =DSS or =FDR to
indicate the volume is contained within a backup. This information is
extracted from the VTOC that is contained within the backup. The VTOC
does not contain information on the number of directory blocks within a PDS.
For this reason, a value of ?????? displays for the directory blocks field.
Directory Blocks
are Overwritten
If you are using the Dataset Information to allocate the target dataset, do not
be concerned with the number of directory blocks. The restore completely
overwrites the target dataset, therefore, the number of directory blocks in the
target dataset prior to the restore is of no consequence.
Determining the
Extent’s Physical
Location
You can use the dataset extent layout (shown on the right side of the display)
to determine the physical location of the dataset’s extents on the original
volume.
26-299
GA
Performing a DSS or FDR Restore
Dataset Restore
Target
Identification
If you perform a Dataset restore (Option 5 - DSS Dataset or Option 8 -FDR
Dataset), the first thing to do is identify the target dataset (that the restore
process overwrites).
The target dataset must exist before you can perform the restore. If the target
dataset does not exist, you may use the Inspect function to determine the
dataset characteristics of the source dataset, and then use SAE’s Dataset
Allocation to create the target dataset.
See ‘Preparing for a DSS or FDR Restore’ for more information.
Identifying the
Target Dataset
You can identify the target dataset with the normal Unit Selection, Volume
Selection and Dataset Selection Screens. Instructional screens appear to
remind you of the purpose of the selection (in this case, target dataset
selection).
For more information on the Unit Selection, Volume Selection and Dataset
Selection screens, see Actions Services.
26-300
Full Volume Restore Target Identification
Full Volume
Restore
If you perform a Full Volume Restore (Option 6 - DSS Volume or Option 9 FDR Volume), the first thing to do is identify the target volume, which the
restore process then overwrites.
Identifying the
Target Volume
You can identify the target volume with the normal Unit Selection and
Volume Selection Screens. Instructional screens appear to remind you of the
purpose of the selection (in this case, target dataset selection).
For more information on the Unit Selection and Volume Selection screens,
see Actions Services.
26-301
GA
Identifying the Tape Volumes
Backup on DASD
or Tape
After you identify the target for the restore (either a specific target dataset or
an entire target volume), you must then make a selection based on whether
the DSS or FDR backup dataset resides on DASD or Tape.
RESTORE SOURCE (DUMP) SELECTION--------------------------------------OPTION ===>
1
TAPE SOURCE
- DSS PHYSICAL DUMP DATASET IS ON TAPE
2
DASD SOURCE
- DSS PHYSICAL DUMP DATASET IS ON DASD
NOTE: IF SOURCE DUMP DATASET IS ON DASD, SELECTION SCREENS WILL FOLLOW
FOR UNIT AND DATASET
Locating the
backup dataset
on DASD
When performing a DSS or FDR restore operations, if you select Option 2 to
indicate that the backup source is on DASD, a Unit Selection screen will be
displayed. Once the DASD Unit that contains the backup dataset is selected, a
Dataset Selection screen is displayed. Instructional screens appear to remind
you of the purpose of each selection. The Unit Selection and Dataset
Selection screens and process are not described further in this selection as
these are exactly the same as documented in Action Services.
Once the dataset containing the backup is selected, the restore process will
continue as documented below under “Backup Information Screen for backup
on DASD”.
Tape List Screen
Overview
When performing a DSS or FDR restore operations, if you select Option 1 to
indicate that the backup source is on Tape, the Tape List Screen displays.
The Tape List Screen lists the DSS or FDR backup tape volumes, and tape
units that will be used for the restore. If you use the LISTCAT/ALTERCAT
Capture command to extract the tape volume serial numbers for a cataloged
backup dataset, then those Volsers automatically appear on the Tape List
Screen. The Tape List Screen provides the ability to associate a tape volume
with a tape device and, with tape volume pre-mounting, avoids any delays
and requirements for manual intervention during the restore.
Optional
The use of the Tape List Screen is optional; if you leave it blank (or cleared
with the CLEAR command), you must then enter the tape unit address and
tape volume serial information individually each time a mount is required.
26-302
Tape List Screen
TAPE LIST -------------------------------------------- LIST REQUIRED DSS TAPES
COMMAND ==>
VOLUME LIST FOR DATASET: P390.MVSV5R.BACKUP.OCT1096
DEVICE TYPE: 3480
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
VOLSER UNIT
NES591
NES618
NES763
NES432
NES827
THE TAPE LIST IS USED TO PROVIDE THE LIST OF
REQUIRED VOLUMES. YOU MAY ASSOCIATE A VOLUME
WITH A TAPE DRIVE AND PRE-MOUNT TAPES TO SPEED
UP MOUNT PROCESSING. SUPPLIED VALUES WILL BE
SUBSTITUTED WHEN A TAPE MOUNT IS REQUESTED.
USING THE 'C' LINE COMMAND IN LISTCAT WILL
CAPTURE THE VOLUME LIST FOR A CATALOGED TAPE
DATASET AND AUTOMATICALLY FILL IN THE VOLUMES.
ENTER COMMAND 'CLEAR' TO CLEAR ENTRIES.
USE IS OPTIONAL, CLEAR ENTRIES TO AVOID USE.
PRESS PF3 TO CONTINUE
Up to Ten Tape
Volumes
The Tape List Screen provides for the identification of up to ten tape
volumes.
If you use the LISTCAT/ALTERCAT Capture command, the Tape List
Screen already contains the list of required volumes. If you did not use the
Capture command, you must enter the required volumes, in volume sequence
order, on the Tape List Screen.
Associated Tape
Unit Addresses
The Tape List Screen also has ten input fields for the tape unit addresses
associated with each tape volume. The Tape Mount processing during the
restore is affected by the values supplied in the Unit field on the Tape List
Screen. See Tape Mount Options for a list of the various options.
26-303
GA
Tape Mount Options
Complete Premount - Fastest
and No
Intervention
If you have a sufficient number of tapes drives available to pre-mount each
tape volume, then you can avoid any manual intervention as each tape is
required.
Mount each volume on a Tape Drive and then specify in the Unit field
associated with each volume the Tape Drive Unit Address that was used. SAE
processes each volume sequentially; and on volume switch, SAE attempts to
read from the specified Tape Unit. If the tape is pre-mounted and the Volser
correct, SAE continues processing without any manual intervention.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Two Drive Swap
- Fastest But
Intervention
VOLSER
NES591
NES618
NES763
NES432
NES827
UNIT
570
571
572
573
574
If you have two tape drives available, you can ensure that the next tape is
always ‘pre-mount’.
In the Unit field associated with each volume, specify one of the two Tape
Drive Unit Addresses, alternating between them. Mount the first two tapes on
the available drives and as each tape unloads, mount the next one. This
technique allows SAE to continue with the next tape immediately, without
having to wait for tape rewind and unload. SAE processes each volume
sequentially, and on volume switch, SAE attempts to read from the specified
Tape Unit. If the tape is pre-mounted and the Volser correct, SAE continues
processing without any manual intervention.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
VOLSER
NES591
NES618
NES763
NES432
NES827
UNIT
570
571
570
571
570
Continued on next page
26-304
Tape Mount Options, Continued
Single Drive with
Cartridge
Loader - Slower
But No
Intervention
If you only have a single tape drive available (which has a cartridge loader),
then you can use it to perform the tape mounts.
Enter the cartridges in the correct order into the Cartridge Loader and ensure
the loader is not in Manual Mode. Specify the Tape Drive Unit Address in the
Unit field associated with first volume. You may leave the other Unit fields
blank.
This technique avoids manual intervention, but requires SAE to wait for
rewind/unload before the next tape can begin processing. When SAE
completes the processing of one volume on a Tape Unit that has an installed
Cartridge Loader and the next volume’s field is blank, SAE waits a preset
number of seconds (to allow for the cartridge to auto load) then attempts to
read from the specified Tape Unit. If the tape is mounted and the Volser
correct, SAE continues processing without any manual intervention.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Single Drive –
Slowest, With
Intervention
VOLSER UNIT
NES591 570
NES618
NES763
NES432
NES827
If you only have a single tape drive available, you may choose either to enter
the same tape drive unit address for each tape or leave the fields blank.
In either case, you must manually mount the next tape volume after unloading
the previous volume. When the Tape Mount Screen appears, you must enter
the unit address (if blank) and press Enter for each mount operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Continue
VOLSER UNIT
NES591
NES618
NES763
NES432
NES827
After supplying the Tape List Screen values, use PF3 to continue.
26-305
GA
First Volume Mount
First Tape
Required
Tape Mount
Screen
When you have completed identifying the Target and processing the Tape
List, the restore process requires the first tape of the DSS or FDR backup. A
Tape Mount Screen appears.
TAPE MOUNT REQUEST -------------------------- MOUNT FIRST DSS BACKUP VOLUME
COMMAND ==>
FOR TAPE MOUNT, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
- MOUNT THE DESIRED TAPE AND READY THE DRIVE
- SUPPLIED REQUIRED VALUES
- PRESS ENTER
TAPE DRIVE UNIT ADDRESS
==> 570
TAPE VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER ==> NES591
DATASET'S FILE SEQ NUMBER ==> 1
Tape List Screen
Information
Substituted
SAE substitutes the first tape volume and its associated unit address from the
Tape List Screen in the Tape Mount Screen.
Procedure
If one or both of these values were not entered on the Tape List Screen:
Step
Action
1.
Enter the required Unit Address and/or Tape Volume Serial Number
values on the Tape Mount Screen.
2.
Press Enter after the volume has been mounted and the tape device is
ready.
26-306
Backup Information
Backup
Information
Screen Overview
Backup
Information
Screen for
backup on DASD
If the backup dataset on DASD or Tape contains a valid backup for the
selected Restore (DSS or FDR), the Backup Information Screen appears
DFSMSdss BACKUP INFORMATION -------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
DUMP INFORMATION
DASD VOLSER: VPWRKR
VOLUME SEQ NUMBER:
DATASET SEQ NUMBER:
DATASET NAME: NESOFT.FULLVOL.BACKUP.VPCTGF.CYL100.JAN1317
BACKUP INFORMATION
DUMP TYPE:
FULL
BACKUP DATE: 17/01/13
SOURCE VOLUME: VPCTGF
DFSMSdss VER: V1R3.0
TIME: 14:24
DEVICE TYPE: 3390
CYLS:
100
RESTORE TARGET INFORMATION
TARGET VOLUME: ERASED
DEVICE TYPE: 3390
100
CYLS:
ADDR: 0220
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
Backup
Information
Screen for
backup on Tape
DFSMSdss BACKUP INFORMATION ------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
TAPE INFORMATION
TAPE VOLSER: NES591
DATASET NAME: 5R.BACKUP.OCT1096
BACKUP INFORMATION
DUMP TYPE:
FULL
BACKUP DATE: 96/10/11
SOURCE VOLUME: MVSV5R
VOLUME SEQ NUMBER:
DATASET SEQ NUMBER:
DFSMSdss VER: V1R3.0
TIME: 14:04
DEVICE TYPE: 3380
CYLS:
RESTORE TARGET INFORMATION
TARGET VOLUME: MVSV5R
DEVICE TYPE: 3380
TARGET DATASET SYS1.LPALIB
CYLS:
1
2655
2655
ADDR: 2C0
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
Screen
Information
This screen shows:
Information on the type of backup
When the backup was taken
Restore target information
Press Enter to continue.
26-307
GA
Dataset Restore Source Dataset Selection
Select the Source
Dataset
If you are performing a dataset restore, then after the DSS or FDR backup
dataset opens and the Backup Information Screen displays, you must select
the source of the restore operation.
The source dataset is the dataset you want to restore from a backup. You must
use the Restore Dataset Selection Screen to select the dataset to restore.
Restore Dataset
Selection Screen
Unit Address
Field
DATA SETS ON VOLUME MVSV5R (=DSS) ---------------- SELECT RESTORE FROM DATASET
COMMAND ==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
DATA SET NAME
ORG RF LRECL BLKSZ #EX LAST REF
SYS1.LPALIB
PO U
0 32760
5 96/07/12
SYS1.MACLIB
PO FB
80 23440
2 96/09/18
SYS1.MIGLIB
PO U
0 32760
1 96/09/21
SYS1.MODGEN
PO FB
80 23440
1 96/09/18
SYS1.MSGENP
PO VB
259 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.MSGENU
PO VB
259 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.NUCLEUS
PO U
0 32760
1 96/09/21
SYS1.NVULIB
PO U
0 32760
3 95/10/26
SYS1.OVERLIB
PO VB 8205 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.PDEFLIB
PO VB 8205 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.PSEGLIB
PO VB 8205 23476
1 95/10/26
SYS1.README
PO FB
80 23440
1 95/10/31
SYS1.SADMMAP
PO FB
400 23200
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SADMMOD
PO U
0 32760
1 96/09/21
SYS1.SADMPCF
PO FB
400 23200
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SADMSYM
PO FB
400 23200
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SAFHFORT
PO U
0 32760
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SAMPLIB
PO FB
80 23440
4 96/09/21
SYS1.SANRHLP
PO FB
80 23440
1 95/10/26
SYS1.SANRMSG
PO FB
80 23440
1 95/10/26
The DASD volume’s unit address field displays as =DSS or =FDR to indicate
if the volume is contained within a backup.
To select the Dataset you want to restore, use the ‘S’ line command.
List May Not be
Accurate
The Dataset Selection list may not accurately reflect the datasets contained
within the backup for DSS DATASET Backups.
See DSS Restrictions (page 24-283) for more information.
26-308
Restore Confirmation
Overview
Before starting a restore operation, the Restore Confirmation Screen displays.
Restore
Confirmation
Screen
DFSMSdss DATASET RESTORE --------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
TAPE INFORMATION
TAPE VOLSER: NES591
DATASET NAME: 5R.BACKUP.OCT1096
VOLUME SEQ NUMBER:
DATASET SEQ NUMBER:
BACKUP INFORMATION
DUMP TYPE:
FULL
DFSMSdss VER: V1R3.0
BACKUP DATE: 96/10/11
TIME: 14:04
SOURCE VOLUME: MVSV5R
DEVICE TYPE: 3380
CYLS:
SOURCE DATASET SYS1.LPALIB
RESTORE TARGET INFORMATION
TARGET VOLUME: MVSV5R
DEVICE TYPE: 3380
TARGET DATASET SYS1.LPALIB
CYLS:
1
1
2655
2655
ADDR: 2C0
RESTORE WILL OVER WRITE TARGET DATASET
PRESS ENTER TO RESTORE, PF3 TO CANCEL
Carefully Review
Before
Proceeding
Carefully review the source and target selections:
For full volume restore, SAE overwrites the entire target volume.
For dataset restore, SAE overwrites the entire target dataset.
If necessary, SAE increases the size of the Target dataset. At the end of the
restore, the Target dataset will have the source dataset’s DCB characteristics.
SAE uses the physical extents of the target dataset to hold the restored source
dataset.
To proceed with the restore operation, press Enter. To cancel the restore
operation, press PF3.
Restore Status
Messages
During the restore operation, the Restore Confirmation Screen remains
visible, but the confirmation messages on the lower portion are replaced by
restore status messages.
Dataset Restore
Status Messages
For Dataset restore, these messages indicate:
the number of tracks to be restored,
the number that have been restored,
the next source DASD cylinder that is required and
the current DASD cylinder that is being extracted from the backup dataset.
RESTORED
15 OF
870 TRACKS
WORKING...SEARCHING TAPE FOR CYL 094F, CURRENTLY AT 094E
Full Volume
Restore Message
For Full Volume restore, the message indicates the number of the cylinder
that is being restored.
RESTORING CYLINDER
834
Continued on next page
26-309
GA
Restore Confirmation, Continued
End-of-Volume
When restoring from a backup dataset on tape, when SAE encounters an Endof-Volume on a backup tape, the Tape Mount Screen appears.
If the tape volume is pre-mounted or you are using a Cartridge Loader, the
Tape Mount screen appears for a few seconds with input inhibited, and then it
returns to the Restore Confirmation Screen. If the process requires
intervention, the Tape Mount Screen displays and, depending on the
information supplied on the Tape List Screen, may require input values.
After mounting the next tape and supplying any necessary input values, press
Enter to continue processing.
26-310
Restore Time
Physical Dumps
The backups created by DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) and FDR/DSF are physical
dumps of DASD volumes. This means that the DASD Tracks are dumped to
tape in an order that is consistent with their location on the DASD volume,
and with little regard to which tracks make up a particular dataset.
Restoring a
Single Dataset
Datasets are made up of extents, with each extent being a group of one or
more tracks somewhere on the DASD volume.
To perform a single dataset restore from a physical DASD backup, you must
restore each track from each extent. However, the tracks contained within a
physical dump backup dataset are dumped from the low DASD track address
(for example, CYL 0000 TRACK 0000) to the high DASD track address.
Sequential Media
The backup is a sequential dataset. This means that when restoring from a
backup, to read the highest track dumped within a backup requires that SAE
reads all the dumped tracks. The amount of time required to restore a single
dataset from a physical dump varies greatly depending on the location of the
datasets extents relative to the start of the volume.
Example
Consider the following examples:
SYS1.TEST1
EXT STARTING
CCCCHHHH
1 00700000
2 00B20000
3 00600000
4 00610000
5 00620000
SYS1.TEST2
ENDING
CCCCHHHH
00A4000E
00B2000E
0060000E
0061000E
0062000E
Total tracks: 128
EXT STARTING
CCCCHHHH
1 004E0000
2 09780000
3 00200000
ENDING
CCCCHHHH
004E000E
0978000E
0020000E
Total tracks: 45
Dataset SYS1.TEST1 is much larger and is in many more extents than dataset
SYS1.TEST2. It will be restored much faster because restoring the second
extent of dataset SYS1.TEST2 requires Cylinder x’0978’ (2424) and this high
addressed track is close to the end of the backup tape(s). All of dataset
SYS1.TEST1 can be restored by processing the backup tape(s) to Cylinder
x’00B2’ (178).
Inspect Function
You can use the Inspect function to view the Dataset Information for a dataset
within the backup and see its extent layout. This provides an idea of how
much data must be read before you can completely restore the dataset.
Continued on next page
26-311
GA
Restore Time, Continued
Dataset Backups
Contain Less
Data
Dataset backups (DSS DATASET and DSF) will, in most cases, contain less
data than a full volume dump, because only the tracks required for the
selected datasets are dumped. Restore operations from these types of dumps
take less time versus full volume dumps.
Closer is Faster
The closer the entire dataset is to the beginning of the volume, the quicker the
single dataset restore runs.
26-312
Performing a DSS or FDR Compare
DASD Track and
Tape Records
DASD tracks contained within a DSS or FDR backup dataset on tape may be
broken into several tape records or one tape record may contain several
DASD tracks.
SAE must extract and re-construct these track images to perform the restore.
Since SAE is not used to create these backup datasets, changes in the way
DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) or FDR/DSF create these backup tapes may affect
SAE’s ability to properly re-construct each track image.
Compare
Function
SAE provides a DSS and FDR Full Volume and Dataset Compare function to
test SAE’s support of backup tapes created by DFSMSdss (DF/DSS) and
FDR/DSF.
These Compare functions are similar to restore in that each track image is
extracted and re-constructed from the backup tape. Unlike Restore, however,
the Compare function reads the corresponding track from the target volume
and compares the two. No writes are performed to the target volume or
dataset.
The idea behind the Compare functions is that a DSS or FDR backup is taken
of a DASD Volume or dataset and then SAE is used to compare the contents
of the backup to the original. Of course, you must ensure that the volume or
dataset cannot be altered between the time of the backup and the time of the
compare. If SAE finds no differences, you can be confident that SAE is
capable of extracting and re-constructing track images from your current
release of DSS or FDR.
26-313
GA
Full Volume DSS/FDR Compare
Overview
With the Full Volume Compare, SAE compares each DASD track contained
within a backup to the corresponding absolute track on the target volume.
For the test to be meaningful, the target volume must be the same volume
from which the backup was made and the volume must not have been altered
in any way since the backup was made.
Setting Up a
Compare Test
In setting up a compare test, select a DASD volume that is not in use (for
example, an old SYSRES volume) or a volume for which you can ensure
there is currently no write activity (your DLIB volume perhaps).
Perform your normal full volume dump (DSS or FDR) and then perform the
Full Volume Compare.
Invoking the Full
Compare
To invoke the Full Volume Compare, follow the same steps as if you were
going to perform a DSS or FDR restore, but stop at the Backup Information
Screen.
These steps include:
Step
Action
1.
Select the target volume (the one that was just backed up) and a target
dataset. For the Full Volume Compare, the target dataset is ignored, so
select any dataset on the volume.
2.
Identify the required backup on DASD or if on Tape, the volumes and
tape drives on the Tape List Screen.
3.
If the backup is on Tape, proceed with the first volume mount.
4.
When the Backup Information Screen appears, enter ‘COMPARE’ on
the Command Line.
DFSMSdss BACKUP INFORMATION -------------------------------------COMMAND ==> COMPARE
5.
CAUTION
Press Enter.
Pressing Enter without entering the ‘COMPARE’ command restores the
volume.
Continued on next page
26-314
Full Volume DSS/FDR Compare, Continued
If SAE Finds a
Difference
This invokes the Full Volume Compare function. SAE updates the status line
as each track from the backup tape is compared to the corresponding absolute
track on the target volume. SAE stops if it finds a difference.
In this case, press:
Track Compare
Report
Enter to continue,
PF3 to stop the compare process, or
PF1 to display the Track Compare Report.
If a difference is found and you are sure that updates to the volume have not
been made since the backup was taken, use PF1 to display the Track Compare
Report.
When the report displays, use the Browse PRINT command to print the Track
Compare Report. NewEra support staff requires this report to investigate the
problem.
26-315
GA
DSS/FDR Dataset Compare
Overview
With Dataset Compare, SAE compares each DASD track of the source
dataset contained within a backup tape to the corresponding relative track in
the target dataset.
As the Dataset Compare function compares relative tracks within the datasets
(unlike the Full Volume Compare which compares absolute tracks), the
source and target datasets do not have to be on the same volume or at the
same location on a volume.
For the test to be meaningful, the target dataset must be the same dataset from
which the backup was made, and the dataset must not have been altered in
any way since the backup was made. If the target dataset is smaller than the
source dataset, its size will be increased prior to the compare.
Comparing
Datasets
You can use Dataset Compare to compare a dataset within the backup to the
original dataset or to compare it to a dataset restored from the backup under
z/OS using DSS or FDR.
No Write
Activity
In setting up a Compare test, select a dataset for which you can ensure that
there is currently no write activity.
Invoking Dataset
Compare
To invoke Dataset Compare, follow the same steps as if you were going to
perform a DSS or FDR restore, but stop at the Restore Confirmation Screen.
These steps include:
Step
Action
1.
Select the target volume and a target dataset.
2.
Identify the required backup dataset. If on Tape, identify the needed
volumes and tape drives on the Tape List Screen.
3.
If the backup is on Tape, proceed with the first volume mount.
4.
Press Enter when the Backup Information Screen displays.
5.
Select the dataset from within the backup that is to be compared.
6.
Enter COMPARE on the command line when the Restore Confirmation
Screen displays.
DFSMSdss DATASET RESTORE ----------------------------------------COMMAND ==> COMPARE
7.
CAUTION
Press Enter. This invokes the Dataset Compare function.
Pressing Enter without entering the ‘COMPARE’ command restores the
dataset.
Continued on next page
26-316
DSS/FDR Dataset Compare, Continued
Status Line
Updates
SAE updates the status line as it compares each track from the backup source
dataset to the corresponding relative track of the target dataset.
In this case, press:
Printing the
Track Compare
Report
Enter to continue,
PF3 to stop the compare process, or
PF1 to display the Track Compare Report.
If a difference is found and you are sure that updates to the dataset have not
been made since the backup was taken, use PF1 to display the Track Compare
Report.
Once the report displays, use the Browse PRINT command to print the Track
Compare Report. NewEra support staff requires this report to investigate the
problem.
26-317
GA
Chapter 27: Performing a Volume Copy
Overview
Introduction
This chapter discusses SAE’s Volume Copy feature in detail.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Volume Copy Overview
27-320
Volume Copy Source and Target Identification
27-321
Copy Confirmation
27-322
27-319
Volume Copy Overview
Overview
You can use the Volume Copy function to copy an entire DASD volume from
one volume to another.
Copying a
Smaller Volume
The copy must be made between like device types (for example, 3390 to 3390).
The number of cylinders on the target device must be equal to or greater than the
number of cylinders on the source device.
When you copy a smaller volume to a device with larger capacity, the VTOC
free space information becomes invalid. The VTOC free space information is
rebuilt when the next dataset allocation takes place on the volume using z/OS.
27-320
Volume Copy Source and Target Identification
Identify the
Source Volume
If you perform a Volume Copy (Option 10 - Volume Copy), the first required
action is the identification of the source volume (the volume to be copied).
The identification of the source volume is performed with the normal Unit
Selection and Volume Selection Screens. An instructional screen appears to
remind you of the purpose of the selection (in this case, source volume
selection).
For more information on the Unit Selection and Volume Selection screens,
see Actions Services.
Identify the
Target Volume
After identifying the source volume, you must then identify the target volume
(the volume that is overwritten by the copy process).
The identification of the target volume is performed with the normal Unit
Selection, and Volume Selection Screens. An instructional screen appears to
remind you of the purpose of the selection (in this case, target volume
selection).
27-321
GA
Copy Confirmation
Overview
Copy
Confirmation
Screen
Prior to starting the Copy operation, the Copy Confirmation Screen appears.
SAE VOLUME INFORMATION --------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
SOURCE VOLUME INFORMATION
VOLUME: MVSV5R DEVICE TYPE: 3380
CYLS:
2655
ADDR: 02CA
TARGET VOLUME INFORMATION
VOLUME: SPARE1 DEVICE TYPE: 3380
CYLS:
2655
ADDR: 02F8
COPY WILL OVER WRITE TARGET DATASET
PRESS ENTER TO COPY, PF3 TO CANCEL
Review Source
and Target
Carefully review the source and target selections, as the entire target volume
is completely overwritten during a Copy.
To proceed with the copy operation, press Enter; to cancel, press PF3.
Confirmation
Messages
During the copy operation, the Copy Confirmation Screen remains visible,
but the confirmation messages on the lower portion are replaced by a copy
status message that indicates the cylinder number that is being copied.
For example:
COPYING CYLINDER
834
27-322
Chapter 28: Performing a Volume Compare
Overview
Introduction
This chapter discusses SAE’s performing a Volume Compare.
In This Part
This chapter contains the following topics:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Volume Compare Overview
28-324
Volume Compare Source and Target Identification
28-325
Compare Confirmation
28-326
28-323
Volume Compare Overview
Overview
The Volume Compare function compares an entire DASD volume to another.
The compare must be made between like device types (for example, 3390 to
3390), and the number of cylinders on the target device must be equal to or
greater than the number of cylinders on the source device.
Track Level
Compare
The Volume Compare performs a track level compare.
The primary purpose of a track level compare is to validate the volume copy
operations (for example, Snap Shot). It is not practical to use Volume
Compare to determine differences in logical records within datasets.
28-324
Volume Compare Source and Target Identification
Identify the
Source Volume
When you perform a Volume Compare (Option 11 - Volume Compare), you
must first identify the source volume (the first of the two volumes that are
compared).
To identify the source volume, use the normal Unit Selection and Volume
Selection Screens. An instructional screen appears to remind you of the
purpose of the selection (in this case, source volume selection).
For more information on the Unit Selection and Volume Selection screens,
see Actions Services.
Identify the
Target Volume
After identifying the source volume, you must identify the target volume (the
second of the two volumes that are compared).
To identify the target volume, use the normal Unit Selection and Volume
Selection Screens. An instructional screen appears to remind you of the
purpose of the selection (in this case, target volume selection).
28-325
GA
Compare Confirmation
Overview
Compare
Confirmation
Screen
Prior to starting the compare operation, the Compare Confirmation Screen
appears.
SAE VOLUME INFORMATION -------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==>
SOURCE VOLUME INFORMATION
VOLUME: MVSV5R DEVICE TYPE: 3380
CYLS:
2655
ADDR: 02CA
TARGET VOLUME INFORMATION
VOLUME: SPARE1 DEVICE TYPE: 3380
CYLS:
2655
ADDR: 02F8
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
To Proceed
To proceed with the compare operation, press Enter; to cancel, press PF3.
Compare Status
Message
During the compare operation, the Compare Confirmation Screen remains
visible, but the confirmation messages on the lower portion are replaced by a
compare status message that indicates the number of the track that have been
compared.
For example:
WORKING...COMPARING TRACK 0000 0000
Continued on next page
28-326
Compare Confirmation, Continued
Compare
Options
If SAE finds a difference, the Compare operation pauses and allows you to:
display the Track Compare Report
continue the compare (press Enter)
stop the compare operation (use PF3)
To view the Track Compare Report, use PF1.
A sample Track Compare Report is shown below. It contains the source and
target tracks in character and hexadecimal and the track offset of where the
difference was found.
Track Compare
Report
BROWSE - TRACK.COMPARE.REPORT USING SAE -------------------- COLUMNS 001 072ND
COMMAND==>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ****************************** TOP OF DATA ****************************
000001 SOURCE=MVSV5R, TARGET=SPARE1
000002
000003 TRACK DIFFERENCE FOUND AT OFFSET 00D5
000004
000005 SOURCE TRACK. LENGTH=
292
000006
000007
........IPL1................................IPL2.... ....... ...
000008 0000 0000001CDDF00000000000000000000000000000009CDDF003B4000303B400000
000009
0000140897310A00000F300000010000000000002400973270A8000610AE000580
000010
000011 007E000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000012
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000013
........................................
000014 00FC 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000015
0000000000000000000000000000000000004000
000016
000017 TARGET TRACK. LENGTH=
292
000018
000019
........IPL1................................IPL2.... ....... ...
000020 0000 000001CDDF00000000000000000000000000000009CDDF003B4000303B400000
28-327
GA
Part VIII: Troubleshooting
Overview
Introduction
The Troubleshooting part of this document describes solutions to commonlyreported SAE issues
In This Part
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
GA
See Page
Wait State Codes
28-330
Stand Alone Dump
28-332
I/O Errors
28-333
28-329
Wait State Codes
Wait State
Descriptions
During normal operation, SAE indicates certain states by loading an enabled
wait state PSW. The following list identifies the state that corresponds to the
low order three bytes of the wait state PSW:
Wait State
Description
FF0000
Initial wait state after SAE has been successfully loaded. It indicates
that SAE is waiting for an interrupt from the 3278-2 type device which
will be used as a console
FF0xxx
The normal wait state when waiting for an I/O interrupt from device
xxx. When no operations are active, xxx is the console address.
Continued on next page
28-330
Wait State Codes, Continued
Error Condition
Description
SAE indicates certain error conditions by loading a disabled wait state PSW.
For disabled wait states, most processors display the wait state PSW on the
processor system console and signal the condition with an audible alarm. The
following list identifies the conditions that correspond to the low order three
bytes of the disabled wait state PSW:
Note: In each case, the low order three bytes of the PSW are for xxDEAD,
where xx is the specific error code.
Error
Condition
Description
39
An attempt was made to use SAE on a processor that does not
support z/Architecture mode. SAE R16 only operates in
z/Architecture mode. If the processor only supports S/370/XA,
S/370/ESA or S/390 mode, you must use SAE Release 15. If the
processor only supports S/370 mode, you must use SAE Release 9.9.
A0
A PSW restart has been attempted or SAE termination was requested.
A1
SAE detected a machine check interrupt.
A3
SAE detected an error for the console device.
Re-IPL SAE and use a different console. If the problem persists, take
a stand-alone dump and contact NewEra Technical Support staff.
A4
The time of day (TOD) clock is in an error, stopped, or notoperational state
A5
Indicates an internal stack error. Take a stand-alone dump and
contact NewEra Technical Support staff.
A6
An I/O error occurred during tape IPL. The tape may contain a data
check or the tape was incorrectly created.
A7
An error occurred that prevented an audit record from being written
to the audit control dataset, so the audit was enabled with
AUDIT_TYPE=ENABLE
A8
Indicates an internal GET/FREE control block error.
A9
Indicates an internal FREE MAIN error.
AA
While IPLing SAE from DASD, the SAE NUCLEUS dataset could
not be found or read.
By
An authorization error. Contact NewEra Technical support staff.
Cy
Indicates a program check has occurred. If console I/O is still
possible, a message appears indicating the interrupt code and address.
Take a stand-alone dump and contact NewEra support staff.
28-331
GA
Stand Alone Dump
SAE Stand Alone
Dump
If a problem occurs, it is often necessary to take a Stand Alone Dump of SAE
to help the NewEra Technical Support Staff in diagnosing the problem.
Procedure
To take the Stand Alone Dump:
Step
Action
1.
Perform a STORE STATUS for the CP on which SAE is running.
2.
IPL from the unit containing SADMP.
3.
Perform normal SADMP procedures as if z/OS was being dumped (tape
output is recommended).
Result: SADMP should indicate that all real storage was dumped, but
virtual storage was not.
28-332
I/O Errors
I/O Error Screen
If an I/O error occurs during a SAE operation, an I/O Error Screen displays
over the current screen. The I/O Error screen gives specific information on the
I/O error and may be helpful in determining the cause.
Screen Print
Use screen print (PF12/PF24) to permanently record the I/O Error Screen
contents.
Sample I/O
Error Screen
***************************** I/O ERROR **************************
*
UNIT: 0192 ERROR: UNIT CHECK
COMMAND REJECT
*
*
DEVICE STATUS: 02 CHANNEL STATUS: 00 BYTE COUNT: 0000
*
*
CCW CHAIN ADDR: 00008C60 FAILING CCW ADDR: 00008C60
*
*
FAILING CCW: B400098420000018 DATA: 0000000000000000
*
*
SENSE: 80000000000001010000000000000000
*
*
00000000000000000000000000000000
*
*
ENTER TO CONTINUE OR PF12 TO PRINT
*
********************************************************************
28-333
GA
*ALIAS, 22-275
*COPIED, 22-275
*NO COPY, 22-275
*NO-REPL, 22-275
*REPL, 22-275
3380, 20-219
3390, 20-219
9345, 20-219
access authority matrix, 5-40
access authority numbers, 5-39
action services
overview, 14-126
ACTION SERVICES, 14-126
action services diagram, 14-129
Action Services Unit Selection Screen, 26-292
ALIAS, 20-210
alias members, 16-178, 22-276
ALIAS-OF, 17-189
ALLOC, 16-161, 16-168
Allocate New Dataset, 14-127
Alter Catalog Entries, 14-128
Alter Contents, 14-128
ALTERCAT, 20-209
Altercat Processing Screen, 20-209
ALTERCAT selection list, 26-293
Altercat Selection Screen, 20-211
altercat services
alter catalog entries, 14-128
capture dataset volser list, 14-128
display catalog entries, 14-128
locate dataset and invoke dataset services, 14-128
Altercat/Listcat Control Screen, 20-208
altering record contents, 15-154
audit
using, 7-62
audit control
allocating new datasets, 7-62
enabling, 7-61
encountering problems, 7-62
overview, 7-61
AUDIT_DSN, 5-47
AUDIT_TYPE, 5-46
AUTHxx=, 4-31
automatic printer output assignment, 11-103
backup control system, 8-66
running, 8-66
Backup Control System, 22-262, 22-263
advantages, 22-263
backup dataset
finding, 22-270
selecting for restore, 22-270
backup dataset list, 8-72
rules, 8-72
Backup Information Screen, 26-307
backup master control, 8-73
Backup Master file, 22-262
backup master selection
commands, 22-271
Backup Master Selection Screen, 22-269
GA
Backup Master Tape Mount Screen, 22-268
Backup Master Update Report, 8-76
backup process diagram, 8-67
backup reporting, 8-74
backup tape mount
processing, 22-272
Backup Tape Mount Screen, 22-267, 22-272
banner page
printing, 13-111
BLOCK SIZE, 16-171
buffered data
flushing, 13-113
CAN, 18-197, 19-204
CAPS OFF, 18-197
CAPS ON, 18-197
Capture Dataset Volser List, 14-128
catalog display list, 20-208
catalog entry
altering, 20-213
selecting, 20-212
catalog list
full, 20-208
Catalog Services, 20-207
CATAUDIT, 7-63
CD-ROM IPL
performing, 9-86
preparing for, 6-59
Change RACF and Password Indicators, 14-127
channel attached printer, 13-112
CHPID, 20-227, 20-249
CHPIDs, 15-137, 20-227, 20-249
CKD, 20-231
clear entire list, 5-44
clipping, 15-141
multiple volumes, 15-141
CLUSTER, 20-210
CNTRL, 20-249
CODE, 20-249
Commands
Edit, 18-197
SAE Common, 18-197
compare
full volume, 26-314
options, 28-327
track level, 28-324
Compare Confirmation Screen, 28-326
compare test
configuring, 26-314
COMPRESS, 24-283
compression
dataset, 16-180
console
establishing via LOADPARM, 9-96
restrictive, 9-95
selecting, 9-95
specifying, 9-95
console devices, 9-95
CONSOLEx, 5-42
CONTIG, 16-169
copy
a smaller volume, 27-320
28-335
all members, 16-176
between different volumes, 16-173
confirmation messages, 27-322
dataset restrictions, 16-179
in the same volume, 16-174
selected members, 16-176
COPY, 16-161, 16-175, 18-197
'COPY ALL MEMBERS', 16-176
Copy Between Datasets, 14-127
Copy Confirmation Screen, 27-322
Copy Members, 14-128
CPU
licensing, 4-31
csect, 17-192
selecting, 17-192
CSECT selection
zap/verify, 17-191
CSECT Selection Screen, 17-191
CYL HH, 15-147
CYLS, 20-227
DASD extent services
alter DASD extent screen, 15-153
cylinder/head address screen, 15-153
invoking, 15-152
DASD IPL
performing, 9-81
preparing for, 6-56
dataset
compression, 16-180
information, 16-166
LICENSE, 4-31
locating, 16-159
rename, 16-164
SAE DLIB, 4-31
saving zapped, 19-205
Dataset Allocation, 15-142, 16-167, 16-169
invoking, 15-142
specifications, 16-169
dataset compare, 26-316
invoking, 26-316
Dataset Copy, 16-172, 16-174, 16-175, 16-179, 16180
restrictions, 16-179
Source and Target Datasets, 16-172
Dataset Copy Screen, 16-173, 16-177
dataset information, 16-165
Dataset Information Screen, 26-296
dataset name
creating, 13-116
Dataset Restore Screen, 22-267, 22-273
dataset selection list
printing, 16-160
Dataset Selection Screen, 16-158, 16-165, 24-283
dataset services
display dataset, 14-127
overview, 16-157
datasets
processing, 16-161
DCB characteristics, 26-296
DELETE, 17-190
Delete Members, 14-128
DEVICE, 20-249
Device Selection List, 20-252
printing, 20-253
Device Selection Screen, 20-249
Device Services, 20-246
device type, 20-248
determining, 20-248
specifying, 20-248
DEVT, 20-227
DEVTYP, 20-248
DF@DLIB.BIN, 2-23, 3-28
DFSMSdss, 24-283
DIAGNOSE, 20-231
DIR FULL, 22-275
DIRECTORY BLKS, 16-169
Disable 3990 Cache, 20-224
Display Catalog Entries, 14-128
Display Contents, 14-128
Display Dataset, 14-127
Display Dataset Information, 14-127
Display Members, 14-128
Display Volume Information, 14-127
Display Volume Map, 14-127
Display Volumes, 14-127
DISTFILE.BIN, 2-23, 3-28
distributing, 1-19
distribution files, 1-19
distribution tapes
trial tapes, 3-29
DLIB@CD, 6-59
DLIB@OPT, 5-38, 5-53, 7-61
DRP Hot Site testing, 20-226
DRPCLIP, 20-231, 20-237
DSF backup, 25-287
DSS, 24-282
DSS backups
COMPRESS not supported, 24-283
DSS DATASET backup, 24-283
DSS DATASET backups, 24-283
DSS FULL backup, 24-283
DSS INSPECT, 26-295, 26-296
DSS restore
preparing for, 26-290
duplicate Volsers, 20-237
ECKD, 20-231
EDIT, 18-194, 19-202
Edit Processing Screen, 18-194
edit services
alter contents, 14-128
copy members, 14-128
display contents, 14-128
print contents, 14-128
undelete member, 14-128
Edit Services, 18-193
overview, 18-193
Edit Volume Extent, 14-127
edit/browse
line commands, 18-198
EMPTY, 16-166
End-of-Volume, 26-310
ENVIRON, 20-231
erase, 20-231
failure, 20-240
28-336
no response conditions, 20-243
selection characters, 20-232
ERASE, 5-43
Erase Alternate Tracks, 20-224
Erase Method, 20-225
Erase Parameter Setting Screen, 20-222, 20-223
erase status
estimate of remaining time, 20-236
monitoring, 20-236
Erase Summary Report, 20-238
ERASEALL, 20-231, 20-234
Erasure Method, 20-225
error code
AA, 6-56
EXTENT, 15-147
extents
locating, 15-150
processing, 15-152
sorting by cylinder, 15-150
sorting by dataset name, 15-150
F text/'text', 19-204
Fast DASD Erase, 20-217
erase status, 20-235
FAST ERASE, 20-223
monitoring, 20-236
overview, 20-217
preventing failures, 20-219
reports, 20-226
starting an erase, 20-233
under VM, 20-219
unit selection, 20-221
unselecting volumes, 20-234
VM Recommendation, 20-219
Fast DASD Erase Parameter Setting Screen, 20-225
FDR backup, 25-287
FDR INSPECT, 26-295, 26-296
FDR restore
preparing for, 26-290
Full Volume Compare, 26-314
Full Volume Erase, 20-223
Full Volume Restore, 26-301
GDG, 20-210
GENERATIONS=, 8-73
hardware compression, 24-283
Hardware Confirmation, 20-244
process, 20-244
Hardware Confirmation application, 26-294
Hardware Confirmation Volume Selection Screen, 24283
Hot Site, 20-219
ICF Catalog, 20-209
ICF Catalogs
selection characters, 16-162
ICKDSF, 6-56
ICKDSF INSTALL, 15-145
IEB Restore
from tape backup, 22-264
IEB Restore process diagram, 22-261
IEBCOPY, 8-66, 22-263
IEBGENER, 8-66, 22-263
IEC604I, 16-164
IEC606I, 16-164
images
before and after, 7-64
IND$FILE, 2-23, 3-28
INDEX_DSN, 5-53
Initial Print to Tape, 13-117
Initialize Volumes, 14-127
INPLACE, 18-197
Inspect, 14-126
Inspect Backup Information Screen, 26-297
inspect function, 26-311
Inspect Tape Mount Screen, 26-296, 26-297, 26-302
installation
completing, 2-25
installing SAE, 1-19
invoke
services, 15-140
services via command line, 15-140
Invoking Copy
member copy status, 16-178
invoking services, 16-161, 17-186
selection characters, 16-162
IPL options
changing, 13-110
IPL SAE
how to, 9-79
ISPF 3.2, 2-23, 3-28
JCL, 4-31
altering for backup master, 8-68
job
CATAUDIT, 7-63
RTPAUDIT, 7-64
Job stream, 2-24, 3-29
jobs
OPTIONS, 5-34
keywords
AUDIT_DSN, 5-47
AUDIT_TYPE, 5-46
CONSOLEx, 5-42
ERASE, 5-43
INDEX_DSN, 5-53
OPTION job, 5-38
PASSWORDx, 5-39
PRINT_DSN, 5-52
PRINT_TYPE, 5-48
PRINT_UNIT, 5-50
PRINT_VOL, 5-51
PROTECT, 5-44
RACFPASS, 5-45
TAPEVOLx, 5-54
KILLALL, 20-231
LICENSE, 4-31
licensing
CPU, 4-31
SAE, 4-31
LISTCAT/ALTERCAT, 25-286
load module csect, 19-202
LOADPARM
establishing a console via, 9-96
locate a member, 17-184
Locate Dataset and Invoked Dataset Services, 14-128
locating a volume, 20-229
logging on
28-337
GA
to SAE, 10-98
LPAR, 9-86
Mailing Address, 20-238
MASTER, 8-70
Master Catalog, 26-292
master copy, 4-31
Master Init. See MSTRINIT
Maximum Auto-restarts per unit, 20-224
MAXVOLS=, 8-73
member
locating, 17-184
undeleting, 18-199
Member Copy Selection Screen, 22-274
Member Selection
zap/verify. See
Member Selection List
edit/browse, 17-182
printing, 17-185
Member Selection Screen, 17-182
member services
delete members, 14-128
display members, 14-128
launching, 17-181
overview, 17-181
print member list, 14-128
rename members, 14-128
select CSECT for zap services, 14-128
select member for edit/zap services, 14-128
members
alias, 22-276
creating new, 17-188
deleting, 17-190
none, 17-187
renaming, 17-189
Modify a Dataset, 18-197, 19-205
MSTRINIT, 8-68
Network File IPL
performing, 9-86
Network IPL
preparing for, 6-59
new installs
SAE, 4-32
NEW LINE, 17-189
no response condition, 20-243
non-labeled tape, 6-58
NONVSAM, 20-210
NOPASSWORD, 16-161
NORACF, 16-161
Optional Printer Control Screen, 13-115
OPTIONS, 5-34
job report, 5-35
Other Dataset Types
selection characters, 16-162
out-of-space
avoiding, 22-273
overlay load modules, 16-180, 22-276
override, 10-99
PARMLIB, 8-72
Partitioned Datasets
restoring to, 22-273
selection characters, 16-162
password, 10-100
criteria, 5-39
password indicator commands, 16-163
PASSWORDRW, 16-161
PASSWORDW, 16-161
PASSWORDx, 5-39
PK Keys, 12-108
prefix.SAE.R11.UTIL.CNTL, 6-59
PRIMARY QTY, 16-169
PRINT, 15-139, 15-151, 16-160, 17-185, 18-196, 20230, 20-253
dataset selection list, 16-160
member selection list, 17-185
Print Contents, 14-128
Print Dataset List, 14-127
Print Member List, 14-128
Print Volume List, 14-127
PRINT_DSN, 5-52
PRINT_TYPE, 5-48
PRINT_UNIT, 5-50
PRINT_VOL, 5-51
printer
accessing settings, 13-111
printer control
screen options, 13-111
Printer Control Screen, 13-111
optional, 13-115
printer output assignment
automatic, 11-103
Printer Selection Screen, 13-114
printing
DASD, 5-48
dataset or member contents, 18-196
directly to a disk dataset, 13-113
IPL, 5-49
member list, 14-128
OFF, 5-48
REAL, 5-48
real channel attached printer, 5-48
switching output direction, 13-119
the volume map list, 15-151
to a channel attached printer, 13-112
to a tape dataset, 13-117
using another controller, 13-115
Processing Screen
Edit, 18-194, 19-202
processors
unlicensed, 10-99
PROTECT, 5-44
QUICK INIT, 20-219
RACF, 16-161
RACF commands, 16-163
RACFPASS, 5-45
RD ERROR, 22-275
real channel attached printer, 5-48
RECFM, 18-193
RECORD FORMAT, 16-170
RECORD LENGTH, 16-171
rename, 16-164, 17-189
Rename Dataset, 14-127
Rename Members, 14-128
REP, 19-204, 19-205
Report
28-338
Diagnostic all Volumes, 20-231
Erase Failure, 20-240
Internal Device Information, 20-231
reports
Fast DASD Erase, 20-226
OPTIONS job, 5-35
RESTART, 20-231
Restarts for same cylinder, 20-224
restore
all members, 22-274
block size rules, 22-265
from FDR or DSF backup, 25-286
from partitioned datasets, 22-264
full volume requirements, 26-291
full volume restore message, 26-309
overlay load modules, 22-276
partitioned dataset, 22-260
performing a DSS restore, 26-300
performing an FDR restore, 26-300
physical dumps, 26-311
select the source, 26-308
selected members, 22-273
sequential dataset, 22-260
single dataset, 26-311
status messages, 26-309
unsupported datasets, 22-265
volume or dataset, 21-257
Restore Confirmation Screen, 26-309
Restore Dataset Selection Screen, 26-308
Restore Selection Screen, 21-258
restore services, 21-257
backup information, 26-307
DFSMSdss restore overview, 24-282
DSS and FDR compare, 26-313
DSS Inspect, 26-296
estimating restore time, 26-311
FDR Inspect, 26-296
FDR/DSF restore iverview, 27-320
FDR/DSF restore overview, 25-286
IEB restore overview, 22-260
restore time, 26-311
using a single drive, 26-305
using cartridge loaders, 26-305
using pre-mounted tapes, 26-304
using two tape drives, 26-304
Restore Volume Selection Screen, 25-287
restricting use, 5-41
RTPAUDIT, 7-64
SAE
access authority numbers, 5-39
accessing setting options, 13-109
applications, 1-12
configuring IPL options, 13-110
confirming licensed processors, 4-32
creating an IPL-able copy, 6-57
distributing, 1-19
DLIB, 4-31
downloading from website, 2-23, 3-28
environment, 1-11
general access, 5-39
how to license, 4-31
installation, 1-19
IPLing from a tape device, 6-58
licensing, 4-31
logging on, 10-98
logon screen, 10-101
master copy, 4-31
messages, 9-82, 9-85, 9-87, 9-92, 9-94
new installs, 4-32
preparing an IPL-able copy, 6-55
primary screen options, 12-107
restricted use, 5-41
supported datasets, 1-14
system requirements, 1-14
unrecoverable errors, 9-88
SAE DLIB, 1-20
SAE IPL
from a 3390 or 3380, 6-56
SAE IPL Options Settings Screen, 13-110
SAE Logon Screen, 10-98
SAE NUCLEUS, 6-56
naming, 6-56
SAE Primary Screen, 10-98
example, 12-106
SAE Settings Screen, 13-109
SAEBKMST, 8-76
SAEBKUP, 8-70, 8-74
SAVE, 18-197
saving
zapped extent records, 15-155
SECONDARY QTY, 16-169
Select Catalog for Altercat Services, 14-127
Select CSECT for Zap Services, 14-128
Select Dataset for Edit Services, 14-127
Select Dataset for Zap Services, 14-127
Select Member for Edit/Zap Services, 14-128
Select Volume for Dataset Services, 14-127
selection screen
field descriptions, 15-133
Selection screen, 15-133
Selection Screen
DASD Extent, 15-153
Dataset Copy, 16-177
SENSE ID, 20-250
sequence numbers, 18-197
Sequential Datasets
selection characters, 16-162
sequential media, 26-311
service selection characters
list of, 15-140
Service selection characters, 15-140
services
invoking, 17-186
SHOWRACF, 16-161
SITEAUTH=, 4-31
SORT, 8-66
sort order
changing, 20-251
SORTCYL, 15-149, 20-228
SORTDEV, 20-251
SORTDSN, 15-149
SORTUNIT, 20-228, 20-251
SORTVOL, 20-228
SPACE UNIT, 16-169
28-339
GA
SPECIFY PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION’, 13-111
stand alone dataset restore, 26-290
startup password, 10-100
status line updates, 26-317
STEPLIB, 8-70
SUBC, 20-227, 20-249
supported backups, 24-283
SYSIN DD, 5-38
SYSOUT1, 8-71
system outages, 14-126
system requirements, 1-14
tape
non-labeled, 6-58
tape dataset
printing, 13-117
tape init. See TAPEINIT
TAPE IPL
performing, 9-84
preparing for, 6-58
Tape List Screen, 26-302
tape mount
complete premount, 26-304
processing, 22-268
single drive, 26-305
single drive with cartridge loader, 26-305
two drive swap, 26-304
Tape Mount Request Screen, 23-279
Tape Mount Screen, 26-306, 26-310
tape scan, 23-278
full, 23-278, 23-280
full display, 23-280
running, 26-294
short, 23-278
short report, 23-279
tape volume serial numbers
capturing, 20-214
TAPEINIT, 8-69
TAPENAM, 8-70
TAPETEST, 8-70
TAPETYP, 8-70
TAPEVOLx, 5-54
target volume, 27-321
'TEMPNAME', 17-187
Time of Day Clock Setting screen, 13-120
configuring, 13-120
TOCDROM, 6-59
TOD. See Time of Day Clock Setting screen
TODISK, 6-56
TOTAPE, 6-58
TP1DSN, 8-71
Track Compare Report, 26-315, 28-327
TRACKS, 15-147
TTR value, 17-183
UNASSIGNED, 15-148
unassigned space, 15-143
Unassigned space, 15-143
uncataloged datasets, 20-215
circumventing, 20-215
UNDELETE, 18-197
Undelete Member, 14-128
UNIT, 20-227, 20-249
unit address range, 15-133
unit search, 15-134
Unit Selection Screen, 15-132, 20-227, 20-246
unit-address specifications, 20-247
UNITS, 20-247
specify, 20-247
Unlabelled volumes, 24-283
unlicensed processors, 10-99
USERCAT, 20-210
UTIL.CNTL, 1-20
UTIL.LOAD, 1-20
VER, 19-204, 19-205
view/alter screen
can, 15-155
find, 15-155
replace, 15-155
verify, 15-155
virtual machine
DASD IPL, 9-93
IPLing, 9-89
preparing for use, 9-90
TAPE IPL, 9-91
VM. See virtual machine, See virtual machine
volser, 20-227
default names, 8-69
volume
initialization, 15-144
locating, 20-229
volume compare
identify source, 28-325
identify target, 28-325
overview, 28-324
Volume Copy, 27-321
volume information, 15-143
volume initialization, 15-145
output, 15-145
procedure, 15-145
Volume Initialization, 15-145
Volume Initialization Screen, 15-144
volume list
changing sort order, 20-228
creating, 15-132
printing, 20-230
unit search, 15-134
volume map, 15-147
accessing, 15-147
volume map extent list
sorting, 15-149
volume selection list
re-use previous, 15-136
Volume Selection List, 15-136, 15-139
printing, 15-139
Volume Selection Re-Use Screen, 13-121, 15-135
advantages, 15-135
disadvantages, 15-135
Volume Selection Screen, 15-137, 15-143
volume services, 15-131
allocate new dataset, 14-127
change RACF and password indicators, 14-127
copy between datasets, 14-127
copying between datasets, 14-127
display, 14-127
display dataset information, 14-127
28-340
display information, 14-127
display map, 14-127
edit extents, 14-127
initialize, 14-127
overview, 15-131
print dataset list, 14-127
print list, 14-127
rename, 14-127
rename dataset, 14-127
select catalog for altercat services, 14-127
select dataset for edit services, 14-127
select dataset for zap services, 14-127
select volume for dataset services, 14-127
volumes
accidental initialization, 15-146
renaming, 15-141
VTOC, 15-145
indexed records, 16-164
selecting, 15-146
VTOC dataset rename, 16-164
VTOC free space, 24-283
VTQUICK, 20-254
what's new, 1-15, 1-16
wildcard, 5-44
WRKUNIT, 8-71
WRTERROR, 22-275
z/OS
backup control system, 8-66
zap
list of line commands, 19-204
Zap Processing Screen, 19-202
zap screen
exiting without saving, 15-155
zap services
alter contents, 14-128
display contents, 14-128
Zap Services, 19-201
Zap/Verify Member List, 17-183
Zap/Verify screen, 19-202
zapped dataset
saving, 19-205
zapped extent record
saving, 15-155
28-341
GA